Home

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non

1. Model name Type Model name FA500 UT320 F3SP05 UT321 F3SP08 UT350 F3SP10 UT351 F3SP20 UT420 F3SP30 UT450 F3FP36 UT520 F3SP21 UT550 F3SP25 UT551 YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 Series F3SP35 UT750 F3SP28 UP350 F3SP38 UP351 F3SP53 UP550 F3SP58 UP750 F3SP59 UM330 F3SP66 UM331 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT 100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Series UM F3SP76 7S 0 351 100 051000 NFJT100 UT130 F3SP05 UT150 F3SP08 UT152 F3SP10 UT155 F3SP20 UP150 F3SP30 UT2400 F3FP36 UT2800 F3SP21 UT32A YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 Series F3SP25 UT35A F3SP35 UT52A F3SP28 UT55A F3SP38 UP35A F3SP53 UP55A F3SP58 UM33A F3SP59 DMC10 F3SP66 SDC15 F3SP67 SDC25 F3SP76 7S SDC26 SDC35 SDC36 YAMATAKE SDC DMC Series SDC20 SDC21 SDC30 SDC31 SDC40A SDC40B SDC40G 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Model name Type Model name x H PCP J 1761 L10BWA 9 n H PCP A 1761 L10BWB Y 2 H PCP B 1761 L16AWA 2 10 1761 L16BWA ga Z DIO 1761 L16BWB Z CT 1761 L16BBB CB100 1761 L32AWA z
2. When setting devices using the offset function the UE ES 27 E device values as follows 0 Ear Ean Eai 2 Input 1 16 Fixed to 0 onu Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8to 15 550 2 BOE 0 T2 256 EQ20 EQ21 EQ22 Device range error 9 16 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 I Oro 32 13 1 132 13 3 34 13 5 136 37 13 8 48 42 143 44 45 146 7 14 8 64 15 1 152 15 3 154 155 156 157 158 80 16 1 16 2 16 3 164 165 166 167 168 Fixedtoo e 96 17 1 17 2 17 3 17 4 17 5 176 177 17 8 OFF E 13 6 1 SICK Safety Controller SICK 932 112 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 185 166 187 188 5 Flexi Soft 8 128 19 1 192 193 194 195 96 197 98 2 144 110 1 10 2 110 3 110 4 105 110 6 107 108 5 d 160 111 1 141 2 111 3 111 4 111 5 111 6 017 111 8 Device 176 112 1 12 2 12 3 1124 2 5 112 6 112 7 12 8 No z Device Setting range 192 Device range error represent ation b Output Q SS ee ee Input 1 11 1 to 112 8 Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 47 80 15 ARE ar E utpu 2 a 0 01 1
3. The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used 5 H H For the settings refer to the following Model name 5 Model name PXR3 95 H 302 co PXR4 702 5 1002 PXRQ H 2002 FUJI PXR PXG PXH 4 Si H 4010 On 5 300 E 5 700 5 9 OT H 2000 SPH2000 H 200 FUJI MICREX SX SPH SPH3000 H 250 8 gt 252 61120 H 252B GL130 zo H 252C YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 GL60S HITACHI HIDIC Series H 20DR GL60H H 28DR GL70H H 40DR MP920 H 64DR MP930 H 20DT YASKAWA CP 9200SH MP 900 Series 99 940 z H 28DT 3 CP 9200SH Su H 40DT YASKAWA CP 9200 H CP 9200 H H 64DT YASKAWA CP 9300MS MC compatible CP 9300MS B HL 40DR 2200 HL 64DR 2300 eru EH CPU104 DEO MP920 B ug EH CPU208 E YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH MP930 OFO EH CPU308 Po engs MP940 EH CPU316 CP 9200SH LQP510 CP 312 E LQP520 317 LQP800 oz 25 HITACHI S10mini S10V LQP000 20 8 LQP010 LQP011 LQP120 29 za F55 5 F70 0 FUJI MICREX F Series F120S 55 F140S F150S a SEE 565 0 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface
4. e E z The following diagram shows the connection between the 2 w GOT and the PLC TM 929 RS232 connection diagram 3 uu E LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM 526 1 23 1 RS 232 cable GOT side terminal block PLC side Oro SD L 4 RXD2 Connection diagram RD we i 7 TXD2 e RS232 connection diagram 1 ER 1 5V 5 a LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM GOT side PLC side DR 2 RXD1 9 1 i a cae cee paces SG 1 8 SG conc 1 Jafos RS 3 TXDA pits RD RXD 2 7 TXD2 cs 6 5V SD TXD 3 gt 4 RXD2 8 SG ER DTR 4 2 RXD1 2 se s Js se vr e 3G 9 DR DSR 6 3 TXD1 wo RS232 connection diagram 4 RS RTS 7 6 5V GOT side terminal block LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM i PLC side CS CTS B 586 Rp ete ceo i 2 RXD 911 9 SG id Da RD 4 1 i 3 TXD 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC ER CD T 2 GT105 T GT104 NC mE DR L 4 DTR gt 5232 connection diagram 2 E B LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEM SG 5 SG fay GOT side PLC side RS 6 DSR 1 1 i CD CD NC 1 1 cs 7 RTS TXD RD RXD 2 6 3 SD TXD 2 m gt 1
5. SE H Connection cable 1 PLC Connection cable GOT umber Communication connectable odel name 4 onnection diagram ption device ode equipment Modules Type number distance quip IC697CPX772 ct 3 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 Built into GOT IC697CPX935 cu IC697CPU780 se IC697CPU788 697 711 RS 232 8885232 connection 45m 1 PLC for 1 GOT IC697CPU789 diagram 1 IC697CPU731 mm IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 697 790 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation For the RS 422 connection Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT NURSE Of umber PLC Pong uA am Ma Option devic Model 1 1 1 agr 1 equipment Modules Tee distance quip 028785422 connection preparing a GT 1200 Built into GOT 697 782 IC697CPX928 1200m GT16 CO02R4 9S 0 2m IC697CPX935 IC697CPU780 GT15 RS2T4 9P 697 788 1 697 711 RS 422 o PEG Tur IC697CPU789 RS422 connection IC697CPU731 diagram 4 1200m Built into GOT WUE IC697CGR772 941 IC697CGR935 697 790 GT15 RS4 9S 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect
6. RS232 connection diagram 4 GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side following diagram shows the connection between the 2 5 c GOT and the PLC CD NC 1 o 4 CD Bid Oz RS 232 cable RO RXD di lis 20 SD TXD 3 gt 2 RXD Oro 1 Connection diagram ER DTR 4 i 4 4 RS232 connection diagram 1 SG 5 5 SG GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side i i 2 DR DSR 6 Ly 6 DSR 4 pot cp 9 RS RTS 7 4 p 7 RTS RD RXD 2 1 TXD gt CS CTS kH iH 8 CTS SD TXD 3 1 2 RXD 1 9 E FG n ER DTR 4 6 DSR jJ te 4 SG 5 5 SG 1 GT46 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC DR DSR 6 lt 4 DTR RS232 connection diagram 5 E RS RTS i 7 RTS GOT side terminal block ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side CS CTS je cts Ze 1 1 z 9 FG SD 7 9 2 Moe EN i RD 3 TXD 1 6716 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC GT105 T GT1040 NC 6 DSR i RS232 connection diagram 2 DR l 4 GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side SG i 5 SG 9 lt 2 1 1 t gt CD NC 1 i 1 FG RS 1 CD 200 i ae RD RXD 2 k 2 TXD cs 7 RTS 82
7. ac PROGIC 8 Ow 2 p 2c Communication driver Communication driver o aos o 895 YASKAWA GLICP9200 SH H CP9300MS YASKAWA MP aaz For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 For GT10 Pe zo Oo S zo Connection cable S 71 OU 2 Connection cable GOT umber mmunica cz Model name iG i communie Canle mogel Max Option device Model Connection diagram number distance P equipment 5 module QUE GTO09 C30R20201 9P 3m iffers gt according to Built into GOT MP 920 User PLC side E BG MP 930 5 232 a RS232 connection diagram 1 specifications 2 GT15 RS2 9P Lr same as as GT S RS232 connection diagram 6 ab ve Built into GOT 2 H GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m abs 22 or sameas Built into GOT above E connecting to port1 25985232 connection diagram 1 Serial o GT15 RS2 9P PLC 969 GT09 C30R20202 15P 3m a PROGIC 8 A sameas Built into GOT 555 connecting to port2 T above 55 9232 connection diagram 2 Serial 2 GT15 RS2 9P CP 9300MS o GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m T z9 CP 9300MC _ sameas Built into GOT compatible non above 6741 E RS232 connection diagram 3 Es 5 2 GT15 RS2 9P 2 gt Bo
8. BATTERY 222 Standard interface 1 Standard interface 3 GOT built in RS 422 interface GOT built in USB interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface h GT1020 GT1030 Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 2 or GOT built in RS 232 interface GOT built in RS 232 interface Lr I 00000000000000000000 D 0000 DG SDA sp 0 DA 1g DB 1g 5 0 RSA 16 58 1 CSA 00000000000000000000 gt 1 1 12 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 1 2 I F communication setting This function displays the list of the GOT communication interfaces Set the channel and the communication driver to the interface to be used Setting CH No Driver Oss None sss Setia Ossi None Deta Seting Detail Setting Extend I F 2 a 1 Select Common I F Communication Setting from the menu 2 The Communication Setting dialog box appears Make the settings with reference to the following explanation 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 13 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Setting item 1 14 The following describes the setting items for the standard I F setting and extensi
9. ipo 4 3 1 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX SX SPH E lt 592 Communication driver Ce Ethernet FUJI Gateway Connection cable e za 25 d PLC Connection cable GOT Oas Eth 7 m M Number of connectable erne ax 4 Model 2 Cable model Option device Model equipment interface module Connection diagram number distance When PLC GOT is 1 N The following shows the 5 SPH200 number of GOTs for 1 PLC I SPH300 Built i 128 or less NP1L ET1 100m Built into 4 29 SPH2000 GOT When PLC GOT is 1 N E SPH3000 IDEAS The following shows the EE Jis pair cable STP or number of GOTs for 1 PLC 8 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP or less Category 3 4 and 5 100BASE TX When PLC GOT is 1 Shielded twisted pair cable STP The following shows the z Category 5 and 5e of GOTs for 1 PLC SPH2000 Built into less 7 oD Za SPH3000 GOT When PLC GOT is 1 N 2 The following shows the e E number of GOTs for 1 PLC 10 or less 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system 5 Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system ow Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BAS
10. 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 e 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal S 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal a Connecting terminating resistors 9 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 9 I RS485 connection diagram 7 z x2 interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W convener Temperature Temperature K3SC 10 n controller side controller side E X PU i 5 E E T 5 rt rl 1 o 9 8 E Eu ARFON os 3 3 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 iG 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 a e re ES z e 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller and an interface converter which will be terminals 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 8 ae Temperature Temperature GOTside controller side
11. Device No Device name Setting range 2 represen tation One shot timer UW UW000 to UWOFO Up down counter CW 00 to CWFO Global link register GW GWO000 to GWFFO Event register EW EWO00 to EWFFO System register SW SW000 to SWBFO Transfer register JW JWO000 to JWFFO Receive register QW QWO000 to QWFFO On delay timer current 000 to TC1FF value TC On delay timer set value 5000 to TS1FF TS One shot timer current 0 000 to UCOFF value UC One shot timer set value 2 05000 to USOFF US Up down counter current 2 to E value CC 9 Up down counter set Ev gt CS00 to CSFF imal value CS Function data register DW000 to DWFFF DW 4 5 Function work register 4 5 000 to FWBFF FW Extended function work 4 5 LWW0000 to LWWFFFF register LWW Backup work register 5 LXW0000 to LXW3FFF LXW Long word work register 3 LLLOOOO to LLL1FFF LLL Backup Long word work 34 LMLO0000 to LML1FFF register LML Floating point work register 3 LF0000 to LF1FFF LF Backup single precision floating point work register LG0000 to LG1FFF LG 1 Only reading is possible 2 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 3 Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed 4 When it is used with bit specification bit specification of word device the off
12. ipo 6 2 1 System configuration for connecting to GL120 GL130 E up 592 Communication driver E Loom YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS E Connection cable 2 m E 25 Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Model MEMOBUs Commun Cable model Max en Rohs Option device Model equipment name module Connection diagram number distance GT GT S o GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m mers oi O according to Built into GOT 5 232 PLC side 1 GOT for 1 PLC 2 lt Gs RS232 connection diagram 1 DM 8 specifications GT15 RS2 9P same as E GL120 25085422 connection diagram 1 M Built into GOT S GT GT16 CO2R4 98 GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m 0 2m JAMSC Eidos GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m 2 1 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS 2 120 0 27100 GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m eae oe module GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m above GT15 RS4 9S amp m or GT GT Gs RS422 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT 3 Serial ec 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 2 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 5 E See Oro Zee 888 9 Po 2 On os Eier Ze 5 os CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE C
13. GOT side YASKAWA PLC side SDA1 TXD1 3 RX SDB1 TXD1 4 RX RDA1 RXD1 1 TX RDB1 RXD1 2 TX SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 6 RX RDB2 RXD2 8 TX RSA RTS 9 TX RSB RTS 10 RX CSACTS CSB CTS 12 SG 13 VCC NC 14 GND RS422 connection diagram 4 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side SDA1 TXD1 1 ae gt RX SDBA TXD1 2 4 RX RDA1 RXD1 3 it 4 T RDB1 RXD1 4 M 4 2 TX SDA2 TXD2 5 1 5 SDB2 TXD2 6 RX RDA2 RXD2 7 TN 7 RXR RDB2 RXD2 8 8 TX RSA RTS 9 ali 9 RSB RTS 10 10 RX 11 aa ON 1 TXR CSB CTS 12 12 SG 13 13 VCC 14 14 Shell 1__ RXR with RX and TXR with TX 2171 01 and insert the terminating resistor RS422 connection diagram 5 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side RDA 2 lt 2 SDA RDB 7 6 9 SDB SDA 1 3 RDA SDB 6 6 RDB RSA 3 1 PGND RSB 8 rece csa d CSB 9 7 SG SG 5 pT FG RS422 connection diagram 6 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side RDA 2 lei 7 RDB 7 LJ s TX SDA 1 l 2 RX SDB H 1 RSA 3 3 RSB k 6 TXR csa 4 le 4 RXR CSB 9 6 SG 5 Fe H 4 ee 3 1 The terminating re
14. 6 32 6 4 2 YASKAWA 92005 900 6 33 643 9200 AE 6 33 6 4 4 YASKAWA CP9300MS MC 6 33 6 4 5 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH 5 6 34 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 Model eek Mee eae ed 7 2 7 2 Serial Connection 7 3 7 2 1 System configuration for connecting to 7 3 7 2 2 System configuration for connecting to 00 7 5 7 2 3 System configuration for connecting to 7 5 Tat Gonnectionmdlagramm RIDERE RI ERREUR 7 6 7 2 5 GOT side settings sine eee ed rende de ee 7 8 TGr PLC Side Sting eet eme ee E e d ert breeds 7 9 7 2 7 Connecting to CPU port D sub 9 pin conversion cable SIO port adapter cable 7 10 7 2 8 Connecting PC link module F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N 11 2 7 10 7 2 9 Connecting PC link module F3LC11 1F 12 7 11 7 2 10 Connecting PC link module LCO1 ON 02 0 7 12 7 2 11 Connecting to 5 7 13 7 2 12 Precautions 1 se te
15. start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 485 1 N Transmission speed 1 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits or 7bits Even Odd Parity bit Done None Stop bit bit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station 72 01099 Terminating resistor ON or OFF T link channel switch ee 737 FUJI PLC user s Manual T link terminating resistor 24 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 3 ON the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal 4 Set as necessary 2 Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting switch Character configuration switches Baudrate setting switch MODE switch RS 485 terminating resistor T link channel switch ON OFF switch T link terminating resistor ON OFF switch RS 485 station No switches Setting of the MODE e Transmission speed settings Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch Make the settings using the baudrate setting switches MODE Switch position Command setting type start stop maki z a E synchronization nonsequence 4 amp 2 format mE HOS RS 232C 1 1 4 aos Co
16. The following shows the connector specifications on the GOT side Refer to the following table when preparing connection cables by the user 25 232 interface ir 2 2 Use the following as the RS 232 interface RS 232 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side connection cable use connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 Connector specifications Hardware o GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer version 5 1 GT16 17LE 23090 27 D4CLD 5 GT1595 X DDK Ltd 25 17LE 23090 27 D4CK za GT1585V S or later GM C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD 17LE 23090 27 D4CK DDK Ltd GT1575V S B or later GM C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd o GT1575 STBA 17LE 23090 27 D4CK DDK Ltd zu GT1575 STBD 53 D or later GM C9RMDU11 Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Om GT1575 VTBA E 9 pin D sub male inch screw fixed type GT1575 VTBD 5 GT1575 VN 5 Fw GT1572 VN zE 17LE 23090 27 D4CK eii GT1565 V 55 GT1562 VN 2 0112 SHS GT1550 GT14 GT115 O Q 17LE 23090 27 D3CC 67105 O Q on GT104 O0 Q 9 E GT1030 GT1020 9 pin terminal block MC1 5 9 G 3 5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc 2 lt GT15 RS2 9P 9 D sub mal EET 17LE 23090 27 D3CC DDK Ltd GT01 RS4 M inch screw fixed type For t
17. PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Communic Cable model Max Model equipment Option device ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT GT GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m or Built into GOT Series 15m RS232 connection diagram pu 814 950 SLC500 RS 232 se 1 1 GOT for 1 PLC GT15 RS2 9P 05 5232 connection diagram T 5 15m Built into GOT When connecting to multiple PLCs DH485 network Connection cable Adapter PLC Connection cable GOT ble m Series 1 communicatio ee ne ram Max Option device Model Adapter DUNS g equipment number Built into GOT User 141 12 SLC500 1770 KF3 RS 232 89232 connection 45m 1 GOT for 1 adapter diagram 2 61090 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 10 4 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series When connecting to one PLC Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT omm ies 2 m Cableimogel Max Option device Model Saris Us Connection diagram number distance k 1761 CBL PMO02
18. ac Lo Communication driver Communication driver 5 m E 5 Cem Cim YASKAWA GLICP9200 SH H ICP9300MS YASKAWA MP a gt roo For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 For GT10 Taz za ed eee Connection cable lt 28 Connection cable GOT Number of connectable o omm oem Cable model Max E cation Option device Model equipment z name Connection diagram number distance S Type 5 GT09 C30R20204 14P 3m iers Ci or according to Sa PLC side sa 614 950 RS 232 Uss RS232 connection diagram 4 GT15 RS2 9P E same as 232 connection diagram 7 Built into GOT 211020 5 5588422 connection diagram 3 300m Built into GOT rate GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m 25 GT GT GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 422 GT09 C200R40202 14P 20m 300m GT09 C300R40202 14P 30m Built into GOT 2 Ga User RS422 connection diagram 7 GT15 RS4 9S lt o Differs 2 ES according to ee RS 422 Uss RS422 connection diagram 9 PLC a Built into GOT pir specifications 9 1 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 9 O 2 On os Eier Ze 5 os CONNECTION TO YO
19. GOT Temperature 1 2 Temperature controller T controller ERE 7 m rer equ it it i 4 SDA I RX E RAF 1 1 1 SDB RX RX 1 1 1 1 RDA TX TX 1 1 1 1 RDB ET TX T TX SG SG SG bg i 11 x 4 Terminating resistor 1000 1 2Wy 1 2 3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 4 wire type 2Pair Terminating resistor OPEN 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 23 Temperature Temperature 5 GOT side controller 1 gl controller S 75 4 amp o SDB 1 28 RDA1 RXD1 r3 r1 r1 r1 SDB ESS e pog RDB1 RXD1 4 E SDA E SDA1 TXD1 1 RDB 59 SDB1 TXD1 2 E NEN RDAC 1 J RDA r
20. 01 NR 1 NR YOKOGAWA PLC side YOKOGAWA PLC side lene teen ene le ecc cec Litt td TT RS422 connection diagram 3 GOT side RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram GOT side E o RS422 connection diagram 4 RDA RDB SDA SDB RSA RSB CSA CSB SG FG 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC RDB RDA SDB SDA SG SHIELD YOKOGAWA PLC side gt 1 i i YOKOGAWA PLC side KM RY TEL 1 i 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S So So os Sele nm KR F ENQ s g Se Nn See s g 89 7189 2 E EC eae mi 1 1 1 1 8 2 29293 8 2 8 gLegggRgeggeeee 9 2 0 A erer Q 2 5 52528208 6 552828299 a a a a a a
21. Communication detail settings CEDE Make the settings according to the usage environment Setting communication interface 2 50 VL Communication settings 1 GT16 GT14 Set the channel of the connected equipment Property Z55 GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192168318 IP Label en Subnet Mask 2552552550 None Bou Controller Type SIEMENS S7 Ethernet Default Gateway 0000 o 8 D Ethernet Standard I F Ethernet Multi Eth D load Port N 5014 5 E 5 Information i Ethernet SIEMENS 57 Gateway Seba Ee ne ate sd Dp z d Somat GOT Communication Port No 5023 20 Gateway Server 8 Client Startup 3 8 in HUE A Timeout Time Sec 3 Staten Na 8 Delay lt 10 lt 8 2552552550 Default Gateway 0000 Ethernet Download Port No 5014 GOT Communication Port No 5023 Item Description Range 5 Set the network No of the GOT GOT Default 1 1 to 239 g Set the station No of the zo 2 1 to 254 GOT PLC Default 1 50 GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to Address Default 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 255 cancer Appl E xn Set the subnet mask for the sub e network Only for connection via z 9 4 router 0 0 0 0 to eae Subnet Mask i the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 Ors 1
22. Connection cable 2 Temperature 2 P Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller able model ble model Cable S 5 Model Communication Cable Model Connection Connection Option device Model distance name Type distance diagram number diagram number FB100 User RS485 User RS232 94 1 400 1200 RS 232 15 Built into GOT connection CD485 V 23 connection m FB900 diagram 8 diagram 3 Serial 54 GT15 RS2 9P When connecting directly to a temperature controller by RS 422 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd Number of connectable equipment Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT Number of Option device Built into GOT Model GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m connectable equipment GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS4 0S Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 Built into GOT 6741 Serial Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 ee Cable model Cable model Max Connection diagram Connection diagram distance name Type number number FB400 9 5422 connection 05885422 connection 900 diagram 4 dia
23. lt 9 51 TE OnO CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Communication RS 232 H PCP J RS 422 727924 SR Mini HG RS 485 H PCP A RS 232 H PCP B RS 422 x 2922 ZTO RS 232 SRZ Z DIO x RS 422 737923 XT RS 485 CB100 CB400 RS 232 CB CB500 x x x 9 2 4 CB700 CB900 FB100 x RS 485 400 5 232 lt 9 2 5 RS 422 O O O O x 900 RS 485 RB100 RB400 RB RB500 x RS 485 737926 RB700 RB900 PF900 snipe PF901 x RS 422 RS 485 HA400 401 RS 422 RS 485 RMC RMC500 x RS 485 x 927 RS 232 MA RS 422 RS 485 RS 422 AG AG500 x RS 485 O x O x x RS 422 THV THV A1 x 2 s 928 SA100 RS 232 SA SA200 x gt 927 Continued to next page 9 2 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER
24. lt 8 38 Er 22 8s ES 29 O a 5 lt ES 9 x e gt o o mE OTO ae ZOE 2 rene 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series GREEN Model name UT320 UT321 UT350 UT351 UT420 UT450 UT520 UT550 UT551 UT750 UP350 UP351 UP550 UP750 UM330 UM331 UM350 UM351 US1000 Clock Communication Type RS 232 RS 485 611 1 Serial GT 1045 Refer to 37821 UT100 UT130 UT150 UT152 UT155 UP150 RS 232 RS 485 8 2 2 UT2000 UT2400 UT2800 RS 232 RS 485 37823 UTAdvanced UT32A UT35A UT52A 55 0 75 UP35A UP55A UM33A RS 232 RS 485 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model List 7278224 8 2 System Configuration S 8 2 1 Connecting to GREEN Series 55
25. 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 33 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch according to the connection type Enable the 5V power supply Make sure to validate Enable the 5V power supply in the RS232 Setting to operate the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 57 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT When validating the function using the utility function of the GOT main unit refer to the following manual gt GT14 User s Manual 8 2 Utility Function List 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 wire 1Pair ON ON OFF 2 wire 4 wire 4 wire 2Pair OFF OFF 1100 ON OFF OFF OFF Terminating resistor OPEN OFF OFF OFF 330Q OFF ON ON OFF RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter For details on the RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter refer to the following manual 5 GT14 RS2T4 9P RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adapter User s Manual 1 34 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication Settings of the Utility Chan
26. 14 18 14 4 3 SIEMENS S7 Ethernet De t Enn ER E bec ese albae aede d 14 18 14 44 SIEMENS OP Ethernet 14 18 15 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 15 1 Connectable Model 11 enne en nnne nennen nnns 15 2 15 2 System Configuration tr Pe RR 15 2 1653 Diagram oae pee ede uec e e decet de ta 15 2 154 Side Settings ede e pd t o idus 15 2 155 iBEG Sde S etA 15 2 15 6 Device Range that Can Be 15 2 16 CONNECTION MURATEC CONTROLLER 16 1 Connectable Model 22 4 1 1 0 16 2 16 22 System ConfIQUratlori beso equae ated educ enean d Raine cea 16 2 16 3 Connection Diagram nsis suiii iaaa en nee 16 2 16 4 GOT Side 200000 16 2 16 5 MURATEC Controller Side 16 2 16 6 Device Range that Can Be 16 2 INDEX REVISIONS WARRANTY MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product Refer to each manual for any purpose Screen creation software manuals Manual Name Packaging Manu
27. 2 2 8 3 UT 100 S6ri68 ne rrr iens 8 5 UT2000 Series 8 6 UTAdvanced Series 8 7 Index 3 INDEX REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Oct 2009 Manual Number SH NA 080870ENG A Revision First edition Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 01B Jan 2010 SH NA 080870ENG B Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 10L Correction of writing errors Station monitoring function Ethernet multiple connection compatible temperature controller connection compatible compatibility with RKC temperature controller FB series compatible RB series compatible and Connection to Hirata Corporation HNC controller Jun 2010 SH NA 080870ENG C Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 17T GT1675 VN GT1672 VN and GT1662 VN are added SICK safety controller connection compatible Oct 2010 SH NA 080870ENG D Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 19V RKC temperature controller RB500 RB700 compatible Jan 2011 SH NA 080870ENG E Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 23Z YAMATAKE temperature controller DMC50 compatible RKC temperature controller PF HA RMC MA AG THV compatible Apr 2011 SH NA 080870ENG F Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 28E YASKAWA PLC CP 317 compatible RKC temperature control
28. 10 20 11 11 1 Connectable Model 2 2 2 2 4 1 2 00001 0000111001 11 2 TEZ System ConfIQUration 2 cio cor Eco ceca heme idu a idc fee ade ERR c agn 11 3 11 2 1 Connecting to Series90 30 2 1 12 1 50 10 nente denne ente 11 3 11 2 2 Connecting to 90 70 1700 11 6 11 2 3 Connecting to VersaMax 11 7 11 3 Connection Diagram ct o oed hM eec intenta dieci a 11 9 Thot RS 292 Cable ries tet tetro eo Unete olii 11 9 11 3 2 RS 422 cable ento ete Iit Ren 11 10 11 4 GOT Side Settings nd 11 14 11 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 11 14 11 4 2 Communication detail 11 14 TLS PEC Side Settirig E E er onde teta 11 15 11 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 50 11 15 11 5 2 Connecting to 11 15 11 5 3 Connecting to 69 311 11 16 11 5 4 Connecting to 6 7 11 11 16 11 5 5 Station number 2 4 1 10111001 00 11 16 11 66 Devic
29. _ GEPLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC HNC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO _ HIRATACORPORATION MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 10 4 Device Range that Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item Bit CH1 AB Control CompactLogix Device Information 0 2 Fe d E Kin Les anos 5 5 Fie No J No Gaa 0 31999 Network Other TUB Item Description Set the device name file number element number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Importing the tag file created by RSLogix5000 Device and confirming the tag name is available during device setting For importing tag files refer to the following manual Designer3 1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals
30. b xg b ug vr vw vr wr vr wr b lt vr wr wr 11 1 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Series90 30 Model name IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 Clock Communication Type RS 232 RS 422 6741 Serial 020 Refer to 37124 Series90 70 697 0731 IC697CPX772 IC697CPX782 IC697CPX928 IC697CPX935 697 0780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 IC697CPU788 IC697CPU789 697 790 RS 232 RS 422 371122 VersaMax Micro 11 2 2000 003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 2000 028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDR005 IC200UDR006 IC200UDRO010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDR064 2000 014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDRO001 IC200UDRO002 IC200UDR003 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC RS 232 RS 422 11 1 Connectable Model List 727 11 2 3 11 2 System Configuration c E E z 11 2 1 Connecting to Series90 30 Qu 85 202 oro POINT Connectable model ez Only the models that are compat
31. rt e 1 72 RS422 connection diagram 4 GOT side RSA CSA RSB CSB 11 11 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 Connection Diagram 5 A terminating resistor should be connected to communication module at a terminal station Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 71 2 RS422 connection diagram 5 RT RD B RD A SD B SD A SG RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B 11 10 13 12 6 15 14 8 terminating resistor 120072 PLC PLC GOT side RDA RDB SG Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 1 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal RS422 connection diagram 6 terminating resistor 120072 l pic PLC GOT side TITE c c o o Y o Y o N gt 9 P amp nmn FS i Polit Poli chet 1 RDB SG RSA CSA RSB CSB G A Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a c
32. controller side 1 1 i E 1 29 SDA 1 1 1 1 f H 1 a Vai jt SDB 7 d RDA 2 id ZS 2 RDB 7 s 62 ox et bs Terminati istor 1000 1 2W RSA 3 erminating resistor CSA 4 RSB 8 CSB 9 zu es 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending the model Refer to the following table 9 Model of temperature controller 2 Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 18 7 1 7 1 14 2 14 8 2 8 2 16 E 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 53 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be terminal e B T Gau Connecting terminating resistors 5 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 9 656 o gt oO 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 9 5 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 9 71 Temperature Temperature GOT side O controller side ______ controller side E ar an E ri a SDA ji 1 Lc 1 SDB 2 RDA f RDB 7 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table 2 3 4 Model of temperature con
33. gt Verifying the project data and OS Verify the standard monitor OS communication driver option lt 37 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT Attachin the communication unit and KE 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection con necting the cable lt 3 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection lt _ gt Each chapter System Configuration gt Each chapter Connection Diagram Mount the optional equipment and prepare connect the connection cable according to the connection type gt Verifying GOT recognizes connected equipment 1s Verify the GOT recognizes controllers on Communication Settings of the Utility Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment gt Verifying the GOT is monitoring normally Verify the GOT is monitoring normally using Utility Developer 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring etc 1 2 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Set the communication interface of GOT and the connected equipment When using the GOT at the first time make sure to set the channel of communication interface and the communication driver before writing to GOT Set the communication interface of the GOT at Controller Setting and I F Communication Setting GT Designers PREPARATORY PROCEDURE
34. Connection cable 2 Connection cab CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER Tempera 5 Connection Connection abled cable 2 Converter 2 Connection cable 3 GOT controller Max Number of Cable model Cable model distance Cable model able m e moi Model Max equipment Connection Connection nication Connection Option device Model E name f distance zo diagram number diagram number Type diagram number 6a o W BF 28 0500 5 0 5m Built into ex zu W BF 01 0500 W BF 28 1000 GOT 8 5 User RS422 0 5m 1 2 to 31 400 W BF 01 1000 W BF 28 3000 temperature i 3 COM A RS 232 15 E FB900 FUCO 1m 1000m 5 3m m controllers S diagram 4 W BF 01 300 or Nul GT15 RS2 9P or 3m RS232 9 a connection 2 5 diagram 2 lt e 2 5 1 Use communication 1 for the communication format 2 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 g 52 58 EC Sz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 13 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485 V ml S eIvIA Connection cable 1
35. Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LET2Z OT Condition setting switch CEE IP address switch Right side view with the cover 1 IP address switch Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on the side of the base unit 07 07 07 07 92 929 beg 6661 beg beg 07 07 07 07 amp amp gt gt amp NS amp es aD SVs beg beg beg 6561 Hexadecimal CO A8 FA D2 1 1 Decimal 192 168 250 210 2 Condition setting switch Set the data format write protection or operation mode with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit Switch ies Description Set value No 1 Data code OFF ASCII 2 Write protect OFF not protect 12345678 3 34 5 R served ON not available OFF always 6 7 8 OFF normal operation mode 7 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 7 3 7 Precautions vig 4 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface Device range When performing monitoring with the GOT connected 5 at El to YOKOGAWA PLC setting devices for objects 65 Project setting configuration setting ae Woz use devices within the device range of the Set the setting
36. hu RXD On iu RXD 23 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Q Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 5 9 9 15 7 1 7 1 14 2 o9 14 8 2 8 2 16 5 a 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 5 Terminating resistor should be provided outside for interface converter which will be a terminal with the terminating switch 5 turned OFF Ox 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 2 Interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W 2 converter 2 m Temperature SI 30A 2 controller side controller side gS 1 1 1 22 018 SD RD UN i 1 25 1 1 SD RD m m 1 1 GND e lt lt UR gt 5VIN 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller 2m E Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 E E e 15 7 1 7 1 14 FO 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter w
37. 4 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 3 W Ethernet setting Ethernet setting 1 Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver SIEMENS 7 Ethernet FETCH Port No WRITE Port Na SIEMENS 57 Le Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is E indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the N W No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connected PLC No Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank SIEMENS S7 Type SIEMENS S7 fixed fixed Set the IP address of the connected IP Address Ethernet module 4 n Default blank Set the FETCH port No of the Port connected Ethernet module 1024 to 65534 Default 2000 For the WRITE port No of the connected Ethernet module the WRITE Port No 7209 that the FETCH port No is 1025 to 65535 incremented by one is set automatically Default 2001 Communication TCP fixed TCP fixed j Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers Communication detail settings 2 E
38. Zar Manufacturer HITACHI during communication Controller Type HITACHI HIDIC Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication I F Interface to be used Driver Set either of the following Retry 0 to 5times HITACHI HIDIC H Default Otime 29 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 Set the time period for a o ar Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec 5 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Default 3sec 22 Controller Type I F and Driver set Set this item to adjust the oF Make the settings according to the usage vA Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms environment GOT 57 2 4 2 Communication detail settings Default Oms Specify whether to use the station No during communication If Yes is selected the station No is Yes or No fixed to 0 POINT Default Yes Click the OK button when settings are completed Station No Selection CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting E For details refer to the following 2 1 1 2 communication setting 5 E 358 z9z 898 2 CONNECTION HITACHI IES PLC 2 7 2 4 GOT Side Settings 2 HITACHI HIDIC Protocol2 Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 19200 Data Bit 7 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Retry Times 0 Timeout
39. 4 3 RS485 terminator Oa B Terminator 29 es CH 2 switch 95 1 zS ON 1 Set the MODE switch so that the communication port of the 2 0 general communication module to be connected to the GOT lt Switch operates as a loader Setting item Set value 2 switch is not used for connection with the GOT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 ON the terminating switch of the general disable OFF OFF OFF communication module which will be a terminal ae 1bit ON za Stop bit 5 2bits OFF 5 5 7bits ON 28 Data bit 5 8bits OFF 89 ON Odd OFF Parity bit 4 ON 5 None OFF e m Initializing amp witch ON zum method 5 a ZOE 556 o gt 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 23 4 2 Serial Connection Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 0 No 1 No 15 6 Examples of station number setting a Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Specification range 0 to 99 4 24 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection 4 3 Ethernet Connection
40. 14 3 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Qu 2 Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE ij ue 202 g 5 Communication driver Ce Ethernet SIEMENS 57 Gateway 25 2 Connection cable 2 lt om ups Oto PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Series on Cable model segment Option device Model equipment Module 2 5 length o amp When PLC GOT is N 1 CP343 1 IT 7 23 SIMATIC CP343 1 Built into GOT The following shows the a 100m berofPLCsfor1cor S7 300 CP343 1 Lean CP343 1 Advanced 10BASE T GT15 J71E71 100 lt For GT16 GT14 gt Shielded twisted pair cable STP or 16 or less unshielded twisted pair cable UTP m For 6715 GT12 gt Category 3 4 and 5 Built into GOT 5 or less 100BASE TX a E 9 SIMATIC CP443 1 IT Shielded twisted pair cable STP 100m When PLC GOT is 1 N a 57 400 CP443 1 Category 5 and 5e The following shows the n GT15 J71E71 100 number of GOTs for 1 PLC B 2 32 6 recommended 2 5 to 16 or less 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network a system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802
41. Se 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 11 2 System Configuration For the RS 422 connection connecting to the Communication Modules PLC Connection cable GOT Cable model TU Commun Power Communication es Connection Max j m Model name 4 ication 4 Option device Model Supplies Modules diagram distance Type number 5785422 connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 1 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 1200m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS 422 mE IC693PWR332 IC693CPU323 Use RS422 IC693PWR328 connection GT15 RS4 9S 1200 diagram 4 cer 65 Built into GOT 0285422 connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 1 IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 1200m GT16 CO2R4 95 0 2m IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 IC693CMM311 RS 422 gp IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 GseRs422 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 connection GT15 RS4 95 1200 diagram 4 Gi Built into GOT GseRs422 connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 1 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 1200m GT16 CO2R4 9S 0 2m IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 IC693CMM311 RS 422 IC693PWR332 285422 IC693PWR328 connection GT15 RS4 9S 1200m diagram 4 5 14 12 Built into GOT GA 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 2 Connect it to the
42. Station No GOT data register GD Setting range 200 GD10 201 GD11 1 to 255 If setting a value outside the range above a device range 214 GD24 error occurs 215 GD25 The device setting of FUJI temperature controller Devices are set with the coil and register numbers of the temperature controller For parameters such as an address map of coil register number and a parameter corresponding to each number refer to the manual of the temperature controller to be used 5 18 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 5 6 1 FUJI PXR PXG PXH 4 ino Device name Setting range Device No representation 5 5 TO Bit data 0 00001 to 00001 ZOE 8 Decimal 9 5 9 Bit data 1 10001 to 10016 aos Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices o S Word data 3 30001 to 31398 5 5 N Decimal B OS Word data 4 40001 to 43776 US 1 Only reading is possible or 5 Precautions ea Station number settings of temperature controller 29 In the system configuration the temperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 5 4 2 Communication detail settings FIX processing of temperature controller 2 The temperature controller power must not be turned off during the FIX p
43. 6 2 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 Connection Diagram CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 7 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 12 CONNECTION SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 6 CONNECTION GE FANUC PLC 11 9 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC 15 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 5 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 5 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS 12 7 CONTROLLER rette tette tad eee 16 2 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 26 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER tie nasci meret 13 3 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 5 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 10 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 10 Connection diagram CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 6 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 1 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 11 1 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC 15 1 16 1 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 1 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC
44. M2 6 millimeter screw GTO1 RS4 M fixed type 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd 1 When connecting to the RS 422 485 interface use HDR E14MAG1 as a cable connector To use HDR E14MAG 1 a dedicated pressure welding tool is required For details on the connector and pressure welding tool contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd 2 terminal block MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 GT1020 Connector pin arrangement GT16 GOT main part connector see from the front 8 14 17 Ur 14 pin female GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 6 105 1 GT104 1 GTO1 RS4 M GOT main part connector see from the front 5 1 o 9 6 9 D sub female GT1030 GT1020 See from the back of a GOT main part EA 222222222 22 220 0 02007 0202 9 pin terminal block 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection RS 485 interface Use the following as the RS 485 interface and RS 422 485 communication unit connector on the GOT 2 9 LL For the GOT side of the connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector He 1 Connector model m e Oz GOT Hardware version Connector t
45. j RDB2 8 em lt 10 uz 25 5 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table o ES Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series GREEN Series GREEN Series UT35A 5 igna name UT UP UM US UT32A UP35A UT55A product condition A iud ad UT75A om UP55A product condition A 95 SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 25 9 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 O SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 amp a os EU iO gt O 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 17 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 18 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of A 1 RS485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two 5485 communication B 1or2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS485 communication port
46. 1 A Po e 9 T 9 CSB CTS 5 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable SG shield line NC Ug For GT14 GT12 GT11 3 GOT side 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable ou D sub 9 pin PLC side shield line NC 4 uM 4 CD RS422 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC side m RD RXD 2 3 SD O u E ne SD TXD 3 i RD SEE 5 E E Oro ER DTR 4 IDR RDA _ 252 se s k I gt s sG RSA cd J j Enc DR DSR 4 CSAL 4 ads RS RTS 7 7 d E i 2 eem 1 1 1 1 CS CTS 1 jesse les SDB 6 1 2 gt RDB 7 4 SDL 9 1 9 1 te RSB 8 i 8 lt 51 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable 2 shield line CSB 9 zw 9 Ox Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 95 Ox 2 GOT side connector 28 For the GOT side connector refer to the following 55 gt gt 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 3 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector supporting the HITACHI PLC side E module g For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual E 8 z4 565
47. CF card unit CF card extension unit sound output and external I O or operation panel Set the driver for the device to be connected e 9 Driver za None Each driver for connected devices Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver Detail Setting ZO Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT lt OT 2 Channel No drivers RS232 Setting 1 Channel No 2 to No 4 o Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function 22 For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following 8 T Mitsubishi Products 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION 2 Drivers 5 The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct o gt Setting the communication section in each chapter Ug 25 3 RS232 Setting of GT14 99 Do not use RS232 Setting of GT14 for other than the 5V power feeding to the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor For details refer to the following manual n o gt GT14 User s Manual 7 11 RS 232 485 Signal Conversion Adaptor ae o 2 878 1 1 3 Precautions 5 29 Yao Precautions for changing model 1 When devices that cannot be converted are included 22 When setting of Manufacturer or Controller Type is changed GT
48. CONTROLLER For the connection to the MURATEC controller please contact our company 16 1 Connectable Model List 16 2 System Configuration 16 3 Connection Diagram 16 4 GOT Side Settings 16 5 MURATEC Controller Side Setting 16 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 2 16 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER 16 1 Connectable Model List INDEX A ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Control Compact FlexLogix 10 6 10 13 MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Series 10 5 SLC500 Series 10 4 C td Recte 1 30 Communication 1 18 Connectable Model List CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 5 2 CONNECTION TO SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 11 2 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC 15 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES 2 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 2 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER tete 16 2 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 2 CONNECTION SIEMENS 14 2 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC
49. Informati Displays the device type and setting range which are on selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of the No specified station No 11 7 Precautions GOT clock control The PLC clock data cannot be written to or read from the GOT The settings of time adjusting or time broadcast made on the GOT will be disabled on the PLC 11 6 1 GE Series 90 Device No Device name Setting range represen tation input 1 100001 to 112288 output Q 000001 to 012288 internal 00001 12288 temporary 001 256 5 system status 5 5001 to 5128 Decimal a System status SA 5 001 to SA128 System status SB SB001 to SB128 System status SC 5 001 to SC128 global data G G0001 to G7680 o System register R R00001 to R32640 gt analog input register Al 10001 to AI32640 Decimal analog output register AQ AQ0001 to AQ32640 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 17 11 6 Device Range that Can Be Set RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC Zz z CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO
50. m o4 CONVE Timer change over time Rotary switch Communication setting DIP SW 1 Settings of the setting 2 wire 4 wire the RS 485 driver active control the terminating resistor the echo back Make those settings by operating the communication setting DIP SW Set Switch position Setting item value 1 2 3 4 5 6 4wire OFF OFF type Setting 2 wire 4 wire 2 wire ON ON type RS 485 driver active control AUTO OFF with ON Terminating resistor without OFF Echo back OFF OFF 2 A setting of the transmission speed Make this setting by operating the timer change over time Rotary switch Switch position Transmission speed 5 9600bps 6 19200bps 7 38400bps 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 35 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO 99 YOKOGAWA PLC a 5 lt ES 9 x e gt m En n O mE iE noa ZOE Lc lO 5 O 8 5 6 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numb
51. tena ete ae dn 9 26 9 3 1 RS2232 Cable ee 9 26 9 93 21 5 422 de a de 9 27 9 33 5 485 9 30 5 5 6 P ER RE een tiefe 9 38 9 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 9 38 9 4 Communication detail 9 38 Temperature Controller Side Setting sse nennen enne nnns 9 39 9 54 Connecting to FEPCP 5 hone dita eid ede ebd aped RP 9 39 9 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A 9 40 9 5 3 Connecting to Z FIO ZzDIO Z Q T aiite e e ta pee e n testet teint 9 41 9 5 4 Connecting 0 2 eese 9 42 9 5 5 Connecting to CB Series unaensis 9 43 9 5 6 Connecting to FB 9 43 9 57 Gonnecting to RB S6rl8s d ce v REDUCIR 9 44 9 5 8 900 900 eee nial 9 44 9 5 9 Connecting to 400 4
52. 3 to 255 sec Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 3 to 90 sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 0 to 10000 10ms 51 72 Click the Setting button and perform the setting in the GOT IP Address Setting screen GOT IP Address Setting This setting is shared by other items of Ethernet Driver GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 Select from IP Label Ethemet Download Port No 5014 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers Ethernet setting Ethernet setting Pico Address PotNo Communication 19216801 Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is m indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the connected N W No Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default 1 Set the station No of the connected PC No 2 the PLC 1 to 254 Default 1 Type FUJI fixed FUJI fixed 4 Set the IP address of the connected PLC side IP IP address the PLC address Default 1
53. 5 8 Odd 2 Tr The rotary switch address setting switch is also used gu for the data interval extension time setting 6 Set the maximum time from when the last character stop bit is sent from the GOT side until the transmission cable ie The setting method is the same as that of the module becomes ready to receive a address For the data interval extension time refer to the 9 5 17 Connecting to B400 following lt gt 4 Data interval extension time settings Communication settings em 2a 4 Make the communication settings of B400 using the oe 4 Data interval extension time settings ith f d the DIP h 9 ENS Set the data interval extension time as the following PANEN m procedure For the operation procedure refer to the B400 manual E u 1 the power of the module OFF Item Setting range Settings Unit address setting 1 Rotary switch setting 2 Set the DIP switch 4 and 6 to and 5 to OFF CH1 to CH8 2 SW1 SW2 d C icati d 4800bps 9600bps 1 7 3 Set the data interval extension time using the rotary ee 9200bps 38400bps 2 DIP switch setting 5 SW3 switch address setting switch Data bit configuration 0105 Wes 9 For the setting method refer to the following Communication 24 4 n pt gt 3 Module address settings specification setting 3 DIP switch settings Terminati
54. CD NC 1 11 CS CTS jeu gt 5 CTS RD RXD 2 2 TXD 9 1 8 EST eee nee ee SD TXD gt 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 GT11 NC ER DTR 4 H gt 6 DSR GT1050 NC GT104 NC SG 5 r 7 SG RS232 connection diagram 2 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side PRIR RS RTS 7 4 RS CD NC 1 1 FG L E CS CTS je gt 5 CS RD RXD 2 2 TXD i 9 CD SD TXD 3 RXD 4 ER DTR 4 L e DSR 1 GT46 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 GT11 NC GT105 NC 671040 NC SG 5 rn 7 GND RS232 connection diagram 6 DR DSR W 9 DTR GOT side RS RTS 7 i 4 RTS terminal block YASKAWA PLC side CS CTS eH Lis s CTS SD BM c 3 9 i 8 NC RD 2 TXD 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC i DSR RS232 connection diagram 3 un 7 BTR GOT side YASKAWA PLC side SG 7 GND GpiNGM a 6777777777777 1 FG RS 7 1 Fe RD RXD 2 le 2 TXD cs 4 RTS SD TXD 3 3 RXD NC 5 CTS ER DTR 4 H 114 RTS NC PR 1 8 EST SG 5 pup 7 GND DR DSR i 6 DSR RS RTS 7 s OP CTS CS CTS H i 8 PWR 9 9 DTR 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC GT105 T NC 6 1040 N
55. Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type dope Without 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor 1 Product with the open network port of RS 485 9 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type On Lr 2 5 Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 9 5 2 wire type Standard code model z S Product without the additional contact output points DO 2 Other than 3 and with the open network port of RS 485 communication ox 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model 3 Product with RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire With CH3 type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 za With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed Ox code model 5 5 4 4 _ Without LP Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type E without the power supply of 24VDC sensor 5 5 i 8 icati E gt 5 10 2 _ With Produc with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and with the power supply for 24VDC sensor 2 Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 7 7 2 wire type Standard code model g 6 Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 ES With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed m code model 2 m 2 T EE ma 7 1 7 With Produc with
56. RD A SD B SD A OV RTS A CTS A RTS B CTS B SHLD 24 25 13 21 9 10 11 22 23 1 Communication Terminating resistor1200 Module GOT side 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 2 1 13 14 Shell SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 SDA2 TXD2 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 RSA RTS RSB RTS CSA CTS CSB CTS SG SHLD Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 1 2 A terminating resistor should be connected to communication module at a terminal station RS422 connection diagram 2 PLC Terminating resistor 1200 PLC GOT side lt lt gt o o o o Qo0on0n ME FRE FE c Oo o o Y o o 8 9 2 WR 2 eo e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 h A Mion cx wee ren ae a c 1 o 8 o 8 3 o 1 SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 SDA2 TXD2 S
57. RSA E 56 1 1 6 8 SG 2 SG SDA2 TXD2 5 1 i SDB2 TXD2 7 1 RDA1 RXD1 10 RDB1 RXD1 12 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4 RSB RTS 16 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller 07100 Series 07100 Series UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 RSA 29 4 27 SG 30 5 28 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal c Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 10 GOT side 92250222 1 Temperature controller Temperature controller 5 vy my ios 1 SDA1 TXD1 1 RSB SDB1 TXD1
58. Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU Default 3sec 3 to 255sec Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet Connection 0 to 10000 x 10 ms PREPARATORY CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC ie Zz Q YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER HITACHI IES 9 a lt lt 9 gt 1 2 Click the Setting button and perform the setting the GOT IP Address Setting screen GOT IP Address Setting This setting is shared by other items of Ethernet Driver GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 Ethemet Download No 5014 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 j Cancel Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers C 3 m Ethernet setting 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet Connection 2 GT15 GT12 Property Value
59. Terminating resistor 1109 144 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 2 details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual z 3 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller o RS485 connection diagram 11 2 2124 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature GOT side controller controller controller _ 5 controller SDA i T R B TRB TR SDB TIR A TIR A TIR A 1 1 RDA ba SG SG sG e 1 i 1 2 RDB i 1 i oe a oa m sc L1 L1 Combination module Combination module 5 lt i gt gt oe eee ZSE 2 55090 Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W 8 More than 1000 in case of CB series 1 Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 2 wire type 1Pair Terminating resistor 1100 9 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one tha
60. b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 37 1 4 1 connector specifications c YASKAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA 9 EG 2 os Be Zx 5 PLC side module For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 11 6 2 Serial Connection RS 422 cable 1 Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 GOT side SDA1 TXD1 1 YASKAWA PLC side SDB1 TXD1 2 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 6 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 CSA CTS 11 CSB CTS 12 SG 13 NC 14 RS422 connection diagram 2 GOT side SDA1 TXD1 4 Shell e RDA RDB SDA SDB PGND Receiving side termination Sending side termination SG v SDB1 TXD1 2 N RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 6 RDA2 RXD2 7 CSB CTS 12 SG 13 14 Shell TETTETETT re 1 The terminating resistor 120 Q is valid by connecting 1 with pin 4 and pin 5 with pin 6 of the YASKAWA PLC side 6 2 Serial Connection 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC RS422 connection diagram 3
61. 10 Serin RDB2 RXD2 T 8 1 1 RDB1 RXD1 12 RSA RTS 9 4 l i i NC 48 34 RSB RTS 10 RSA RTS 14 i CSA CTS 11 4 i 1 N 15 1 CSB CTS 12 4 RSB RTS 16 1 i SG 13 t 7 14 l CSA CTS 18 Shell rcm J NC 19 i 1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows E 0 i GT16 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT 20 local main unit to 100 OHM 3 m Connecting terminating resistors 1 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT as follows 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the followin GT16 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT 9 9 main unit to 100 OHM manual 2 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller i Corinecting terminating resistors 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual RS485 connection diagram 2 5 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller GOT side RKC temperature controller side RS485 connection diagram 4 terminal block Modular connector 2 GOT side RKC temperature controller side SDA1 1 2 terminal block Modular connector 2 SDB1 2 1 TIRA SDA1 1 i f 44 ME 2 1 1 RDA1 3 4 NC 081 2 J 1 TRA 1 1 1 1 RDB1 4 5 NC RDA1 3
62. 2 Touse data registers of CPU 1 during operation of CP 9200 copy them to MWO to 7694 3 During operation of CP 9200H specify the reference No and quantities so that they do not cover both OB and IBY 4 This is not supported by GT10 compatible Device No Device name Setting range MA hi representation Coil OB OBO to OB1023 g Decimal 3 Input relay IB IBO to 1023 a u Specified bit of the following Word device bit word devices Input register 1 10 to 163 gt Dat ter M 0 to M2047 ata register M Decimal 5 E Output register 6045 563 9 Bit device Converting bit devices into word 1 This is not supported by GT10 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 33 PREPARATORY CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC HITACHI IES PLC 9 LO 2 Oan os Eier Ze 5 os CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER YOKOGAWA PLC 6 4 5 YASKAWA 2000 900 CP9200SH Series Device No Device name Setting range representation Decimal Coil MB MB000000 to MB65534F d Hexadecimal 3 his 9180018 1800000 to IB7FFFF Hexadecimal Word device Specified bit of the following bit 23 word devices Input register 0000 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal 1 81 MW 5
63. 266 12 2 1 Connecting to K80S 1205 gu OZO 202 When connecting to one PLC 8x9 Communication driver LS Industrial Systems ez z Connection cable J o il 1 gt 2 O n PLC Connection cable GOT Communi Cable model Number of connectable Series Cnet I F module cation Connection diagram deans Option device Model equipment Type number 5 o User RS232 connection Built into GOT zo 15 1032 diagram 1 RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P User RS232 connection 15 Built into GOT 911020 805 diagram 3 1 PLC for 1 GOT K120S 3B Gi GT E lt Built into GOT rg diagram 2 A t5 G7L CUEB RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P 2 User i 5232 connection 15m Built into GOT 020 diagram 4 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd im 2 5 Ono 2 5 lt Ca On 2 zu zz On Z ocu zao FOE 05 lt 549 OIE nc ul z g PE 58 55 oz 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 12 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple PLCs n Connectio
64. 9 1 Connectable Model List Series Model name Clock ia Refer to SRX X TIO x 3792 9 SB1 SB1 x 57 9 2 10 B400 B400 x 251 5792 1 1 From the models of temperature controller select the detailed model name which supports each communication type communication protocol MODBUS For details of RKC temperature controller detailed model names refer to the following catalog pu Catalog of RKC temperature controllers 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 Connectable Model List 9 3 a lt 14 E z E 9 ra CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 1 Connecting to H PCP J When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable sl COM PORT3 4 Temperature controller Connection cable 4 GOT Number of connector table connec Model Communication edu model ptc Model Gain device Model equipment name Type Connection diagram number distance name W BF 28 1000 1m Built into GOT W BF 28 3000 3m s or Serial User i RS232 connection RS 232 diagram 1 21 Built into GOT W BF 02 1000 1m 15m FAX067 W BF 02 300
65. Communication protocol 1 MODBUS Data bit configuration 1 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit BN1 8bit None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit BO2 8bit Odd 2bit Device address 1 Slave address 1 1 to 99 4 Interval 3 1 12 3 4 0 250 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 2 without overlapping with that of other units 53 Setthe maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 10 Connecting to AG500 9 5 12 Connecting to MA900 MA901 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature con
66. Control Protocol Zero 3 sec setting Setting Window Timer Value TCP Retry Time 500ms TCP Close Time 60 sec IP Assemble Time 30 sec MAX Packet Length 1500 bytes 1 When MITSUBISHI PLC and YASKAWA PLC are used together in the same network do not set the same value for the PLC No of MITSUBISHI PLC and the CNO Connection number of YASKAWA PLC 2 Set the same the Node IP Address Remote Station s IP Address and the Node Port Remote Station s Port Number as the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 23 PREPARATORY CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 9 Po 2 On os Eier Ze 5 os CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 Setting for the built in 23005 Ethernet and 218IF 02 Item Set value Range PLC side IP IP Address 1124 address Transmission Mask MIMI parameter Gat IP Add PLC side setting setting ateway ress Up to 16 one byt Device name Arbitrary characters For a connection Engineeri
67. Execute 5 000004 MSG RCV Busy 08000210 Abort 08000400 Complete 0 000211 Dev Typ 000065 Error 08000212 Pro Typ 00001 Cir No 00001 Ch No 000024 Param DA00000 08000211 true INC A IF Dest DW00024 END IF IF DB000212 true 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection Write range HI B Clears the system registers Clears the normal pass counter Clears the error counter Parameter settings completed Sends a Message Receive instruction The executing coil turns ON when the CPU receives the command The normal or abnormal completion coil turns ON at the completion of processing Pro Type 1 for extended MEMOBUS or MELSEC 2 for non procedure The normal completion coil turns ON at normal completion Increments the normal pass counter The abnormal completion coil turns ON at abnormal completion Increments the abnormal pass counter 0022 NL 2 Dest DW00025 STORE A Stores the processing results NL 2 Source DWO00000 Dest 0 00026 H STORE A Stores the status NEM Source DW00001 Dest DWO00027 STORE A Stores the number of station to which 0025 Source DW00002 the command is sent Dest 0 00028 M STORE A Stores the FC 0025 Source DW00004 Dest 0 00029 Stored the data address 0027 NL
68. Obtaining information peripheral devices applicable GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Connecting peripheral devices including barcode reader to the Transferring data to the GOT Writing data to the GOT GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Reading data from the GOT Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Verifying a editing project to a GOT project Others Obtaining specifications including part names external dimensions and GT16 User s Manual Hardware options of each GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT14 User s Manual GT12 User s Manual Installing the GOT GT11 User s Manual GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual GT10 User s Manual GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT14 User s Manual GT12 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual GT10 User s Manual Operating the utility Configuring the gateway function GOT 1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Configuring the MES interface function Works3 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Configuring the extended function and option function Functions for GT Works3 Using a personal computer as the GOT GT Soft
69. SG 1 1 1 SDA2 5 i 1 SG RDB1 4 4 NC 1 1 SDB2 6 SG SDA2 5 5 NC 1 1 1 1 RDA2 7 SDB2 6 i SG RDB2 8 RDA2 7 1 1 1 1 SG 9 i RDB2 8 FG 10 SG 9 ee en eng 1 1 1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows FG 10 GT16 GT15 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT Main uniki 1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows BE m Connecting terminating resistors GT16 GT15 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following GOT main unit to 100 OHM manual gt m Connecting terminating resistors 3 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 5 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 9 30 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 5 ww Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature E GOT side terminal block m 44 controller controller 4 controller controller E E os pm py c T R B T R B i TRB TRE SDAI TXD1 m i zm bes SDB1
70. SH 080859ENG 1D7MA8 GOT1000 Series User s Manual Extended Functions Option Functions for GT Works3 GT SoftGOT1000 manuals Manual Name GT SoftGOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM Packaging Stored in DVD ROM SH 080863ENG 1D7MB3 Manual Number SH 080860ENG 1D7MA9 16 manuals Manual Number Model code Manual Name Packaging SH 080928ENG GT16 User s Manual Hardware Stored in DVD ROM 1D7MD3 SH 080929ENG GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility Stored in DVD ROM 1D7MD4 JY997D41201 GT16 Handy GOT User s Manual Stored in DVD ROM JY997D41202 09R821 GT15 manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code Stored in DVD ROM SH 080528ENG GT15 User s Manual 1D7M23 14 manuals Manual Number M IN anual Name Packaging Stored in DVD ROM JY997D44801 GT14 User s Manual 09R823 12 manuals Manual Number Model code Manual Name Packaging Stored in DVD ROM SH 080977ENG GT12 User s Manual 1D7ME1 GT11 manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging Model code 997017501 GT11 User s Manual Stored in DVD ROM 09R815 JY997D20101 GT11 Handy GOT User s Manual Stored in DVD ROM JY997D20102 09R817 GT10 manuals Manual Number Manual Name Packaging
71. SSS Set the terminating resistor using the terminating pop resistor setting switch ACCESS OFF ON CF CARD 4 E ERM o 1102 OPEN 3309 H Terminating resistor selector switch 1 32 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection Terminating resistor selector switch GT1030 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR 0000000000000 SUD re RS 422 SDA SDB RDA RDB 56 RSA RSB Ee 000000000000000 Terminating resistor selector switch GT1020 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch zum 00000000000000000000 Se 000 100000000 15 232
72. Series C or later 18 Built mto GO1 MicroLogix1000 n 12001140000 8 EBEE 5 RS232 connection diagram 3 mere x 16 15 Ga RS232 connection diagram 7 15m Built into GOT 1761 CBLPMO2 Series C or later icroLogix 5232 M RS 232 or peram 15m Built into GOT WT 1200 1400 1500 connection diagram 6 232 connection diagram 3 Communication driver MicroLogix Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 PLC 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 When connecting to multiple PLCs DH485 network Connection cable For MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU it is supported in the series D and later a _ _ Adapter PLC Connection cable GOT Cable model ies 2 Adapter UTRUM Connection diagram Option device Model Series ation 9 distance number MicroLogix1000 85232 connection Bulltinto GOT 1200 1400 1500 diagram 2 51050 GT15 RS2 9P Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 adapter 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY
73. o 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other oc Make the settings using the character configuration units Bs switches 3 Turn ON the terminating switch ofa general purpose S lt interface module which will be a terminal Os 2 Settings by switch Els Make the communication settings using each setting switch o Hh z MODE switch switc Ole NI TS Sli RS 485 station No 9 z switches 5 Switch No etting item et value i i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Terminator switch 5 Transmission 9600bps ON OFF o E Character configuration 5 so spee 19200bps ON ON lt switches Ip 25 bit ON SES Stop bit 2bits OFF Front view Rear view 2 E 5 7bits ON a Setting of the MODE oro Data bit i i j Bbits OFF Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch Even ON MODE Switch position S Parity bit Odd OFF Command setting type start stop 9 Done ON synchronization nonsequence 4 2 E None OFF torma uz RS 232C 1 1 ze Initializing 5 v method By switch ON Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format 2 RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N Command setting type
74. procedure again 2nd 815 None i 1 1Setting the Communication Interface lone ChNo None E 0 None zu Ox 2 TtTon of Chio we 8 Barcode connection Other connection OK ZO connection 9 connection zx oo amp Zea a 565 gt 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 37 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment For GT10 7 1 After powering up the GOT touch Main menu Communication setting from the Utility Meni ESC 2 Touch Standard I F on Comm Setting 3 The Standard appears IStandar d F 1 ESC 4 Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the box for the RS422 communication interface to be used l n 5 When the communication driver name is not displayed normally carry out the following procedure again 1 1Setting the Communication Interface 1 38 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Utility 1 How to display Utility at default When using GT16 GT1595 GT14 GT12 or GT1020 Utility call key 1 point press on GOT screen upper left corner 1 4 O KZ ra TO x UE 9 4 as Utility display Y When using GT16 GT12
75. 1 1 RDB1 RXD1 12 m SDA 1 L 1 1 SDA1 TXD1 6 E rt r1 RDB SDB1 TXD1 8 Y E m RDA SG 2 ri ri 7 SG RSA RTS 14 Vdarizaisssf sszsssz le n CSA CTS 18 4 i 1 9 T RSB RTS 16 20 xcd CSB CTS Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4 2 NC 1 ri NC 3 NC 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 13 15 17 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller GREEN UTAdvanced Series erties GREEN UT35A UT55A product Signal name Series UT32A UP35A UT55A product condition B UT UP n UT75A UM US UM33A condition AJJUP55A UP554A product product condition A condition B Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two RS 485 communication B 1or2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points
76. 13 5 PLC Side Setting SICK PLC For details of SICK PLCs refer to the following manual gt User s Manual of the SICK PLC 13 5 1 Connecting to Flexi Soft Communication settings Communication settings are not required since the following contents are fixed Setting item Controller Side Settings Communication speed 115200bps Fixed Data bit 8bits Fixed Parity bit Without Fixed Stop bit 1bit Fixed 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 5 PLC Side Setting 13 5 SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 6 Device Range That Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 SICK Flexi Soft Device Information Kind BIT d EFI output EQ Device 2 gl Device Byte number 0 to 2 name EFI number 1 to 3 2 Engineering software for SICK and device representation of GT Designer3 The engineering software
77. Abbreviation of parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWLIDSC FXSSC E FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software 3D 11C WINE MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version O SWLID5C ACT E SWLEIDS5C ACT EA MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version O SWLIDSC SHEET E SWLIDSC SHEET EA CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool Abbreviation of CPU Module Logging Configuration Tool SW1DNN LLUTL E License key for GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation former Yamatake Corporation OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO El Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA
78. Built into GOT up ioie PLOS RS485 connection diagram 2 general purpose m interface modules 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 10 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection 4 2 4 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX SX SPH ac Communication driver S oO 2 1 SSS Cozi ds FUJI MICREX SX SPH E Connection cable 2 zo PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Model name heres peu Cabe mogel Option device Model Sune 2 5 4 Connection diagram number distance equipment OE module Type NP4H CB2 1 Built into GOT RS 232 2m 1 GOT for 1 PLC NWOH CNV 1 GT15 RS2 9P 2 NP1L RS1 Built into GOT NP1L RS2 RS 232 a RS232 connection diagram 2 15m Ea i M GT NP1L RS3 GT15 RS2 9P E 5 RH E Gss RS485 connection diagram 3 Built into GOT o GT GT16 C02R4 16 9S 0 2m NP1L RS1 MICREX SX RS 485 1000m SPH NP1L RS4 Garsass connection diagram 4 GT15 RS2T4 9P 1 GOT for eun GT15 RS4 98 Communication port of general purpose Built i ae Built into
79. CONTROLLER Z9 ns On uz zu 2 2 On CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 14 4 1 SIEMENS S7 300 400 Series 14 4 3 SIEMENS 57 Ethernet Device Device No Device name Setting range Device name Setting range represen represen tation tation Input relay 1 10000 to 15117 Input relay I 10000 to 11277 Decimal Decimal 8 Output relay Q Q0000 to 05117 Octal g Output relay Q Q0000 to Q1277 Octal 5 Bit memory 00000 to M20477 Bit memory 0000 to M2557 a E Specified bit of the Specified bit of the Word device bit following word devices Word device bit following word devices Input relay IW IWO to IW510 Data register Output relay QW QWO to QW510 Input relay TW TWO fo TWT26 Bit memory MW MWO to MW2046 Output relay QW QWO to QW126 Bit memory MW MWO to MW254 Timer Current value TO to T511 IUN 1 Counter Current value Timer Current value T TO to T255 C CO to C511 Counter Current value C CO to C255 8 DB1 DBWO to 8 pp EENET 5 DB1 DBW65534 5 Decimal ecimal DB2 DBWO to DB2 DBWO to 9g o DB2 DBW2046 DB2 DBW65534 Data register DB Data register DB DB254 DBWO to DB4094 DBWO to DB254 DBW2046 DB4094 DBW65534 DB255 DBWO to DB4095 DBWO
80. DEC b When setting a word device Set the device using the format of remote master station remote slave station slot No module bit No For the device name setting enter w before the bit device name Device S 2 Device number Module bit No 0 9 DEC Device name Slot No 0 9 DEC Remote slave station 0 9 DEC Remote master station 1 4 DEC 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 11 2 6 Device Range that Be Set 2 6 1 HITACHI H Series Device name Setting range Device No representation External input X 00000 to X05A95 Hexadecimal Decimal External output Y Y00000 to Y05A95 Remote external input X X10000 to X49995 Decimal Remote external output Y Y10000 to Y49995 1st CPU link L 10000 to L3FFF 2nd CPU link L1 L10000 to L13FFF Hexadecimal Data area M M0000 to M3FFF On delay timer TDO to TD255 Single shot timer SS 550 to 55255 8 Watchdog timer WDT WDTO to WDT255 o Monostable timer MS MSO to MS255 m Decimal Retentive timer TMRO to TMR255 Up counter CU CUO to CU511 Ring counter RCUO to RCU511 Up Down counter CT CTO to CT511 Bit internal output R RO to R7BF Hexadecimal Rising edge detection DIF 1 DIFO to DIF511 Decimal Falling edge detection DFN DFNO to DFN511 Word device bit Specified bit of the followi
81. Ethemet 7 Standard 1 85232 Routing Information amp 5 Gateway fiver GE SNP X Communication S El Gateway Server BS Gateway Client Property Mail Transmission Speed BPS FTP Server ean Fig File Transfer FTP 18 Redundant D Station No Switching Delay Timelms 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer GE Controller Type GE Series 90 I F Interface to be used Driver GE SNP X 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 11 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 1 1 2 I F communication setting 11 14 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 4 GOT Side Settings 11 4 2 Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 GE SNP X Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 13200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address 00 Delay Time ms 5 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 960
82. F3SP21 GT15 RS2T4 9P 3 F3SP25 GT09 C30R40301 6T 3m F3SP35 GT09 C100R40301 6T 10m GT15 RS4 98 F3SP28 F3LC11 2N RS 422 GT09 C200R40301 6T 20m F3SP38 GT09 C300R40301 6T 30m F3SP53 or 1200m F3SP58 05085422 connection diagram F3SP59 3 Built into GOT t MU 5 66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4S 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 6 7155 1 7 4 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 2 System configuration for connecting to 500 Communication driver 5 t 2 1 55 2 ZOE FA500 FA M3 STARDOM woz Connection cable zo PLC Connection cable GOT On Number of PC link Cable model Max connectable Series ication Option device Model ZO module Connection diagram number distance equipment 2 lt pus 8E GT GT GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m LC01 0N Built into GOT LC02 0N 5232 connection diagram e 3 Zo GT15 RS2 9P E User T 6 RS422 diagram 4200m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 PC 2 lt link module Or GT
83. FFK120A C10 83 485 GTO9 C200R41001 6T 20m 485 interface F150S GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m GT15 RS4 9S capsules 500 om Q 9 8 RS485 connection diagram Built into GOT 6144 e 3 2 88 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted 671655 GT155 n r OPO 255 888 2 Es On lt 25 5 oS ES zo Ox 52 T zv amp zea ost a 565 gt 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 9 4 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs using general purpose interface modules PLC Connection cable GOT Mn Commun Number of connectable Model purpose M Cable model Max 2 t Option device Model equipmen name interface Connection diagram number distance module x 9558485 connection diagram 1 500m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 500m GT16 CO2R4 9S 0 2m up to 31 PLCs GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m general purpose F120S GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m GT15 RS2T4 9P interface modules F140S FFU120B RS 485 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m GT15 RS4 9S F15 S GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m 500m 1 GOT for
84. Front of K3SC 10 body Terminal block for RS 422 485 communication DIP switch Terminal block for RS 232 communication Inside of K3SC 10 body When removing the front cover 1 Transmission speed settings Transmission speed Switch No bps Illz OFF OFF OFF see 19200 ON OFF ON 38400 OFF ON ON 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 Settings of data length parity bit stop bit master 5 5 8 Station number setting 4 4 slave device and echoback Set each station number so that no station number overlaps Eo The station number can be set without regard to the cable 2 amp 2 2 E a connection order There is no problem even if station numbers not consecutive 92 Station Station Station Station Station 2 No 3 No 7 No 1 No 15 No 6 IN T gt j GOT D D D D ES za Examples of station number setting 9 23 1 Direct specification Set these switches When setting the device specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed NS Switch No S
85. GOT side 2 7 1 SDB 6 SG 5 RSA 3 4 6 RSB 8 CSB 9 PLC side D sub 9 2 SDA 1 SDB 9 RDA 8 RDB 5 SG 3 6 FG 1 Turn the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal c Connecting terminating resistors 3 sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection RS485 connection diagram 5 RDA1 RXD1 3 RDB1 RXD1 4 SDA1 TXD1 1 SDB1 TXD1 2 RDB 13 5 9 Dove g FG 11 NEN 10 12 i SG RSA RTS CSA CTS RSB RTS CSB CTS SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 NC PLC side GOT side terminal block SDA SDB RDA 14 Shell 54 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 9 gt m Connecting terminating resistors 5 3 sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect 5 5 Sa RS485
86. Informa Displays the device type and setting range which are selected tion in Device Set the station number of the PLC connected to the specified device Host Select this item when monitoring the host PLC Network Select this when monitoring the other PLCs After selecting set the station number of the Other PLC to be monitored NWNo Set the network No Station No Set the station No 10 18 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Device settings of ALLEN BRADLEY PLC The ALLEN BRADLEY device addressing consists of a file and element Make setting as follows using GT Designer3 1 AB SLC500 AB Micro Logix a When setting a bit address as a bit device B3 64 15 File type Bit No File No Bit delimiter Element delimiter Element No Setting by GT Designer3 Device s 8 5 8 None File type File No Element No Bit No py 4 Y s File type Bit No File No Bit delimiter Element delimiter Element No Setting by GT Designer3 Device 1 4 2 7 1mm iv File type File No Element No Bit No 37x dE w 215 File type J Le position Module No Bit delimiter Element delimiter El
87. Item Set value Range IP Address PLC side IP address Subnet Mask Default Gateway MU Address PLC side setting Self port reference 2 0 to 65280 No Adjust the settings with GOT settings LF m Ethernet setting 2 sure that Self port reference No 251 is equivalent to the port No in the GOT cS Ethernet setting 4 28 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 Ethernet Connection 4 4 Device Range that Can Be Set o The device ranges of controller that be used for GOT e 2 ng are as follows 2 FUJI MICREX SX SPH ENS Note that the device ranges the following tables are the 9 S maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 aos Information The device specifications of controllers may differ m depending on the models even though belonging to the SIF 4 A TUAM in Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used 52 5 When non existent device or device number outside 29 the range is set other objects with correct device settings E S QE may not be monitored 1 lo 1 OK Cancel Setting item Le Leer d 1 FUJI MICREX F Item Description lt Bit gt CH1 FUJI MICREX F Set the device name device numbe
88. SD TXD 3 i 3 RXD NC 8 1 ER DTR 4 6 DSR NC FG SG 5 7 SG ZO oe RS232 connection diagram 6 E m GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side OE RS RTS 7 ko 4 RTS terminal block Dedicated cable 1761 CBL PM02 2 e E O a a i CS CTS e 1 9 5 CTS SD TXD 9 CD RD 2 RXD 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC ER 1 DR 4 53 RS232 connection diagram 3 Ca GOT side ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side SG 5 56 og 1 1 zi ER i CD NC 1 1 24V RS 7 RTS 5 a RD RXD 2 k i 7 TXD cs 8 5 SD TXD 3 r gt 4 RXD NC 6 5 ER DTR 4 5 cD NC ea 1 9 lt 1 oa SG 5 2 SG 558 582 DR DSR 6 SG lt 5 250 RS RTS 7 i 6 CTS TE CS CTS 3 RTS 9 Meee ete 4 amp 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 GT11 NC oe GT1050 NC 67104 NC 55 Sz 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 7 10 2 Serial Connection RS232 connection diagram 7 GOT side terminal block ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side SD gt 4 RXD RD 7 s ER 1 24V DR 5 SG 2 6 RS i 6 CTS cs RTS NC 6 NC 1 FG 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of t
89. SDA SDA SDB RDA 2 SDB 7 RDA SDA 1 RDB SDB 6 it i 1 i 1 i 1 5 1 SG 5 SG RDB 2 3 FG 4 3t RsB 8 9 _ 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 3 FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 13 4 2 Serial Connection RS485 connection diagram 3 22 PLC side GOT side D sub 9 pin RDA1 RXD1 h Z i 2 SDA RDB1 RXD1 4 1 SDB SDA1 TXD1 1 9 SDB1 TXD1 2 i 2 14 8 E I HU RSA RTS 9 FG CSA CTS 11 RSB RTS 10 CSB CTS 12 e _ SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 6 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 NC 14 Shell 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 9 Connecting terminating resistors 3 sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect RS485 connection diagram 4
90. Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication 9 With ICA port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in On he E4 terminal area option Detailed code 5 lt model 2 5 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal lt The value of terminating resistor varies between 5715 5714 GT12 GT11 Set the value as follows For the GT15 GT12 22002 1 4W For the GT14 GT11 2200 1 4W 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal e a Connecting terminating resistors 5 lt 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 T 2 QO gt 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 8 3 Connection Diagram a 5 lt 9 z e gt nc e n 5 RS485 connection diagram 5 GOT side Temperature controller ij Temperature controller i pp a _ acci ee 07 1 SDB 1 1 RDA1 3 SDB SDAC RDB1 4 FL i SDA p RDB pg SDA1 1 gt RDB RDAC SDB1 2 1 0 a8 1 1 RDA 1 1 1 1 SG 9 ri 1 ri SG SDA2 5 postice Y SDB2 6 4 RDA2 7 25 25 RDB2 8 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 3 FG 10 1 Pin No of tem
91. Transmission Speed BPS 19200 On Data Bit 7 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Zg OE Parity Even QD CH 1 HITACHTRIDICH J 9 2 Manufacturer HITACHI Retry Times 0 lone introller E 0055 Timeout Time Sec 3 El Ethemet t Standard I F RS232 x HITACHI HIDIC H Delay Time ms 0 Communication S 5 8 Gao Sev Station No Selection 5 9 ateway Client lue Ed Mail TransmissionSpeed BPS 18200 5 a au rein FIP pase Th 1 Redundant Stop Bit 1 bit 2 D Station No Switching Parity Even Retyy Times OT Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Station Selection Item Description Range Set this item when change the 4800bps transmission speed used for PS communication with the connected 9600bps 2 Speed equipment 19200bps 384006 Default 19200bps E x Set this item when change the data 3 Data Bit length used for communication with 7bit fixed 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the oe the connected equipment it fixed menu Default 7bit Specify the stop bit length for a 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Stop Bit communications ibit fixed z channel to be used from the list menu Default 1bit 555 3 Specify whether or not to perform a 5 ind i ity check how it is performed ul uc Set the following items Parity and now IispEromed i
92. 0 3 CONNECTION HITACHI PLC 3 5 3 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 500m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 27 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 3 HITACHI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable b For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330Q For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following s 1 4 3Terminating resistors of GOT 3 6 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 3 Connection Diagram 3 4 Side Settings 3 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 3 4 2 Communication detail settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Controller Setting E Controler Setting QD CH 1 HITACHI 510 CH2 None n HITACHI CH None QD CH 4 None N k HITACHI 10mini S10V etwork Duplex Seling E Ethemet amp Routing Information amp Gateway p Communication S El Gateway Server BIB Gateway Client Mail FTP Server File
93. 0 Not protected Disables the write command to 1 Setting PLC No 5 Write protection 1 protected module with the host link When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet service via Ethernet network set each PLC No to the GOT 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 5 7 3 2 m Ethernet setting 6 5 em 7 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 Forthe port No of the GOT set the port No of the host link 2 Setting IP address i service to be used Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using 7 3 2 W Ethernet setting multiple GOTs 3 Setthis as necessary A communication error may occur on the GOT with the u IP address 585 522 When connecting to the multiple network zak equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance 59 Using switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps we Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 52 Ox 52 29 zv gt CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 21 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 4 Device Range that Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Des
94. 1 1 1 1 9 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 2 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RS232 connection diagram 3 Interface converter CD485 V side 1 1 1 1 RD RXD 2 2 RXD 1 1 SD TXD 1 1 ER DTR 4 r 4 DTR 1 I 6 5 5 GND 1 1 DR DSR RS RTS 7 7 RTS CS CTS 8 CTS 1 1 9 9 RI 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD 6714 GT12 NC GT11 NC RS232 connection diagram 4 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector 1 cD 1 RD RXD 2 k SD TXD SD TXD gt RD RXD ER DTR 4 i SG 5 DR DSR RS RTS 7 1 1 1 i 1 SG 1 CS CTS 8 68 i 9 1 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No HA400 401 Signal name FB400 PF900 HA900 901 MA900 FB900 PF901 Communication Communication MA901 1 2 SG 25 25 13 25 44 SD TXD 26 26 14 26 45 RD RXD 27 27 15 27 46 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 3
95. 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 75IF900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 751F900 set Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit Description GT15 PRN Video input unit GT16M V4 GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit GT16M R2 GT15V 75R1 Video RGB unit Video RGB input unit GT16M V4R1 GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT GT15V 75ROUT Multimedia unit GT16M MMR CF card unit GT15 CFCD card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF 6 15 set Option Abbreviations and generic terms CF card Memory card Description GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 512MC GT05 MEM 1GC GT05 MEM 2GC GT05 MEM 4GC GT05 MEM 8GC GT05 MEM 16GC SD card NZ1MEM 2GBSD NZ1MEM 4GBSD NZ1MEM 8GBSD NZ1MEM 16GBSD L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC Option function board GT16 MESB GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50FNB GT15 MESB48M Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT Protective Sheet GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW GT16 80PSGW GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW GT16 70PSGW GT16 60PSCB GT16 60PSGB GT16 60PSCW GT16 60PSGW GT16
96. 1 Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 GOT side CD NC RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 1 2 SIEMENS PLC side CD TXD DSR SG DTR CTS RTS FG RS232 connection diagram 2 GOT side SD RD ER DR SG RS cS NC NC GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 NC GT11 NC GT105 T NC GT104 T NC SIEMENS PLC side RXD TXD DSR DTR SG CTS RTS CD FG RS232 connection diagram 3 GOT side SIEMENS PLC side SD RD ER DR SG RS cS NC NC 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length b GOT side connector c SIEMENS PLC side connector SD TXD 2 RD RXD The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less For the GOT side connector refer to the following 5 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications Use the connector compatible with the SIEMENS PLC side For details refer to the SIEMENS PLC user s manual CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 5 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 4 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Communication detail settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 SIEMENS 57 300 400 2 Controller Setting E Controller Setting QD CHT SIEMENS
97. 11 18 11 11 7 Precautions CONNECTION TO 2 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC mmm GT16 115 14 18 11 110 12 1 Connectable Model 1161 12 2 12 2 System 12 3 qa xe Ee wm Ww ye nao gt Zo 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 7 12 4 GOT Side 5 12 9 12 5 PLC Side 5 12 10 12 6 Device Range that Be Set 12 11 SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 12 CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Communi Series Model name Clock cation 541 Refer to Type K7M DLILICISUDC RS 232 RS 422 25712 24 120 K7M DLILILIU RS 232 K200S 07115 422 22 12 2 2 5 232 K300S K4P 15AS RS 422 O O O O O 7 12 2 3 12 2 12 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model List 12 2 System Configuration 5 FE
98. 15 21 5 T T Iz Examples of station number setting m 1 Direct specification Specify the station No of the PLC to be changed when setting device Specification range 00 to 31 PLC Station No settings Make sure to set a 2 digit number for the station No of the PLC to be monitored by the GOT 11 6 Device Range that Can Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 GE Series 90 Device Information Kind BIT Range Device 0 65535 Network Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device
99. 2 500 900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 2 RB500 RB900 gt 2 SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 5 e T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 BS T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 B400 z Y name PF901 HA900 901 MA900 MA901 RMC500 X TIO SA100 SA200 SB1 RS 485 o E m AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications 5 E a8 SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 e E zxz T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 Ono T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 2 5 lt pu On 2 zu zz On Z ocu gt 9 FOE 05 Uo a QSZ OIE g PE 58 EC 5 oz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 31 9 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 6 Temperature Temperature controller controller Temperature Temperature EI GOT side terminal block controller controller 1 pg oy EJ SDA1 TXD1 6 T R B TIR B TIR B TIR B SDB4 TXD1 3 f T R A T R A T R A T R A Pag 1 6 SG 11 1 SG SG NC 1 E rg 6 2 m ee ee IN NE n L3 NC 3 Combination module Combination module co fa if if SDA2 TXD2 5 E E SDB2 TXD2 7 oues m RDA2 RXD2 9 Terminating resistor 1200 1 2W RDA1 RXD1
100. 5 0 to the 8 to 11 of the MSG_RCV input relay input register coil holding register offset Do not make the offset settings When the offset is needed set Option Offset to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the device 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 19 6 2 Serial Connection CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 1 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 or MP2200 or MP2300 or 23005 or CP 9200SH or 312 CP 317 Communication driver Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT i Number of connectable Communication Maximum 4 A name ee Cable model segment Option device Model equipment module GT er Mj Built into GOT MP 920 218 100 GT15 J71E71 100 5 ics N MERGER When PLC module GOT is 1 218IF 01 Builtinto The following shows the number oe 218 02 100 of PLCs for 1 GOT lt 10 GT15 J71E71 100 lt For GT16 GT14 gt Shielded twisted pair cable STP or GT 5 i i i UDP 128 or less unshielded twisted pair cable UTP Built into GOT For GT15 GT12 gt MP2300S Category 3 4 and 5 100m 100BASE TX TCP 10 or less B pi UDP 128 or Shielded twisted pair cable STP oe Cat 5 and 5 a m 5 When PLC module
101. 5023 Startup 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time amp 10ms 0 Item Description Range GOT NET No aid qui 2 Set the station No of the GOT GOT PLC No Default 1 1 to 254 Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to IP Address fault 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router 0 0 0 0 to SMBROUMESK m network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default Default 2 4 0 0 0 0 t Gateway y 255 255 255 255 Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Ethernet Set the GOT port No for Ethernet 5023 to 65534 Download Port No download Default 5014 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 GOT Communication Port No Set the GOT port No for the connection with the Ethernet module Default Ethernet SIEMENS S7 Gateway 5023 Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway 5024 1024 to 5010 5023 to 65534 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the Startup Ti 3 to 255 APP CIT communication with the PLC CPU 98 Default 3sec Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90 sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the 0 to 10000 Delay Time load of the network destination PLC 10ms Default Oms
102. CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 installed stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of MELSECNET H communication 2 unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit recognized by GOT m differently depending the extension interface position For communication units installed the extension interface 2 side even if the communication unit is physically 53 installed in the 2nd stage position the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage Recognized as the 3rd stage of extension interface 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage 2 of extension interface 2 EI za i Recognized as the 2nd stage of extension interface 1 lt Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 2 586 Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 1 o D MELSECNET H communication unit 29 Ex Relay connector 95 oS CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 23 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 2 or CC Link communication unit GT15 75J61BT13 Z Install a MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J7 1BR13 Z or CC Link communication unit GT15 75J61BT13 Z at the 1st stage of th
103. Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Gt connectable Gable model Max Model Commun Cable model Max M i Series Connection diagram dist ication C tion di b de Option device Model equipment istance name Type onnection diagram number istance GT GT GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Built into Up to 16 User z UT2000 ciini 1200m ML2 RS 232 2 Bon ie connection diagram 0345232 connection controllers 16 for 1 GOT diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation When connecting directly Connection cable Suc Connection cable GOT veu Number of connectable Cable model Max 6 equipment Series ication Option device Model T Connection diagram number distance ype GT09 C30R40304 6T 3m 4 16 temperature 1200m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m GT09 C100R40304 6T 10m controllers for 1 GOT GT09 C200R40304 6T 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P Up to the following number of GT09 C300R40304 6T 30m GT15 RS4 98 15 temperature controllers for 1 9r 1200m m n GOT 5485 connection diagram 17 Built into GOT GT16 GT15 16 4 wire type GT11 10 User RS485 connection diagram 15 niu ame 1200 Built into GOT CH UT2000
104. Default Oms 4 SLC500 POINT Transmission Speed BPS 19200 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility Data Bit 8 bit The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting Sdn bL after writing Communication Settings of project Parity Even data Sum Check Done For details on the Utility refer to the following Sum Check Type BCC manual Adapter Address 0 K gt User s Manual Host Address 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective gt E lt we 3 pa W lt Item Description Range Set this item when change the T transmission speed used for 4800bps Transmission mE Speed communication with the connected 9600bps equipment 19200bps Default 19200bps Specify the adapter address station No of the PLC that the GOT will nations monitor in the connected network Default 0 Specify the host address station of the adapter to which the is Host Addross connected in the connected network 19 Default 1 54 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 11 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 6 PLC Side Setting ALLEN BRADLEY PLC For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLCs refer to the following manuals ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s Manu
105. FUJI FA PLC 1205 1405 1505 4 8 MICREX F55 iust i seats 4 3 2 70 sese 4 5 FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER PXG4 PXG5 9 5 4 PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 5 3 Index 1 INDEX G GE FANUC PLC 90 30 11 3 Series90570 i ate 11 6 VersaMax Micro 11 7 GOT connector specifications 1 27 GOT Side Settings CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC HD LEE 10 9 10 15 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 17 CONNECTION FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 11 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 11 14 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC 2 15 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 7 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 7 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS 12 9 2 16 2 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE 2 9 38 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 15 6 21 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 31 GOT side settings CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PL
106. GOT is 1 Built into GOT 92005 2181 100 following shows the number CP 312 of GOTs for 1 PLC module GT15 J71E71 100 TCP UDP 10 or less GT Wy Built into GOT CP 317 218TXB 100m E GT15 J71E71 100 1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T Max 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE T 2 5 standard use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps 100Mbps mixed environment For how to check the function version refer to the following GT16 User s Manual 4 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporatio
107. GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT GT15 60VLTN Multi color display board GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H CNB 378 GT16H CNB 42S Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H 50ESCOV GT16H 60ESCOV With wall mounting Attachment GT14H 50ATT Memory loader GT10 LDR Memory board GT10 50FMB Panel mounted USB port extension GT14 C10EXUSB 4S GT10 C10EXUSB 5S Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 Description Abbreviation of the SWODND GTWK3 E and SWODND GTWK3 EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SWLIDNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works GX W
108. LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Host Address connected in the network of the 0 to 31 I F Interface to be used GOT Driver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 2 Set this item to adjust the 2 9 ETE transmission timing of the a 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Delay Time communication request from the 010300 ms 9 Controller Type I F and Driver set GOT 2 E Make the settings according to the usage Default Oms environment 12 4 2 Communication detail settings Ix 9 POINT gt Click the OK button when settings are completed 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting be changed on the Utility s Communication setting ia 95 gis E s E POINT after writing Communication Settings of project 2 50 i data OTT The settings of connecting equipment can be For details on the Utility refer to the following confirmed in I F Communication Setting manual For details refer to the following Oridetails referto the following gt GTO User s Manual 1 H 277 1 1 2 communication setting 2 Precedence in communication settings of When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 58 Sz 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 9 12 4 GOT Side Settings 12 5 PLC Side Setting LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC For
109. Link coil D D10001 to D12048 B D20001 to D22048 Word device bit Specified bit of following _ word devices mout register Z Z1 to Z31840 Holding register W1 to W28291 w SW1 to SW28291 R1 to R2048 R10001 to R12048 9 Decimal Link register R20001 to R22048 5 R SR SR1 to SR2048 SR10001 to SR12048 SR20001 to SR22048 Constant register 1 4096 Converting the following bit Bit device word devices to words Link 1 Change the input register 30001 to 30512 to Z1 to Z512 for setting When set in default 2 Change the holding register 40001 to 49999 to W1 to W9999 for setting When set in default 3 Change the constant register 31001 to 35096 to K1 to K4096 for setting When set in default Continued to next page 4 5 6 il SR and SW indicate registers virtual register compatible to the data format where internal data of PLC is displayed using Ror W The following shows the difference between the display values of SR SW and those of R W corresponding to the values of PLC internal data PLC internal data 16 bit SR SW R W 9999 9999 9999 1001 1001 1001 1000 1000 1000 999 999 999 0 0 0 1 1 32769 999 999 33767 1000 1000 33768 1001 1001 33769 9999 9999 42767 The internal 1 to 1536 be set as 0513 to 02048 However setting must not exceed 1 to 0512 and 0513
110. MA901 epeuifcations Z HA900 901 05 SG 25 25 44 3 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 27 27 46 4 4 9 R A 28 28 47 1 1 E 5 RB 29 29 48 2 2 ex oO o following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector 589 OTE 9 ES Modular connector pin No 28188889 e000 No 3 o amp 55 oz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 27 9 3 Connection Diagram 5422 connection diagram 4 RKC temperature controller side 4 A B A B SG J J 1 RKC temperature controller side i T A 27 i T B 28 3 R A 29 R B 25 SG For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No PF900 901 e FB400 AG500 MA900 ipa 2 900 400 401 MA901 specifications HA900 901 SG 25 25 44 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 T B 27 27 46 4 R A 28 28 47 1 R B 29 29 48 2 RS422 connection diagram 5 GOT side RKC temperature controller side 2 RDA wax T B 1 RDB 7 T A 1 SDA 1 f R B SDB 6 T R A 1 RSA 3 SG RSB H i 414 i 1 CSB 9 je se FG 1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows
111. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO TOODO Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi aes 5 for GT Works3 5 212 SIEMENS OHRT CORPORA MURATES SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions WARNING resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions A CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage m Note that the A caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS N WARNING e Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch An exte
112. NONE Turn Around Delay 5 NONE Timeout Long 1 Setto YES 2 Set to SLAVE 3 Setthe communication format to be used only when connecting to Port2 4 to NONE 5 Setto NONE 6 Set to LONG 11 5 4 Connecting to 697 711 Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only Setting item PLC side setting SNP Enable YES SNP Mode Slave Interface RS232 RS485 Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Parity ODD NONE EVEN Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Flow Control 4 NONE Turn Around Delay NONE Timeout Long 1 Setto YES 2 Set to SLAVE 3 Setthe communication format to be used only when connecting to Port2 4 Set to NONE 5 Set to NONE 6 Set to LONG 11 16 11 11 5 Side Setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station No 3 No 00 No 15 No 6 1 1 BELLES BEBELE IEEE Telele Telele 1
113. No of faulty stations 2 b For Ethernet multiple connection 94 total No of the faulty devices is stored zo Channel Device b15 to b8 b7 to bO BE T Ch1 GS280 00H fixed No of faulty stations S Ch2 GS300 00H fixed No of faulty stations Ch3 GS320 OOH fixed No of faulty stations Ch4 GS340 OOH fixed No of faulty stations H 59 22 08 25 82 When monitoring 55230 Numerical Display When monitoring GS230 on Numerical Display check mask processing with data operation tab as the following For the data operation refer to the following manual gt Designer3 Screen Design Manual E S Numerical Display Data Operation tab 55 o Numerical Display zte Basic Settings ii Only the setting of selected Operation Type is valid Operation None Data Operation O Script zo On Bit Mask 5 lt AND Oor Oxor Mask Pattem 00 Es 5 20 Bit Shift oF Le Data Operation None Set mask processing to the upper eight bits b8 9 to 615 of 65230 Numerical Display 52 29 2 oo amp of 86 ZOE o gt 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 45 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 2 Faulty station information The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set 0 Normal 1 Abnormal The bit is reset after the fault is recovered a For the Etherne
114. Odd lt 55 MODBUS ON protocol n ul a et 58 EC 25 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 41 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Module address setting switch a 00 Setting range 0 to F Tan INE ANIZ Nu ele ses any NA aS NU OT aS QT AN i 4 Interval time settings Configure the interval time setting using the RKC communication setting tool WinPCI After the communication is started set as follows Setting item Set value Instrument 0 CFG file ZTIO rkc cfg Interval time 0 to 250ms For the using method of RKC communication setting tool refer to the following gt RKC communication setting tool user s manual 9 5 4 Connecting to Z COM 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol Host MODBUS Data bit 8bits fixed Parity None fixed Stop bit 16 fixed Unit address 0 to F Interval time 0 to 250ms Dip switch settings valid invalid valig 4 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the unit address without overlapping with that of other units 2 Setting DIP sw
115. RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller side 9 26 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 3 2 RS 422 cable a Tr RS422 connection diagram 2 T at POI NT ee RKC temperature controller side E GOT side Modular 2 Differences in polarity between GOT and RKC temperature controllers 2 R 4 T B The polarity of poles A and signal names is dd i S reversed between GOT and RKC temperature pay E controllers SDB 6 m 1 a cable according to the followin 7 5 C t bl ding to the foll RSA 3 L1 3 SG 58 connection diagrams RSB 8 6 SG 5 csa 4 i 26 i CSB 9 i Oza 6 5 1 Connection diagram ee P alt RS422 connection diagram 1 il Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting z GOT side RKC temperature controller side switch of the GOT main unit to Disable ce GT14 GT11 Set th
116. Signal name UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A qe Ed UT75A UP55A product condition P Pin 2 u SDB 301 407 501 1 zum SDA 302 408 502 2 5 5 a RDB 304 410 504 4 RDA 305 411 505 5 86 Oo SG 303 409 503 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Product Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS 5 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire lt type UT55A gt g Product with two RS 485 communication 20 B 1or2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without lt the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code e model a Product with the RS 485 communication o 5 _ With CH3 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in terminal area option Detailed code ZO UP55A model Y QO Product with two RS 485 communication gt 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model O B Product with the RS 485 communication ind A RT j _ 5 With 4 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in E4 terminal area option Detailed code e model 2 Terminating resistor should be
117. T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 7 Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature ha GOT side terminal block 2 ide termi ck Controller 4 controller 4 controller 4 controller B TRB T R B dS ff 13 TRO T R B Gi 1 E TIR A F f 1 TIR A TIR A SDB1 2 r3 be Pg 56 SG i 1156 56 RDAI 2 i I x 4 FH i peck 3 O SDA2 5 Ez Combination module Combination module e SDB2 6 x RDA2 7 E rt RDB2 8 ra gt E E Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W z9 SG 9 ct rt More than 1000 in case of CB series 08 FG 10 T 5 m rem z 2 1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows 9 GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM lt Connecting terminating resistors 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a
118. TXD DTR SG DSR RTS CTS NC NC RS232 connection diagram 3 Interface converter side GOT side K3SC 10 1 56 1 RD RXD 2 1 6 RD SD TXD o 5 SD ER DTR 4 se 5 1 1 DR DSR 6 1 1 RS RTS 7 i 1 CS CTS 1 1 9 pebechendus 14 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 97 14 1 GOT connector specifications 3 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the temperature controller 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 32 RS 485 cable US Connection diagram cz RS485 connection diagram 1 z a E uc VY de aos Interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W 2 595 converter M dd Temperature Temperature gt RC 77 controller side TXD N f f 1 11 21 li TXD P FG
119. YOKOGAWA GREEN UTI00 UT2O00 UTAdvanced 9 C ee Communications Detail Setting Format 1 gt El Gateway Server O 9 BE Gateway Client Property EJ Transmission Speed BPS G FTP Server EE File Transfer F Item Description Range ZO Q Redundant Bin Bit gt lt AD Station No Switchin Parity e 4800bps l Sum Check Set this item when change the transmission speed used for obici adde Transmission Eno EM the connected Delay Time ms Speed 38400bps Format 576006 Default 9600 e 1L cancer Apply 115200bps z Set this item when change the data o Data Bit length used for communication with the 7bits Bbits connected equipment Default 8615 Su Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Default 1bit 3 menu Specify whether or not to perform a parity None 5 Perity check and how it is performed during Even E na ec TET er 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the communication Odd B lt channel to be used from the list menu SPORIS mug Set whether or not to perform a sum 2 5 3 Set the following items Sum Check check during communication Done None Simo Manufacturer YOKOGAWA li Controller type YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 e 2 2 etry when a communication error occurs 5times UT2000 UTAdvanced Default Otime E VF Interface to be used Ti
120. a a aor tctoosg ee 7 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 1200m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1 connector specifications c YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330Q For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT b YOKOGAWA PLC side When connecting a PLC link module to a GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the PC link module The following describes how to connect it on the PC link module F3LC11 2N Set the terminator switch TERMINATOR on the front panel of F3LC11 2N to the 4 WIRE side to enable the terminator LC02 0N Connect the terminating resistor provided with the LC02 ON across SDA and SDB and across RDA and RDB on the terminal block 7 8 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 5 GOT side settings Se
121. amp self check Self check check For details on the I O check refer to the following manual Users Manual Debug self_check Self check 1 0 check 1 Touch CPU on the check screen Please select check channel Touching CPU executes the communication 1 89232 check with the connected PLC 1 2 When the communication screen ends Please select check channel successfully the screen on the left is displayed CPU communication check No error 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 41 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 22 9 m N a 9 4 a MONITORING Communication monitoring function The communication monitoring is a function that checks whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT If this check ends successfully it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection Display the communication monitoring function screen by Main Menu Comm Setting Comm Monitor For details on the communication monitoring function refer to the following manual gt GT10 User s Manual Operation of communication monitoring function screen Main Menu ie Main Menu 5 gt Standard I F etting Comm Monitor Touch Comm Setting Touch Communication settings a Comm Setting n x SD e Data Transfer RD RD oni tor ES I F 1 ESMII F Touc
122. m opu I ogo Connection cable Zee oro 2 On PLC Connection cable GOT 5 5 RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Zo Model Cable model Max 20 interface ication nar Option device Model equipment Og name Connection diagram number distance ox capsule Type GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m F55 FFK120A C10 RS 232 or 15m 5 1 GOL for 1 eee 55 RS232 connection diagram 12 WES 485 interface capsule 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 4 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Model ede interface ication cee 22 Option device Model equipment name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type T aRS485 connection diagram 500m Built into GOT GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 500m GT16 CO2R4 9S 0 2m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 3 XA 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs F55 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 232C 485 interfac
123. 01 10100 Speed OFF OFF 100Mbps Circuit Number 01 5 F ransmission Full duplex mode i F H OFF Hot Swapping Mode OFF Half duplex mode ON Start up by the default IP Tem CNO 03 CNO 04 CNO 05 address and the engineering port No INIT Initial Start OFF Local Port 10500 10501 10030 nitial Startup OFF Start up by the IP address Node IP i i 4 192 168 001 018 192 168 001 020 192 168 001 073 and the engineering Ne set Address for CP 717 Node esate T ae ON The module starts the self Port diagnosis when the PLC is tarted Connection 2 Test 5 UDP ud OFF The module does not start the self diagnosis when the PLC Protocol Extended Extended Extended is started 8 MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MEMOBUS Code BIN BIN BIN 1 Turn off all the unused switches Transmission Be sure to set the values above for the address so that the GOT communicates with the programmable controller correctly For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following 6 3 2 Ethernet setting 2 Settings for CP 218IF Item IP Address Set value IP address for 218TXB Response Time Not required parameter Cortes ount of Retr TUER Number of Nor required Connection Number 1 Local Port 10500 Node IP Address Local IP address of GOT Connection Node Port Local port No of GOT parameter setting Connection Type UDP
124. 1 Connection to large sized 2 3 2 2 2 Connecting to 200 to 252 series series board type or EH 150 2 4 2 3 Connectior BDIagrarm ciet d en a e DL accu tee Lon pue ME Perte eh nde 2 5 2232 89 292 Cable iiiter E tr ueteri Ue tein 2 5 2 3 2 422 CADIS ete tiet anal dde deett re Dat Tol dd ea D eee redd 2 5 24 GOT Side Settings B E eee a 2 7 2 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 2 7 2 4 2 Communication detail 2 7 2 5 asda 2 9 2 0 Device Range that Can Be 2 2 22 1 1 2 41 042 22 422 2 10 2 6 SBHITAGHEHIDIG H SefIeS hori Ree iM 2 12 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 9 1 Connectable Model tei ea dae detente eae 3 2 32 System GONMPGUCATION idee teet eae ede 3 3 32 1 510 3 3 3 22 Connecting to S 10min urine pesce gem epi e QR a 3 4 3 3 Connection Diagram dee de ened ee ede deed d e
125. 1 R RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CB Seres essere eiit 9 12 FB Series 9 13 H PCP A 9 7 idit da n e e 9 4 PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 9 17 RB S r Sh lar asilo ai ttes 9 16 RMC500 MA900 901 AG500 9 17 SA100 200 reti cipis reiten ei 9 17 ORA aeta 9 22 SRZ 9 9 rid irit tec patrare o 9 19 S SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER i ee iter Pea Und 13 2 SIEMENS PLC SIMATIC 87 200 14 4 SIMATIC S7 300 400 14 3 Station No settings CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 24 CONNECTION TO SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 17 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 11 16 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 48 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 36 System Configuration CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY feni dies 10 4 10 13 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 3 CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 CONNECTION TO FANUC PLC 11 3 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER sees 15 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES P
126. 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 2 Setthe Error Detection according to the sum check format setting on the GOT side For the sum check format setting on the GOT side refer to the following c 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 3 For the Maximum Node Address set the same address as the Maximum Node Address on the DH 485 network 4 Setthe DH 485 Node Address according to the Host Address on the GOT side Set a unique DH 485 Node Address so that it does not conflict with the Node Address of the PLC CPU on the DH 485 network For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the following gt 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 3 Ethernet Connection 25 zac 10 3 1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix Qui ze Communication driver Oro rm B EtherNet IP AB Gateway Connection cable lt nd 5 z Connection cable GOT SE EtherNet IP Communi Number of connectable Series ae 4 cation Cable model segment Option device equipment communication module 3 Type length E z 10 5 Shielded twisted pair cable Buil 5 Built into i 1756 ENET 10Mbps 2 42 Ze ControlLogix 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps 9 Ethernet wiste
127. 16 9 2 iagram z eee 55285485 t acus b pera connection 4 T c 7 1200m Built into GOT diagram 1 for 1 GOT i FA LTBGTRACBLO5 0 5m z ser i 1200 FA LTBGTRACBL40 1m EK iagram W BF 02 0500 0 5m 4 9 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m RS 485 BF 02 1 74 W BF 02 2 W BF 01 0500 0 5m 45 E 02 A o W BF 02 3000 3m W BF 01 1000 1m 4 2 E pt W BF 01 3000 3m 5 4 4200m GT15 RS4 TE 059 85485 connection diagram 2 52 ge 58 55 oz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 9 2 System Configuration Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Cable model Cable model Max bed Model Communication x ii 9 connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model name Type equipment number number W BF 01 0500 0 5m 74 W BF 01 1000 1m 774 W BF 01 3000 3m 74 s 1200m Built into GOT EJ RS485 connection 02 0500 0 5 4 dicare 13 i fo i emperature 4 5 W BF 02 3000 3m 4 ri Gar 01 1000 1 45 W BF 01 3000 3m 5 T 3 1200m GT14 RS2T4 9P 9567 88485 connection diagram 10 54 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 2 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 3 Connect it to the
128. 2 L Bee Li Li RSA E 52 ot rt SG SG 13 i SG zu 2 1 1 1 1 gt D ANE US Vd Zz RDA1 RXD1 3 7 T a 9 5 RDB1 RXD1 4 E4 L s4 aos SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 6 Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4 RSA RTS 9 Oe RSB RTS 10 um CSA CTS 11 o CSB CTS 12 Ge RDA2 RXD2 7 5 z RDB2 RXD2 8 o NC 14 Shell 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller 5 9 8 GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series 5 Signal name UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 E 5 BE RSB 28 3 26 RSA 29 4 27 SG 30 5 28 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 5 Connecting terminating resistors 9 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 z 8 RS485 connection diagram 11 Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W 2 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller m CEDE S 1 o spat 1 SPA tte SDB gt E mi SDAC LI 981 2 H r1 SDA ic RDA1 E E RDB i RDB Zac 1 RDB1 4 4 T RDAQ z eae SG 9 T SG 1 1 1 1 SDA2 5 SDB2 6 4 T 4 1 RDA2 7
129. 2 For transmission control procedure2 Item Set value Transmission speed 19200bps Station No 0 Data bit Tbit Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even Control Method None Communication format Sum check RS 232 MODE switch 9 RS 422 MODE switch 9 Done 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 5 PLC Side Setting For RS 232 communication For RS 422 communication PREPARATORY CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING pa Q FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ll T 2 YOKOGAWA PLC 2 6 Device Range that Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 HITACHI HIDIC H Information 00000 E 21813 Ce er JL s e Joc d
130. 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Download No 5014 GOT Communication Port No 5016 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout 3 Delay Time x1Oms 0 Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT 110 239 Default 1 GOT PLC No Set the station No of the GOT 11064 Default 1 GOT Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to IP Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the CMM eorr or TUE Gateway 255 255 255 255 router Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Ethernet Set the port No for Ethernet 5014 to 65534 Download download Except for 5011 Port No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 GOT Set the GOT No for the ae M connection with the connected Communication Except for 5011 Port No equipment Default 5016 5012 5013 and 49153 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU Default 3sec 3 to 255sec Timeout Time Set the time perio
131. 3 GOT built in USB interface Bus GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT 1000 Front view Standard interface 3 GOT built in USB interface e CF CARD cano 4 BATTERY Rear view Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface Standard interface 1 GOT built in Bus interface 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface F BATTERY Oo A O Rear view 1 11 MONITORING f GT1050 BATTERY 4 Rear view Standard interface 1 Standard interface 3 GOT built in RS 422 interface GOT built in USB interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface g 1040
132. 3 1 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS ger 12 1 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 i eit eects 9 1 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY 13 1 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 1 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Controller Type enn 1 5 Conversion Cable 1 19 D Device Range that Can Be Set CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 18 CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 29 CONNECTION TO SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 18 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 11 17 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER esse 15 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 10 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 9 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PEG neto aeterne 12 11 CONNECTION TO MURATEC CONTROLLER eate tt ttn ns 16 2 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 50 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLEER ttti nea 13 6 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 16 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 32 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 22 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 37 F
133. 485 Terminati ist erminating resistor OFF Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even Odd None Stop bit 1bit fixed Station No 1 fixed 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 5 14 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting selection 1 Adjust with GOT and temperature controller settings Settings by switch RS 485 communication RS 422 485 switch setting switch Terminating resistor selection switch DCE DTE switch H 440 NO H i 28 as MOIINOW 0 UJ U O POWER DATA OUT gt AGIT O DATA CH HF SN ErETEME CORE v f1 1 Settings of transmission speed and MANUAL AUTO MANUAL AUTO MONITOR BIT RATE Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 9600bps ON ON OFF 325 ransmission OFF OFF speed 38400bps ON OFF ON MANUAL AUTO AUTO ON 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 Settings of DCE DTE RS 422 485 and terminating 5 5 5 Connecting to interface resistor selection converter SI 30A Q gt eo Setting item Set value 9 DCE DTE Communication set
134. 57 3007 CH 2 None SIEMENS CH 3 None CH amp None SIEMENS 7 300 400 Property Value Transmission Speed BP5 38400 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd Adapter Address 1 Host Address Network Duplex setting El Ethemet Standard I F RS232 Routing Information Ek Gateway iver SIEMENS 57 300 400 Communication S Gateway Server BB Gateway Client E Mail FTP Server Fig File Transfer FTP Fy Redundant Station No Switching Item Description Range Set this item when change the TL Cancet E Transmission speed used for 9600bps 2 communication with the connected 19200bps Speed equipment 38400bps Default 38400bps Set this item when change the data 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the cus length used for communication with inem menu the connected equipment m Default 8bit 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer SIEMENS Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed Controller Type Set either of the following Parity during communication Odd fixed S7 300 400 Default Odd S7 200 Specify the adapter address station I F Interface
135. 7 4 i 4 DIR Qu 2 240 SG 5 H J 5 56 2 xz Precautions when preparing a cable 558 DR DSR 6 6 DSR RS RTS 7 RTs 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less CS CTS 8 CTS 2 side connector NE For the GOT side connector refer to the following E 2 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD 6714 6712 GT11 NC 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 2 E 3 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector Qu Use the connector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC lt Fou 210 OUO lt 250 589 E Pd Sz 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 7 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC GOT side side terminal block 1 SDA 1 i C RDA SDB 6 RDB RDA 2 K 3 SDA 7 SDB SG 5 SG RSA 3 FG RSB 8 csa 4 1 CSB 1 For the system terminal connect 1200 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively RS422 connection diagram 2 GOT side terminal block SDA SDB RDA RDB SG RSA RSB CSA
136. 9 gt 2 Data format switch SW2 Set the character length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 7 2 5 Communication detail settings 3 Module function switch SW3 Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Ch ter length aracter engin OFF 7bits 2 ON done OFF none Parity OC ON even Fm 32 3 Fm 33 OFF odd gt P 6 ON 2bits 4 Stop bit OFF 154 ON done 5 Check Possum OFF none End ch t 6 d 2 specification 7 Protect function OFF disabled 8 Security function OFF disabled Switch No Description Settings User setting 1to6 OFF inhibited 7 Modem OFF not compatibility compatible 8 External modem OFF none 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 10 Connecting PC link module 01 0 LC02 0N Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit LC01 0N Front LC02 0N Essai 1 Transmission speed setting switch Set the same transmission
137. 9 pin PLC side NC 1 1 FG RD RXD 2 2 SD SD TXD 3 gt 3 RD ER DTR 4 gt 6 DR SG 5 gt SG DR DSR 6 20 ER RS RTS 7 4 RS CS CTS 8 5 cs 9 CD RS232 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC side D sub 9 pin D sub 9 pin NC 1 1 CD RD RXD 2 SD SD TXD 3 2 RD ER DTR 4 gt 6 DR SG 5 5 SG DR DSR 6 4 ER RS RTS 7 8 CS CS CTS 8 7 RS 9 9 4 12 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection RS 485 cable 1 Connection diagram RS485 connection diagram 1 GOT side PLC side PLC side SDA RDA1 RXD1 SDA SDB RDA RDA RDB RDB SG x sG Ee T E RDB1 RXD1 4 SDA1 TXD1 1 SDB1 TXD1 2 SG 13 RSA RTS 9 CSA CTS 11 RSB RTS CSB CTS SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 4 14 Shell zZ 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of interface converter which will be a terminal 2 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal m 9 Zn 9 Connecting terminating resistors 3 FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC side PLC side 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
138. 9 pin D sub female 9 pin terminal block o zo On lt ns 2 5 os ES z Ox 52 T 2 QO gt amp a etu 522 USE 656 o gt oO 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 29 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 2 Coaxial cable connector connection method The following describes the method for connecting the BNC connector connector plug for coaxial cable and the cable NCAUTION Solder the coaxial cable connectors properly Insufficient soldering may result in malfunctions Components of the BNC connector Structure of the coaxial cable External conductor Outer sheath Insulating material Nut Washer Gasket Plug shell Contact Internal conductor 1 Remove the external sheath of the coaxial cable with dimensions as shown below 50 55555555 SSS 55555525594 Cable in use A Cut this portion of the outer sheath 3C 2V 15mm 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 10mm 2 Pass the nut washer gasket clamp through the coaxial cable as shown on the left and loosen the external conductor Gasket Insulating material 3 Cut the external conductor insulting material and internal Internal conductor conductor with the dimensions as shown below Note that the external conductor should be cut to the same dimension as the tapered section of the clamp and smoothed down to
139. 9S 0 2m 1 Up to 16 W BF 02 0500 0 5m i FI emperature upcep R9422 W BF 02 1000 1m 2 W BF 02 3000 3my RS422 connection GT15 RS4 9S for 1 GOT diagram 2 1200m GT GT Built into GOT 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 9 8 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 3 Connecting to SRZ When connecting to temperature control module Z TIO Z CT with a converter ra E tr 0 3 Q 9 ae Connection cable 2 2 og 9 Connection cable 1 zz 210 o pesi Temperature Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model Max Model Communication Cable mogel Max a Series Connection 5 Option device Model equipment distance name Type distance E diagram number diagram number 2 CT Up to 9 User Usei 2 21 9485 4085232 Built
140. CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC Connection Diagram 2 5 GOT Side Settings eves 2 7 PLC Side Sell hdc ERE S S em rue 2 9 Device Range that Be Set 2 10 TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YASKAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 1 The following table shows the connectable models Series Large sized H Series Model name H 302 H 702 H 1002 H 2002 H 4010 Clock H 300 H 700 H 2000 Communication Type RS 232 RS 422 Connectable Model List 6141 Serial GT 1088 120 1030 Refer to 37224 H 200 to 252 Series H 200 H 250 H 252 H 252B H 252C RS 232 37222 H Series board type H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR RS 232 37222 EH 150 series EH CPU104 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 EH CPU516 EH CPU548 RS 232 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 1 Connectable Model List 737222 2 2 System Configuration 2 2 1 Connection to large sized series PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Communication driver HITACH
141. CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 3 Connection Diagram 13 3 SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 4 GOT Side Settings 13 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication settings g Make the settings according to the usage environment Set the channel of the connected equipment 1 SICK Flexi Soft E Property Value Transmission Speed BP5 115200 Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Controller Setting Controller Setting CH 3 None CH 4 None Controller Type SICK Flexi Soft ch Network Duplex Setting El Ethemet Routing Information Gateway p Communication S El Gateway Server BE Gateway Client Ed Mail FTP Server 2 Fi File Transfer FTP pees E Q Redundant Timeout Time Sec AD Station No Switching Delay Manufacturer SICK Delay Time ms VF Standard 1 85232 Mi Driver SICK Flexi Soft Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 115200 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps x Tm Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps P equipment 57600bps Default 115200bps 115200bps Set the number of retries to be 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Retry performed when a communic
142. CTS 5 ReceiveFlowControlMode DTR 1 Adjust the settings with GOT communication settings 5 lt i 5 7 2 5 Communication detail settings 555 o gt 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 13 7 2 Serial Connection 4 Select Reboot Online Mode on the Reboot screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the online mode Defining Logic POU Define Logic POU using Logic Designer peripheral software and download the project to STARDOM 1 Start Logic Designer and create a new project using a template Use STARDOM Serial Communication template 2 Insert FA M3 Emulator Firmware Library to the new project 1 Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer 2 Right click Insert and select Firmware Library 3 Double click the SD_FCXPLCR_LIB folder and double click SD_FCXPLCR_LIB fwl to select it 4 The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Mwt PIc Fw_lib SD_FCXPLCR_LIB SD_FCXPLCR_LIB fwl 3 Insert FA M3 Emulator User Library to the new project 1 Right click Library under the project tree in Logic Designer 2 Right click Insert and select User Library 3 Double click SD CFAMS3R PF mwt to select it 4 The library path inserted in the procedures above is as follows Install Folder LogicDesigner Libraries SD PF mwt 7 14 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 4 Copy a sa
143. Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GTO User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 6 3 3 side setting MP2000 series MP920 series YASKAWA PLC For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual Parameter settings Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool 1 Settings for 218IF 01 Item Set value Range PLC side IP Local IP Address address Not required for Response Time 0 communication with GOT Count of Retry Not required for Number of Retries communicanon with GOT 1 1 1 to 20 Connection Number Local Port Local Station s Port Number 10500 230 10109934 Node IP Address IP address Parameter Remote Station s IP 1110111 fGOT setting Address 2 Node Port Remote Station s Port Number 2 of GOT UDP tion UDP TCP Lu recommended Extended MEMOBUS Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MELSEC None MODBUS TCP Code BIN BIN Ramee GOT1000 Name of GOT Station s Name Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address System Port Diagnostic 10000 Engineering Port No Locali Port TCP Transmission PLC side
144. Connecting PC link module F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F Rotary switch 1 Station No 10 s digit Station No 2 1 s digit 1 4 Terminator switch F3LC11 2N only TERMINATOR 2 4 WIRE OFF Settings 4 WIRE Description Resistor connected 4 wire type Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LC11 1F F3LC12 1F Side view indicated by A With right side cover removed lo 1 Transmission speed switch SW1 Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 5 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 42455 i 7 19200bps gt ee 9 38400bps A 57600bps 115200bps 4 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 11 7 2 Serial Connection PREPARATORY CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC O z 22 YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER HITACHI IES PLC 9 a lt lt 9
145. Default 3time Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT Default Oms 1 Leave the setting as default If the set value is changed communication with the PLC is disabled 1 Host address When connecting to PLC by RS 232 communication set the Host Address to O 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GTO User s Manual 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Delay Time 0 to 300ms 4 18 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection 427 PLC Side Setting Connecting to NV1L RS2 NC1L RS2 m 1 Communication settings Zo Make the communication settings using setting 52 POINT E switches 592 FUJI PLC Item Set value E E For details of FUJI
146. Designer3 displays the device that cannot os be converted no corresponding device type or excessive setting ranges as In this case set the device again 2 When the changed Manufacturer or Controller Type does not correspond to the network Pg The network will be set to the host station 55 3 When the Manufacturer or Controller is changed to None 5 Designer3 displays the device of the changed channel No as this case set the device again 25 Since the channel is retained the objects be reused other channel No batch by using the Device Oe Bach Edit CH No Batch Edit or Device List B ez lt EE 556 o gt 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 15 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings onto the GOT For details on writing to GOT refer to the following manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 1 2 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT Communicate with GOT E cor wire e 80 veis Write Data Project Data 05 Boot OS O Special Data White Mode Select write data White Check Acquire GOT information GT16 1640480 Destination Drive C Builtin Flash Memory Write Data Size Project Da
147. E3 terminal area option Detailed code model Ps Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 E p With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed o 3 code model ou cqui Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 1or2 2 wire type and with the power supply for 24VDC sensor 2 Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 5 D 7 2 wire type Standard code model zum 6 d oou Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 With C4 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed E 5 e code model za LE m 7 1 With LP Product with two RS 485 communication ports and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor 4 mm Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 1 and without the power supply of 24VDC sensor o 9 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 5 9 10 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact 2 a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 5 2 5 os ES z Ox H 55 29 2 QO gt 24 a e Fu z 55 O O gt 9 ac z 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 9 8 2 System Configuration 8 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the conn
148. F3SP67 FA M3V F3SP76 7S 5 71 45 5 232 5 422 37724 FA500 500 5 232 5 422 727722 STARDOM NFCP100 NFJT100 RS 232 7723 FA M3 F3SP05 F3SP08 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 FA M3V F3SP71 4N F3SP76 7S F3SP71 4S Ethernet 7377 34 54 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBDE 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 Connectable Model List 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 1 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V 552 2 When using the conversion cable Communication driver Lir ITI YOKOGAWA 9 FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable 5 Connection cable GOT eee umber o Model Conversion Commun Cable model Max dep connectable ication CM 3 Option device Model t m name cable Type Connection diagram number distance equipmen re F3SP05 9 GT GT F3SP21 Built into GOT 95 2205 GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m EXT F3SP25 or F3SP28 KM10 0C RS 232 15m 4 F3SP35 RS232 connection diagram m o F3SP38 1 F3SP53 GT15 RS2 9P G F3SP58 T 9 F3SP59 E 1 GOT for 1 PLC Buil
149. FUJI PLC MICREX SX SPH Serial Connection is supported This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION REVISIONS 2 Mee REVISIONS 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for thirty six 36 months after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty
150. GOT communication m 9 module zo G8 RS485 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT 5 d GT16 C02R4 16 9S 0 2m NP1L RS5 RS 485 1000 GT15 RS2T4 9P s 4 57 5485 connection diagram 6 GT15 RS4 9S gt ow Built into GOT 55 ogo 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd E 586 2 20 sj On lt 25 5 oS ES zo Ox 52 29 2 QO o gt amp zea ost 559 ZOE 285 gt 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 11 4 2 Serial Connection 4 2 5 Connection Diagram 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The following diagram shows the connection between the The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or GOT and the PLC less b GOT side connector RS 232 cable For the GOT side connector refer to the following 1 Connection diagram 297 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications FUJI PLC side connector RS232 connection diagram 1 d Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC For GT16 GT15 GOT side side module D sub 9 pin PLC side For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual CD 4 RS RD RXD 2 SD SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 6 DR SG 7 SG DR DSR 20 ER RS RTS 8 CD CS CTS 5 cs 1 FG For GT12 GT11 GOT side D sub
151. GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 0 18 IP Label Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Download Port No 5014 GOT Communication Port No 5017 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout 3 Delay Time x10ms Item Description Range GOT NET No 2 No of the GOT 1 to 239 2 Set the station No of the GOT GOT PLC No Default 1 1 to 64 GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default gateway where the 5 00000 Default Gateway for connection via 255 255 255 255 Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Ethernet Set the GOT port No for Ethernet 5014 to 65534 Download download Except for 5011 Port No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 GOT Set the GOT port No for the eg n Moto connection with the connected Communication Except for 5011 Port No equipment Default 5017 5012 5013 and 49153 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the com
152. GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 0 m Connecting terminating resistors 2 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No Signal PF900 901 B400 SEN FB400 500 900 THV A18 RS 422 900 400 401 MA901 7 Specifications HA900 901 SG 25 25 44 3 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 5 T B 27 27 46 4 4 R A 28 28 47 1 1 R B 29 29 48 2 2 3 following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector ae Modular connector pin No FAAARA E e000 esc 64 E iN Esc 3 R B 2 1 7 9 28 RS422 connection diagram 6 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector RDA 4 RDB 5 1 1 SDA 2 1 1 SDB gt 1 R A sc i SG d Boe eet ea le Fea EN di 6 SG 1 Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of 52 the 5 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 4 wire type 2Pair Terminating resistor 330Q gt 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual gt User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RS422 connection diagram 7 GOT side RDA RDB SDA SDB SG RKC temperatur
153. HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO For the RS 422 connection 2778132188 2 818518181 22181818188 1188818181 EJCTSISISISISTS FERREE HEAQAQAAAAAAE CEREREA i Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Communication Cable model PLC 5 Connection diagram Max distance Option device Model number IC200UAL004 RS422 connection preparing z GT IC200UAL005 1200 Built into GOT IC200UAL006 IC200UAA007 1200 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 2000 028 IC200UDD110 42 IC200UDD120 GT15 RS2T4 9P IC200UDD212 RS 422 SW IC200UDRO005 RS422 connection IC200UDR006 diagram 6 1200m GT15 RS4 9S IC200UDR010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 3 255 2 IC200UDR164 Built into GOT IC200UDR064 11 8 1 2 Including the cable length of the option devices Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and 155 1 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration Number of connectable equipment Up to 8 PLCs for 1 GOT 11 3
154. Holdi ist E MWO to MW65534 Decimal MW Bit device word 2 Converting bit devices into word 1 Only reading is possible 2 Thisis not supported by GT10 3 For CP 317 the bit access of word device MW is enabled for reading only 6 34 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set ONIMOLINOW S3l IHOVLIH Old IHOVLIH Old Irn 11041 09 VMVYSVA Old VMV9OMOA 0211700 303 OL NOILOANNOO OL NOILOANNOO OL NOILOANNOO 3univsdWal OL NOILOANNOO 01 NOLLO3NNOO AUNLVYAdWAL 3 OL NOLLO3NNOO OL NOLLO3NNOO N 7 22 ier 1 1 YOKOGAWA PLC me en nd E EE 7 3 Ethernet Connection Connectable Model List 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 2 Serial 7 1 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 1 The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Type Connectable Model List 748 6141 Serial oy 050 GT4 20 1030 Refer to FA M3 F3SP05 F3SP08 F3SP10 F3SP20 F3SP30 F3FP36 F3SP21 F3SP22 0S F3SP25 F3SP35 F3SP28 F3SP38 F3SP53 F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66
155. MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi Ltd FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation ALLEN BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation Control equipment Generic term for control equipment manufactured by each corporation CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD GOT
156. Model Commun Cable model Cable model clum connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model equipment S Type number number PF900 400 Built into GOT 401 User Up to 1 temperature 85 232 5232 15 ice connection diagram 4 controller for HA901 900 GT15 RS2 9P o MA901 gt U Use a ea RS422 e RS422 1000m Built into GOT PF900 connection diagram 4 connection diagram 1 m PF901 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 5 8 e HA400 Of n 2 401 se GT15 RS2T4 9P Up to 31 temperature HA900 RS 422 esti 85485 1000 GT15 RS4 9S controllers for 1 901 8 85485 connection diagram 5 E 900 connection diagram 4 Built into GOT GT 500 eB da Use RS485 E 1000 GT14 RS2T4 9P use connection diagram 7 E es E 5589485 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT 8 9 400 FA LTBGTRACBLOS 0 5 1 401 22585485 connection diagram 6 FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1 1 9 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2 1 901 m Up to 31 temperature E magoo 18 485 fii RS485 connection diagram 7 ee eli controllers for1GOT 83 901 85288485 connection diagram 14 Built into GOT E AG500 o i RMC500 SA100 G RS485 connection diagram 11 GT14 RS2T4 9P4 O0 SA200 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact z MITSU
157. NC 3 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2 2 SDB2 TXD2 7 T NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 x T RDA1 RXD1 10 RDB2 RXD2 11 5 RDB1 RXD1 12 Ez NC 13 RSA RTS 14 E NC 15 RSB RTS 16 E NC 17 CSA CTS 18 NC 19 E CSB CTS 20 x 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 5 Temperature Temperature GOT side Pn controller side lt z controller side SDA1 TXD1 1 Li Li ea SDB1 TXD1 2 T m EX RDA1 RXD1 3 Ez em m gl RDB1 RXD1 4 X Pd SDA2 TXD2 5 Ls E SDB2 TXD2 6 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2 2 RDA2 RXD2 7 i RDB2 RXD2 RSA RTS 9 ey RSB RTS 10 E CSA CTS 11 E CSB CTS 12 E SG 13 d NC 14 E E Shell TRE
158. NOLLO3NNOO 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Connectable Model List E Serial GT 1045 120 1035 Refer to Type LQP510 RS 232 S10V en RS 422 227321 LQP800 LQP000 S10mini LQP010 O dapes 3 2 2 LQP011 LQP120 3 2 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 1 Connectable Model List 3 2 System Configuration 3 2 1 Connecting to S10V PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Communication driver j HITACHI S10mini S10V Connection cable z 5 25 5 Connection cable GOT Number of Model Communication ee Cable model Max ORCA Gece He connectable name module Connection diagram number distance P equipment Type o GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m 16 KO 14 5 o GB EB 58 LQE560 RS 232 15m 912 65508232 connection diagram 2 1 GT15 RS2 9P GE 8 869422 connection diagram s nem 500m Built into GOT 4 GOT for 1 LQP510 1 pas communication GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m module GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m gt LQE565 RS 422 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m T 9 or GT15 RS4 9S za un Gs RS
159. No 559 When connecting two or more GOTs the Ethernet 555 network set each PLC No to the GOT 8 8 3 14 3 3 mEthernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using em multiple GOTs 5 8 communication error may occur on the GOT with the o 0 IP address p 2 245 When setting IP address aS Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system not monitor the controller correctly with 5 the above numbers Do Consult with the administrator of the network before im setting an IP address to the GOT and controller 88 When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC be reduced 5 lt di The following actions may improve the communication o performance 8 2 Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT E When monitoring a nonexistent or turned off Szi station 2 If a time out occurs with the initial communication by 8 monitoring nonexistent or turned off station the time 8 out can delay the communication with the normally 2 operating station Timing to start GOT communication After the PLC starts up start the GOT communication When the GOT starts communication before the PL
160. PLC 10 2 Serial Connection For MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU it is supported in the series C and later 10 5 RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER gt a lt nd 5 I lt n CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 10 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to Control Compact FlexLogix Series Connection cable Communication driver Control CompactLogix Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 PLC PLC Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max i tion devi Model Serios ation Type Connection diagram number distance option device SE 1747 CP3 1756 CP3 Built i Control Compact Built into GOT RS 232 or 15m FlexLogix 55 RS232 connection diagram 4 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 10 6 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 4 Connection Diagram
161. Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS Code BIN Node Name Any string 6 28 6 3 Ethernet Connection When even one of those switches is on the PLC may not normally operate 2 When the PLC is started with the TEST switch on the module starts the self diagnosis and may not perform the communication Turn off the switch before the communication is started 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC Sequence program To communicate the CP 9200SH series CP 312 series or CP 317 series with GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive messages is required When multiple GOTs are connected to the CP 9200SH series CP 312 series or CP 317 series ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required ladder program to receive massages FSCAN L ONCOIL 1 000 58000003 5 000004 H 1 0002 IFON 2 0003 FOR 00000 to 00031 3 0007 F 00000 2 0009 FEND 2 0010 H 00003 2 0012 00000 2 0014 2 0015 2 0016 H 16500 2 0018 H 16500 2 0020 18499 1 0022 IEND by 00001 DWOO000 001 2 1044 DW 002 DWO00002 002 DW 008 DWOO0008 003 DW 009 2901000009 004 DW 010 22010000010 005 DW 011 gt 0 00011 006 DW 012 2DW00012 007 DW 013 gt Dw00013 008 Continued to next page 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 29 6 3 Ethernet Connection O CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 0023 MSG RCV RECEIVE MESSAGE function standard system
162. RS 232 MicroLogix1200 1762 L24BWA RS 232 MicroLogix1400 1766 L32AWA RS 232 MicroLogix1500 1764 LSP RS 232 57 10 2 2 ControlLogix 10 2 1756 L 1756 L1M1 1756 L1M2 1756 L1M3 1756 L61 1756 L62 1756 L63 1756 L55M12 1756 L55M13 1756 L55M14 1756 L55M16 1756 L55M22 1756 L55M23 1756 L55M24 RS 232 Ethernet 37 10 2 3 37 10 3 1 1756 1725 10 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Ethernet 10 1 Connectable Model List O O 7 37 10 3 1 Communicati Series Modelname Clock on Dye Refer to 1769 L31 1769 L32E CompactLogix 1769 L32C x E hos 1769 L35E 1769 L35CR 1794 1133 FlexLogix TET x RS 232 x gt 10 2 3 1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBDE 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 10 1 Connectable Model List gt E lt 3 m l lt 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to SLC500 Series When connecting to one PLC Communication driver Communication driver SLC500 AB 1 SLC500 For 6716 6715 6714 6712 6711 For GT10 Connection cable
163. RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 3 Including the cable length of the option devices 11 4 11 11 2 System Configuration Number of connectable equipment 8 PLCs for 1 GOT For the RS 422 connection connecting to the Power Supplies PLC Connection cable GOT Commu Cable model Max Power Supplies Model name nication Connection diagram di ncs Option device Model Type number U RS422 1200m Built into GOT connection diagram 2 IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 1200m 2 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 RS 422 GT415 RS2T4 9P Sm ICG93PWR332 1 693 367 RS422 GT15 RS4 98 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT G U 5422 1200 Built into GOT connection diagram 2 IC693PWR321 1200m GT16 CO2R4 9S 0 2m IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 RS 422 GT415 RS2T4 9P SW IC693PWR332 RS422 GT15 RS4 98 IC693PWR328 connection diagram 5 1200m For the RS 422 connection connecting to the PLC Power Supplies IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693PWR331 IC693PWR332 IC693PWR328 1 Product manufactured GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 2 Including the cable length of the option devices to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 9 Connecti PLC Model n
164. RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 5 Touse the dedicated cable conversion of the cable may be necessary 6 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 7 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 6 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 2 Connecting to H PCP A or When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Tm ra B tr Fra gt 20 9 LO ro Connection cable E Modular i connector 1 gm z ex 59 94 Temperature controller Connection cable 4 Number of B 6 Qr Model Communication Cable model Max mm m connectable Connection diagram number distance P equipment W BF 28 0500 0 5m W BF 28 1000 1m Built into GOT W BF 28 3000 3m or Serial s i Us RS232 connection _ GT15 RS2 9P GE fm z 9 16 15 zo RS 232 diagram 1 o u o 1 m 2 Built into GOT p W BF 02 1000 1m 15m FAX067 Upto 1 8 H PCP A W BF 02 3000 3m temp
165. RXD1 3 rg rg RDA RDA RDB1 RXD1 4 ra ta ta Fg SG 1 1 i 1 1 i SDA2 TXD2 5 Wi SG Qo JJl SDB2 TXD2 6 1 ji eg 4 z RSA RTS 9 4 Oo RSB RTS 10 H T CSA CTS 11 Q CSB CTS 12 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 8 NC 14 Shell e 2 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table 9 Lr Model of temperature controller 9 UTAdvanced Series ZO GREEN z amp Series GREEN UT35A UT55A product Signal name Series UT55A product condition B UT UP UM US condition A UP55A product product condition A condition B Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 5 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 m RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 Ug SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 o 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS 5 A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire UT55A type Product with two RS 485 communication 5 25 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without E the power supply for 24 sensor gt 5 Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communicatio
166. SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RDA1 RXD1 RDB1 RXD1 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 N Q 3 controller RXt 11 E 1 3 A RX RX ii ma 2 5 Ta 5 RX TX hat x drm T 4 TX 4 6 m r 6 TX 13 2 r3 2 SG U RE iE ree ss 1 10 83 11 12 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W 1 5 6 7 8 14 Shell Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal C37 m Connecting terminating resistors Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 16 RS232C RS485 interface converter ee erate Temperature controller pp 2 _ Temperature controller ud ren RDA 3 m ra 6 E 6 TX 11 11 vt RDB 4 4 r3 4 TX tt RX 1 SDB 2 m 3 RX SDA 1 s Pe mr 5 RX i 1 i 1 SG 1 1 i SG 5 r4 2 2 5 GND 6 1 Haein begin 8 3 Terminating resistor 220Q 1 AW 1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 2 Turm on the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 3 Connect FG
167. Select the channel to be used from the list menu Specify the stop bit length for z2 Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed 3 Set the following items Default 154 Of Manufacturer YASKAWA Specify whether or not to perform a i i arity check and how it is performed Controller Type Set either of the following Parity tale 42 Even fixed 3 GL PROGIC8 Default Even E CP9200SH MP900 series zur Set the number of retries to be o B ul CP9200 H Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times 5 2 CP9300MS MC compatible error occurs 2 E MP2000 MP900 eee SES MP2000 MP900 CP9200SH series pared 4 bn 2 startup unti starts the Startup to 30 Ur Interface to be used MIT communication with the PLC CPU Driver Set either of the following Default 3sec For GT16 6715 or GT11 gt Set the time period for a 5 YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec lt lt GT10 gt Default 3sec m 5 YASKAWA MP Specify the host address station No 5 T of the PLC to which the GOT is ox 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Host Address connected in the network of the 1 to 31 Controller Type I F and Driver are set GOT Make the settings according to the usage environment Default 1 oe T Set this item to adjust the a gt 6 2 8 Communication detail set
168. System Configuration 0 5 2 1 Connecting to PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 or PXR9 OU TZ 558 When connecting via the RS 232 communication OZ foe ae Communication driver pez Ce Connection cable 2 Oo S i E Connection cable 1 Temperat o ure Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller 59 Cable model Commun Cable model 5e Model Model re 7 equipment Connection diagram Connection diagram Option device Model zo name distance name distance gt lt number Type number E OT 08795485 500m 77 1 RS 232 89232 connection 45m 1 diagram 1 dl GT15 RS2 9P 2 p Built into GOT mod E PXR4 02785485 500m 1 30 RS 232 9 5232 connection 45m cm Gm temperature 99 PXR5 ion di P i controllers za connection diagram 2 diagram 2 5 Us RS485 500m kKs 485 3 RS 232 9232 connection 45m connection diagram 3 diagram 2 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO LTD For details of the product contact SYSMEXRA CO LTD 52 Product manufactured by LINEEYE CO LTD For details of the product contact LINEEYE CO LTD 3 Product manufactured by System
169. TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 15 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 8 GOT side Temperature controller minating resistor 2200 1 4W 2 4 Temperature controller Fg SDB Di a SDA1 TXD1 1 1 1 1 0 5 1 1 E sq SDB SDB1 TXD1 2 Wt gt i e SDA RDA1 RXD1 ra ba RDB N RDB RDB1 RXD1 4 i He RDA ri RDA SG 13 SG SDA2 TXD2 5 Mateo eee ad SG lee Jf SDB2 TXD2 6 4 4 c RSA RTS 9 RSB RTS 10 CSA CTS 11 CSB CTS 12 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 8 NC 14 Shell 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal GREEN Series GREEN Series BAS UT UP UM US Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 RDB 25 23 RDA 26 24 SG 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal c Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 9 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller M RSB SDA1 TXD1 SDB1 TXD1 RSB RSA
170. With CH3 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 UP55A terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two RS485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model Product with the RS485 communication port With C4 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 12 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 2 RS232C RS485 interface converter Temperature controller Temperature controller BH 1 li 4 P BERE RSB E34 Fog ma 3 T T T RSA SG 56 ii 5 E L3 SG 6 GND Vote mL ed MEN E 4 4 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series pato s UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 SG 30 5 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor sho
171. adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 2 wire type 1Pair Terminating resistor 1100 2 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 37 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RS485 connection diagram 14 Temperature Temperature RS485 connection diagram 13 RKC temperature controller side Modular connector TIR A NC NC GOT side SDA 1 SDB 6 RDA 2 RDB 7 SG 5 RSA 3 CSA 4 RSB 8 CSB 9 4 SG SG Set the terminating resistor selector to 110 0 KE m Connecting terminating resistors For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller Temperature Temperature n 1 GOT side controller 4 controller controller _ 5 controller ya Ty se SDA 1 e gt TIR B TRB TR B T R B 1 1 1 SDB 6 TIRA TIR A 3 N NE TIR A TRA 1 1 1 1 RDA 2 Fa SG SG Lo Lo SG SG 1 1 1 1 RDB 7 22200 S SG 5 Combination module Combination module pol i 8 gt 3 E 4 RSB 8 Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W CSB 9 More than 1000 in cas
172. all contents in the project folder Initialize SRAM user area when writing project data OS GOT Write Communication Configuration Info Reception Close 1 Select Communication Read from GOT from the menu 2 The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 The GOT Read tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Drive information radio button of the Read Data 4 Click the Info Reception button 5 Confirm that the project data and OS are written correctly onto the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 17 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection The following shows the option devices to connect in the respective connection type For the specifications usage and connecting procedure on option devices refer to the respective device manual 1 31 Communication module Product name Model Specifications GT15 QBUS For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 1ch unit standard mode For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series GT15 QBUS2 Q Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode GT15 ABUS For AIQNACPU motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit
173. avoided if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced Replacing consumable parts such as the battery backlight and fuses Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued CON ou gt 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special da
174. be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 gt GTO Users Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 9 38 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 4 GOT Side Settings 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting YOKOGAWA temperature controller For details of RKC temperature controller refer to the following manual gt Users Manual of the RKC temperature controller Model name Refer to H PCP J 9 5 1 H PCP A H PCP B 9 5 2 Z TIO module Z DIO module 9 5 3 Z CT module Z COM module 9 5 4 CB Series 9 5 5 FB Series 9 5 6 RB Series 9 5 7 Temperature controller PF900 901 958 HA400 401 HA900 901 9 5 9 AG500 9 5 10 RMC500 9 5 11 MA900 MA901 9 5 12 THV A1 9 5 13 SA100 SA200 9 5 14 X TIO module 9 5 15 9 5 1 Connecting to H PCP J Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller Item Setting range Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication mode MODBUS Data bit 8bits Parity bit None Stop bit 1bit Unit address OtoF 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the unit address without overlapping with that of other units 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPE
175. built into GOT 8 m 9 lt 0 zou Oz CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 15 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 6 Connecting to RB Series 100 400 RB500 RB700 900 When using the converter Communication driver Com RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 5224 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature 3 Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model Model Communication Cable model piena Model name Connection odi Connection Option device Model equipment 7 distance name Type distance diagram number diagram number RB100 Up to 31 RB400 y ea RS485 2 RS232 Built into GOT temperature 500 connection 1200m CD485 V 232 connection 15m ae BIS diagram 8 diagram 3 COT RB900 GT15 RS2 9P Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd When connecting directly Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT cm vj T Number
176. communication 4 5 5 wire type 2 wire type Standard code gt 5 model Product with the RS 485 communication E With CH3 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in he E3 terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model D Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard 5 5 code model Es 5 B Product with the RS 485 communication 5 o With ICA port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in lt 4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal zu 37 Connecting terminating resistors Ox 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 5 2 29 QO gt a 5 lt 9 x e gt o gt eo mE OTO 0 2 ZOE 2 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 24 Temperature Temperature GOT side IERI 2 controler _____________ 2 controller pog tt RDA1 RXD1 10 l B sme x i SDB 1 tt
177. connection diagram 6 3 PLC side GOT side terminal block a a EEE AE f RDA 2 k Li SDA lag 7 n SDB ry P SDA 1 NT ry 08 6 Li ity RDB ry loq SG 5 Li 4 SG ry Tap U 9 RSA 3 vb eI FG 4 RSB 8 CSB 9 1 Turn ON the terminating switch of a interface converter which will be a terminal 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal en Connecting terminating resistors 8 sure to pull the cable shield line into inside the connector cover and treat the line end for obtaining shield effect e 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 15 4 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be within the maximum distance b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 5 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications c FUJI PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI PLC side module For details refer to the user s FUJI PLC manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 Q For the procedure to set the terminating resistor referFo
178. connection din Built into GRR T 10 daem 3 Bus Shows GT11 BUS Shows GT11 SERIAL 10 Shows GT10 Shows GT105L1 GT104 5 3 Side Settings 5 3 1 Setting communication Shows GT1020 GT1030 input power supply 5V interface Communication settings 1 Bus Q 5 3 2 Communication detail settings i a a Indicates the operation steps Property Value Number of Stages 1 Slot No 0 Monitor Speed Normal Set the channel of the cc inected equipment Indicates the setting items displayed on the software and GOT screen Description Range Stage No Default 1 717 Fading niowaion Slot No Default 0 0to9 FER Monitor Default Normal High Normal Low Basset 22 Montr Spend 2 IPOINT Refers to the information required Property Value 4 Number of Stages 1 Slot No 0 aint Refers to information useful for operation 17 Select Common Controller Setting from the tem Ranga monu Stage No Default 1 1107 fault Slot No 0 0to7 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu POINTA 3 Select the following Manufacturer Mitsubishi Controller Type Set according to the Controller Type to be connected 1 C
179. current A 1 74 0 77 0 33 0 33 0 224 0 12 1 774 2 lt Since the calculated value exceeds the capacity of the GOT such configuration is not allowed SE When using bus connection unit The installation position varies depending the bus connection unit to be used 1 Wide bus units GT15 75QBUS 2 L GT15 75ABUS 2 L GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 US Install a bus connection unit in the 1st stage of the extension interface If a bus connection unit is installed in the 2nd stage or above the unit cannot be used SIE Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units lt Serial communication unit Bus connection unit 6 Ss ga Serial communication unit E eS TE Sed SHS 29 Oa Bs 2 Og eo 55 52 29 2 oo gt B ez SEE 523 gob S98 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 21 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Cautions for using GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 The stage number of communication units installed on the next stage of GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 recognized by the GOT differently depending on the extension interface position For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side even if the communication unit is physically installed in the 2nd stage position the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage Recognized as the 3rd stage of extend interf
180. diagram 14 x ser H man RS485 connection 1200m GT14 RS2T4 9P2 diagram 11 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 12 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 5 Connecting to FB series 100 FB400 or 900 When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS Tm ra B tr Fra gt 20 9 LO ro ez 2 59 94 Connection cable zz Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of Model Communication Cable model Max Riedel connectable name Type Connection diagram number distance p equipment O GT GT z ilt i Up to 1 temperature 2 FB400 RS 232 1 232 connection diagram 45m Urey 5 900 4 for 1 GOT Zu GT15 RS2 9P 1 Use communication 1 for the communication format Az When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter 7 GE a 2a z oi zm 6 70 Connection cable 3 olelv a
181. for SICK and the device representation of GT Designer3 are different Set the device by referring to the following table Device m GT Designer3 1 1 1 12 Module number A 1 8 Input position Engineering software for SICK 1 A A A I O model name such as XTIO LIEI 1 12 Dec Module number A 1 8 Input position A A A A LILTI QA QDID A A A A A O model name ILI 1 12 Dec Module number such as XTIO 1 8 Output position LILI 1 12 Dec Module number A 1 8 Output position Description n LQ T A AA LA Set the device name device number and bit number La 0 3 Byt b A A Result Device The bit number can be set only by specifying the bit of 5 E i ies kd L1 0 3 Byte number word device A 0 7 Bit position 0 7 Bit position Displays the device type and its setting range selected in A A A A 0 Device A A A A CPU type CPUO CPU1 LI L1 0 3 Byte number A 0 7 Bit iti 0 3 Byte number 7 Bit position POINT 0 7 Bit position 0 EFIO L1 B EIODA A A A A O EFIO LT1 ByteA 4 2 EFI b A A CPU type CPUO CPU1 1 Device settings of SICK Safety controller kii co EFinumbsr 4 2 EFI number L1 1 3 Device number a Input I Output Q 1 3 Device number A 0 3 Byte number 0
182. functions ONCOIL EXECUTE BUSY DB 210 0024 5 000004 FOUT 08000210 009 ONCOIL ABORT COMPLETE DB 211 0026 5 000004 FOUT 08000211 010 4 1039 DEV TYP ERROR DB 212 0028 00006 F FOUT 08000212 011 4 1041 0029 00001 Fl CIR NO 0030 00001 lt CH NO 0031 00003 lt F PARAM 0032 DA00000 DB 211 0039 08000211 4 1036 DW 024 0040 INC 0 00024 DB 212 0041 08000212 a i 4 1038 0042 DW 025 0043 INC Dwo00025 DW 000 DW 026 0044 DW00000 DWO0026 014 4 1008 DW 001 DW 027 0046 DW00001 gt Dw00027 016 0048 IEND 0049 DEND 1 Set0 to PARAMOSG to 11 of 6 input relay input register coil holding register offset Do not make the offset settings When the offset is needed set Option Offset to each object or make a setting added the offset value to the device 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 5 Precautions When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting PLC No When connecting two more in the Ethernet network set each PLC No to the GOT 3 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used
183. gt 1 4 RX RX SDB1 2 i 5 s RX 552 E rf me 11 x 1 4 TX 1 1 1 1 a 1 4 r 6 6 i 1 i 1 SG i 1 i 1 x gt 5 9 T3 2 i i 2 SG D SDA2 5 PEERS wey SDB2 6 is RDA2 7 Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2Wy RDB2 10 o i Oz 1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 5 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 5 lt m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 19 RS232C RS485 T 4 S interface converter _______ emperature controller PE QE mm Temperature controller 93 ie RDA 1 E ld c SDA 1 T3 2 i RDA zo boa tt k 2 lt SDB 2 2 T i TH RDB E 11 SDAQ E Li Oz RDA 3 1 1 10g tt SDA 1 SDB 4 RDB 4 1 7 T SDB bor a SG 1 1 SG 5 E 1 r1 SG Wa ta GND 6 4 t T aaa L E 4 4 gt Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W 9 Li 2 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table m 25 Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series i UT35A m
184. icati ommunicaton GE fixed TCP fixed format Set the slot No of the PLC to which Slot No the Ethernet module is connected 01016 Default blank 1 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 3 7 m Communication detail settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GTO User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 Setting IP address and port No The same address cannot be set for the same port No The same address be set for the different port No 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 3 PLC side setting ALLEN BRADLEY PLC For details of ALLEN BRADLEY PLOs refer to the following manuals 237 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s Manual Parameter setting Set the following parameters with the software package manufactured by the Allen Bradley Item Setting details Name Sets the name IP Address IP address of the connected module Slots No for installing the EtherNet IP communication Slot module 1 For the address make the same
185. into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Plug the QnA ACPU Motion controller A series bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly connect the battery connector Do not charge disassemble heat short circuit solder or throw the battery into the fire Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat explode or igni
186. is set to 0 communication is not made 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Data bit configuration Data bit configuration 11 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8 1 8bit None 1bit 8 2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Device address 1 Slave address 1 110994 Interval 3 Communication 2 Item Communication speed 27 0 to 250 ms Setting range 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 0 8 None 1 1 8 None 2 2 8 Even 1 3 8 2 4 8 1 5 8 2 3 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the RB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following Data bit configuration 27 Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8 1 8bit None 1bit 8 2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Device address 2 Slave address 2 1 to 99 4 Interval time 0 to 250 ms gt RB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 5 8 Connecting to PF900 900 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 1 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps
187. is used 10BASE T 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE T 2 5 standard use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps 100Mbps mixed environment For how to check the function version refer to the following s GT16 User s Manual b GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE 6 The connectable EtherNet IP communication module differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 1756 ENET 10Mbps 1756 ENBT 10 100Mbps ControlLogix5570 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 13 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 14 7 The number of the connectable for 1 PLC differs depending on the PLC series ControlLogix5550 5555 5560 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs be connected to 1 GOT lt For GT16 GT14 gt TCP 128 or less lt For GT15 gt TCP 10 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC TCP 64 or l
188. multimedia unit When a communication unit is installed on any of the units above the stage number of the communication unit recognized by the GOT varies according to the extension interface For communication units installed in the extension interface 2 side even if the communication unit is physically installed in the 2nd stage position the GOT recognizes the position as the 1st stage oS Recognized as the 2nd stage Se of extension interface 2 Recognized as the 1st stage of extension interface 2 Video RGB input unit Relay connector When using CF card unit or CF card extension unit Install the CF card unit or CF card extension unit on the extension interface at the last The following figures show how to install the CF card unit CF card unit Serial communication Lx lt unit 55 Serial communication unit KS lt gt 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection To connect the GOT to a device in the respective connection type connection cables between the GOT and a device are necessary For cables needed for each connection refer to each chapter for connection x KZ ra TO WE 95 5 1 4 1 connector specifications
189. o lt vo amp A F l S l Q 9 9 9 bogli 561 5691 21 91 07 07 amp 25 amp 2 lt lt 5 gt IO gt IO gt JO gt Hexadecimal CO A8 FA D2 t t Decimal 192 168 250 210 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 19 7 3 Ethernet Connection PREPARATORY CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC o Zz YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 fa lt lt 9 v 9 gt 2 Condition setting switch Set the data format write protection line processing at TCP timeout error or operation mode with the DIP switch on the side of the base unit EN Description Set value No Data 1 OFF ASCII code Writ 2 ni OFF not protect protect ON not available OFF always Reserved omn me m oa EON oO BR Line processing 7 on TCP OFF close the line timeout Operation mode 8 OFF normal operation 1 Applicable to only 01 5 7 20 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 5 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE12 OT
190. of connectable P Model name in Option device Model equipment Type Connection diagram number distance Use pus RS485 connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 5 FA LTBGTR4CBL05 0 5m ser i 1200 FA LTBGTRACBL10 1m RB100 diagram 6 4 RB400 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m Up to 31 temperature RB500 RS 485 User i wes RS485 connection 1200 GT15 RS4 TE controllers for 1 GOT RB700 diagram 7 RB900 User x RS485 connection 1200 Built into GOT diagram 14 Gser RS485 i pan Se conocer 1200m GT14 RS2T4 9P2 diagram 11 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 16 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 7 Connection to PF900 901 HA400 401 HA900 901 500 MA900 901 500 SA100 200 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Communication driver ra E tr ou zx 9 52 ae Loom RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Py 2 59 On ups z 2 B59 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 p 55 55 im Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Mes umber o
191. on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller ification mpatible 15 range 100 GD10 101 GD11 102 GD12 103 GD13 104 GD14 105 GD15 106 GD16 107 GD17 For the setting other than the above 108 GD18 error dedicated device is out of 109 GD19 range will occur 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 8 36 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 6 Device Range that Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Siened 16 gt YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UT Advanced x Device Information Kind WORD Range Device 0001 9000 CPU No 12 CPU No 1 Network Selection Station No 1 Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be s
192. reading is possible 12 11 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC qa xe gt i oL gt Zo CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 12 12 12 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 1 3 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY amp CONTROLLER amp e Q 6 Q 5 Q 4 ctl 2 28 13 1 Connectable Model 2 2 13 2 System Configuration 13 2 295 13 3 Connection Diagram 13 3 52 13 4 GOT Side 5 13 4 13 5 PLC Side 5 13 5 13 6 Device Range That Be 13 6 z ns bu 52 0 Sc zai em Lc T SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models 4 Communication GT GT FX3 CPU000000 Flexi Soft FX3 CPU130002 x FX3 CPU320002 13 2 System Configuration 13 2 1 Conn
193. ri T W SDB SDB1 TXD1 8 4 NT Lt _ SDA SG 2 id RDB i ia RDB SDA2 TXD2 5 ra N RDA 1 b RDA 1 1 1 1 SDB2 TXD2 7 m SG SG 1 1 1 1 RDA1 RXD1 10 2 MEME RDB1 RXD1 12 1 1 RSA RTS 14 at PE RSB RTS 16 4 CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 1 3 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series Soros GREEN Signal name Series iti 9 UT UP UT32A UP35A UT55A product condition A pe ene ie is a UT75A UM UP55A product condition A SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A ype Product with two RS 485 communication B 1or2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 com
194. setting as that of each Ethernet module set on GT Designer3 Do not set the same IP Address as those of GOT and controller on the Ethernet network For the address setting on GT Designer3 refer to the following 11 3 2 Communication detail settings 10 3 4 Precautions When setting IP address Do not use 0 and 255 at the end of an IP address Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to multiple GOTs 1 Setting PLC No When connecting two or more GOTs in the Ethernet network set each PLC No to the GOT 5 10 3 2 mEthernet setting 2 Setting IP address Do not use the IP address 192 168 0 18 when using multiple GOTs A communication error may occur on the GOT with the IP address When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 10 17 10 3 Ethernet Connection RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER gt fe Ed ae m z r zl lt
195. speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following gt 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps 1 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown 7 2 11 Connecting to STARDOM 2 Data format setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum ur consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT Make the communication settings as shown below For Eo side details of the communication settings refer to the following 0 9 For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following manual 757 7 2 5 Communication detail settings gt Peripheral Software Manual for YOKOGAWA ij 92 aos Switch No Description Settings 1 Data bit OFF 7bits POINT E on 2 pe Connection between STARDOM and the PC for 5 Parity 22 communication settings 3 For the communication settings of STARDOM 2 ER 4 STARDOM and the PC for communication settings QE EX 4 Stop bit 2 must be connected to Ethernet using the Resource ENS Uem Configurator peripheral software ON done 5 Checksum OFF none End character OFF none COM port setting specification Make the settings on the FCX Maintenance Page for 7 Protect function OFF disabled STARDOM
196. station No of the PLC to which the GOT is connected in the Host Address network of the GOT 1 to 31 Default 1 Set this item to adjust the transmission Delay Time timing of the communication request from 0 to 30 the GOT 10ms Default Oms 1 the steps to store two words 32 bit LH Order HL Order Auto 6 16 Default Auto 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 9 PLC Side Settings 1 Delay P z ela Ime es Ero dL POINT When connecting to PLC CP 9200 H LN 9300 5 set the following ez YASKAWA PLC Ero Monenamg 2 For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following CP 9200 H 30ms or more manuals ort 0 10ms or more CP 9300MS E 22 YASKAWA PLC user s Manual 5 port 1 30ms or more H mn lt m 2 Communication interface setting by the Utility og The communication interface setting can be Communication and port settings Ge em 20 changed ine ous Communication setting Make the communication and port settings with a ae after writing Communication Settings of project peripheral tool data For details on the Utility refer to the following SENS manual lt CTO User s Address 1 to 31 Sers anua n Protocol MEMOBUS 5 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the
197. switch gu 1 Communication settings Ed Make the communication settings of the temperature Y controller Be Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps gt icati Unit address setting switch Communication protocol MODBUS B Data bit 8bits Parity None 2 S Data bit 8bits Parity Even m Data bit configuration z Data bit 8bits Parity Odd 6 9 WE ota Stop bit 1bit fixed Unit address OtoF Setting range 0 to F Interval time 0 to 250ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Z 2 Select the module address without overlapping with that of o other units 5 Za 2 Setting DIP switches om Make the settings of transmission speed data bit Oe configuration communication protocol ULL UL LL Dip switch 2 m9 2 gt lt oe 2 T ca SUN 1 Sar K T H 232 Er 920 OFF ON IZ m 8 TI 2 gt m 9 Eu Uoc ZI 2 2 d o o O Ono Front side Right side 2 Switch position ZO Setting item Set value On 1 2 9 4 5 6 5 2 9600bps ON OFF Communication ow 19200b OFF ON D speed p 38400bps ON ON one bit 8bits OFF OFF Parity None E lt ETT bie 8bits on a configuration Parity Even Ow Data bit 8bits Uto Parity
198. temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the z terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 5 4 For the terminal number for connecting to FB series or RB series refer to the table below p 3 z Terminal No Signal 2 110 CB100 CB400 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 2 CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 M T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 e T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 z 9 o a fal one Terminal No Is amp Signal 900 HA400 401 400 2 5 name PF901 HA900 901 M 900 RMcs00 x TIO 3 100 200 SB1 RS 485 2 5 901 pate 500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 ne lt Ono 2 5 lt pu On 2 zu zz On Z ocu on 210 FOE 05 ug QSZ OIE n ul g PE 58 65 oz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 33 9 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 8 Interface converter side CD 485V D D FG 2 Lt 11 TRA 3 A Combination module 1 3 3 3
199. term after manufacturing shall be forty two 42 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The customer shall be responsible for the primary failure diagnosis unless otherwise specified requested by the customer Mitsubishi Electric Corporation its representative firm may carry out the primary failure diagnosis at the customer s expence The primary failure diagnosis will however be free of charge should the cause of failure be attributable to Mitsubishi Electric Corporation 2 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 3 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided Failure that could have been
200. the clamp B Clamp and external conductor Cable in use B 3C 2V 6mm 3mm 5C 2V 5C 2V CCY 7mm 5mm Solder here 4 Solder the contact to the internal conductor 5 Insert the connector assembly shown in 4 into the plug shell and screw the nut into the plug shell Precautions for soldering Note the following precautions when soldering the internal conductor and contact Make sure that the solder does not bead up at the soldered section Make sure there are no gaps between the connector and cable insulator or they do not cut into each other Perform soldering quickly so the insulation material does not become deformed 1 30 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specifications on the GOT side When setting the terminating resistor in each connection type refer to the following RS 422 485 communication unit Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch Terminating Switch No resistor 1 2 9 100 ON Disable OFF OFF 1 The default setting is Disable For RS422 485 communication unit Terminating resistor setting switch Rear view of RS 422 485 communication unit RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter For details refer to the following 5 1 4 4Setting the RS 232 485 si
201. to 02048 Change the input relay 10001 to 14096 to 11 to 14096 for setting When set in default Only reading is possible 6 4 2 YASKAWA CP9200SH MP900 6 4 3 YASKAWA 9200 1 2 gt Device name Setting range E representation i Coil 000000 to MB32767F Hexadecimal o i Input relay IB MB000000 to MB32767F Hexadecimal 5 Specified bit of the following Word device bit word devices input register holding register t ist 0000 to IW7FFF Hexadecimal 8 gt Holdi ist i Mi MWO to MW32767 Decimal Coil MB MBO to MB32767 Decimal Input relay 2 000 to IBFFF Hexadecimal MB40960 to MB32767F is available for MP 940 only This is not supported by GT10 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Device Device name Setting range a representation Coil OB 000 to OB7FF 9 Hexadecimal Coil OB 000 to IB7FF a 4 Specified bit of the following Word device bit word devices Input register IWOO to IW7F IW Hexadecimal Output register OWOO to o OW gt Data register DWO to DW2047 52 5 DW 20 200 to 202047 Decimal Commonregister MWO to MW7694 MW Bit device word 4 Converting bit devices into word 1 Setting is available only when CP 9200H is used
202. to SIMATIC S7 300 400 14 3 14 2 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 14 4 14 2 3 Gorinection DIagramz aia REPRE 14 5 14 2 4 GOT Side S6etlings uei ci e 14 6 14 2 5 PEG Settirig idee Le e endet ede e e ER ped LUE 14 7 14 2 6 Connecting to HMI 14 7 14 2 7 Connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 7 14 8 14 2 8 PrecautiOnswiv Re dde ii eave die ee ce denas ee e ee eee 14 8 14 3 Etliermet Cohnectlor mto 14 9 14 31 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Ethernet connection type 14 9 14 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 200 300 400 1200 series Ethernet connection type OP m 14 10 14 3 3 Settngs 14 11 14 34 PLEG side settilig uito io Hebe 14 14 14 3 5 JPrecautlons EU E REM RE HR Ee td EE 14 15 14 4 Device Range that Can Be 2 1 0 0 1 001100 nnns asas tern nn 14 16 14 4 4 SIEMENS 57 300 400 14 18 14 4 2 SIEMENS 57 200
203. to multiple PLCs ES 1 dni Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cable Connection cable PLC Cnet I F module GOT 1 2 Number of i connectable Cable model Cnet I F Commu Cable model distance Series Connection ie nication Connection Option device Model equipment diagram number mese Type diagram number 088422 connection 500m Built into GOT diagram 4 31 PLCs for 1 GOT GT16 C02R4 3 GT aom 9S 0 2m GT GT 5263422 GseRs422 Built into GOT The following number E preparing 6741 379072 K300S connection G4L CUEA RS 422 connection of PLCs for 1 GOT diagram 3 diagram 1 500 2 J GT16 GT15 31 GT15 RS2T4 9P GT11 611050 GT GT GT1040 10 GT15 RS4 9S RS422 connection 500 2 Built into GOT 10 PLCs for 1 GOT diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 GT155 12 6 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 3 Connection Diagram
204. two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and with the power supply for 24VDC sensor T 5 gt 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 7 8 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Connection cable Te t Connection cable GOT controller ER umber of connectable d Cable model Max wie equipment Series ication i Option device Model Connection diagram number distance Type GT09 C30R40303 6T 3 Up to 31 t t troll 2 1200 nea UEM D for GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m 2 GT15 RS2T4 9P Up to the following number of GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m GT15 RS4 98 temperature controllers for 1 or 1200m GOT 8 65485 connection diagram 4 ati GT16 GT15 31 Built into GOT st Gul 4 wire type GT11 10 55 9485 connection diagram 23 1200 Built into GOT 4 wire type ue FA LTBGTR4CBLO5 0 5m 19 UT32A 059 85485 connection diagram 24 10 6 1200m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m UT55A 3 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m 19 RS 485 0 75 485 connection diagram 5 1200 GT15 RS4 TE rum 4 wire type 645 UP55A 4 User i i 25 85485 connection diagram 25 4200m Built into GOT Up to 31 temperature controllers 2 wire typ
205. with GOT settings 2 9 2 Select 1 MODBUS 3 When the setting value is 0 communication is not 9 9 5 performed 2 lt S 4 communication speed cannot be set to 2400bps or E 4800bps on the GOT side Select 2 or 3 5 For details on the data bit configuration refer to the following 5 Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 0 8 1 e 1 8 None 2 5 8 2 8 1 25 2 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 47 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 2 DIP switch setting SW3 Set the communication speed and the data bit configuration using the DIP switch SW3 Dip switch SW3 2 9829S8vt cl OFF ON Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 4800bps 9600bps ON OFF 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps ON ON Data bit 8 bits Parity None Stop 2 bits Data bit 8 bits Parity ON None Stop 1 bit Data bit 8 bits Parity Even Stop 1 bit Data bit 8 bits Parity ON ON Odd Stop 1 bit Communication speed OFF OFF OFF Data bit configuration OFF ON 3 DIP switch settings SW4 Set the communication specifications and the termination resistor using the DIP switch SWA Dip switch SW4 ON ON 109 1 OFF Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 Communication RS 422A O
206. with that of other units 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 5 Setthe maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Stop bit 1bit fixed Device address 2 1 to 994 Slave address 2 Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings of the GOT side with the temperature controller settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 53 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 45 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting ra E tr 0 3 Q 9 2 ae ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SYSTEMS PLC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER 9 5 14 Connecting to SA100 SA200 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of t
207. zo Ox 55 E 2 o gt amp ost ZOE 565 0 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 5 6 2 Serial Connection Model name MP 920 connecting to 2171F Communica tion module 2171F Connection cable GOT i bl del Max Option device Model ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Built i 911 St 950 RS 232 83232 connection diagram 1 00 GT15 RS2 9P same as E 8 5 8232 connection diagram 6 above Built into GOT same as m 9509422 connection diagram 2 shave Built into GOT GT GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m eer GT15 RS2T4 i same as 99 65089422 connection diagram 6 above GT15 RS4 9S GT GT 148 12 Built into GOT rs RS 422 05085422 connection diagram pis as Built into GOT 911020 10 Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 communicati on module 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 4 System configuration for connecting to MP 940
208. zu z 94 Model name Refer to PLC CPU 87 200 14 2 7 P 5 Item Description Range HMI Adapter 6ES7 972 0 11 0 0 14 2 6 Set this item when change the 9600bps AA 6ES7 901 3 20 0 0 transmission speed used for 19200bps PC PPI cable 14 2 7 Transmission 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps 14 2 6 Connecting to HMI Adapter 5 Set this item when change the data 5 length used for communication with A uo Data Bit 7bits 8bit T za the connected equipment TOS Communication settings 20 Default The following communication settings are made at the Sg ma SOP communication detail settings of the GOT side Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits For detail fer to the foll Default 1bit or details refer to the following Specify whether or not to perform a Manis 3 14 2 4 MCommunication detail settings E Parit parity check and how it is performed Even a m y during communication Odd Setting item PLC side setting 5 2 Default Even Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps a E A a Specify the adapter address station Data bit Bbits fixed a 2 Fal No of the adapter to which the GOT 21 Adapter Address 15 connected in the connected 0 to 31 Parity bit Odd fixed network Stop bit 1bit fixed Default 0 Adapter address 1 to 31 Spe
209. 0 RS 232 F140S i RS 485 52423 F150S SPH200 MICREX SX SPH300 RS 232 SPH SPH2000 2 RS 485 7424 SPH3000 SPH200 MICREX SX SPH300 x Ethernet O x O x x x 27434 SPH SPH2000 SPH3000 4 2 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 1 Connectable Model List 4 2 Serial Connection oc amp o 4 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX F55 252 565 2 For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following section Y g 4 5 Precautions When using the RS 232 interface card 5 Communication driver z a G T 45 FUJI MICREX F 2 z _ Connection cable Or 2 z PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C Commun Number of connectable 9 Model 3 s interface ication ca 8 mode A Ey Option device Model equipment So name 1 Connection diagram number distance OE card Type OT GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m 55 NVIL RS2 RS 232 or 15m D A 05085232 connection diagram serial interface card 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 5 Ug When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule 5 ec
210. 0 CP 9300MS 9200 H Or PROGIG 8 ade ev ene deed ned ee ene 6 5 6 2 4 System configuration for connecting to 940 6 7 6 2 5 System configuration for connecting to CP 9200SH 317 6 8 6 2 6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200 MP2300 23005 6 9 6 2 7 2 ee 6 10 6 2 8 lt GOT Side Settings nu nem M bt perti Rati 6 15 6 2 9 PPC Side Settings e rette dates ee Y AERA SER 6 17 6 3 Ethernet Conrnectlon oiii 6 20 6 3 1 System configuration for connecting to 920 or MP2200 or MP2300 23005 or 92005 17 6 20 06 32 GOT Side Settings coe rerit dae nt eite ee zh Ye at 6 21 6 3 3 side setting MP2000 series 920 6 23 6 3 4 side setting CP 9200SH series CP 312 CP 317 series 6 28 6 3 5 Precautilons uio a er RR ORDER 6 31 6 4 Device Range that 222 41 224 442 4201 4 4 4 2 414414 4 d das tna dea tne tns 6 32 6 4 1 YASKAWA
211. 0 1200 series Ethernet connection type OP communication Communication driver Ethernet SIEMENS Gateway Connection cable bn D Ar jj PLC Connection cable GOT Maximum Number of connectable Ethernet f 3 1 Series 9 Cable model segment Option device Model equipment Module 2 length iD SIMATIC CP 243 1 m Built into oe 87 200 243 1 IT GT15 J71E71 100 When PLC GOT is N 1 CP 343 1 The following shows the CP 343 1 Lean u number of PLCs for 1 GOT SIMATIC CP 343 1 10BASE T im Built into GOT lt For GT16 GT14 gt 7 300 Advanced IT Shielded twisted pair cable STP or 12 128 or less unshielded twisted pair cable UTP lt For GT15 GT12 gt Built into GOT Category 3 4 and 5 GT15 J71E71 100 15 10 or less CP 443 1 100BASE TX gn ammi CP 443 1 Shielded twisted pair cable STP Built into GOT When PLC GOT is 1 N 67 400 Advanced IT Category 5 and 5e 100m 512 The following shows the 7 number of GOTs for 1 PLC ilti GT P Built into GOT GT15 J71E71 100 15 32 orless recommended 5 to 16 or less T SIMATIC m Built into GOT 87 1200 Built into GOT 100m GT15 J71E71 100 71 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Conne
212. 0 19200 38400 76800 1 For the setting method of the engineering software refer to the following 57 Users Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 6 Device Range that Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item Bit CH1 LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Device Information vw 0000 3 Kind BIT Range Device 0000 063F 71819 e e 41516 o Network Station No Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device Informati on selected in Device Displays the device type and setting range which are Set the monitor target of the set device Monitors the PLC of the specified station No 0 to 31 To monitor the PLC of the specified station No To specify the station No of
213. 0 3m 3 GT15 RS2 9P 1 8422 connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 1 1200m E GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m GT15 RS2T4 9P GT GT RS 422 0395422 connection GT15 RS4 9S diagram 2 1200m M Built into GOT Up to 1 temperature H PCP J controller for 1 ser e RS422 connection 1200m GT14 RS2T4 9P 6 GOT diagram 6 a 9587 88485 connection 1200m 7 Built into GOT diagram 1 5 FA LTBGTR4CBL05 0 5m 5 ser i ea RS485 connection 1200m FA LTBGTRACBL10 1m 9 diagram 3 2 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m W BF 01 0500 0 5m 774 W BF 01 1000 1m 174 01 3000 3 74 RS 485 jA 1200m GT15 RS4 TE RS485 connection diagram 2 W BF 01 0500 0 5m 1 4 W BF 01 1000 1m 1 4 01 3000 3 74 T 1200m Built into GOT ST i RS485 connection diagram 13 9 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration Temperature controller Connection cable tor GOT Number of connector EET connectable Model Communication Calle model ME Model Option device Model equipment Connection diagram number distance name hr W BF 01 0500 0 5m 77 W BF 01 1000 1m 174 Up to 1 E BF 01 774 t t H PCP J RS 485 W BF 01 3000 3m 4200m 14 82 4 9 emperature 5 9 or controller for 1 Uss RS485 c
214. 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 53 Setthe maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 13 Connecting to THV A1 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Item Communication speed Setting range 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol MODBUS Communication speed 9600bps fixed Data bit configuration Data bit 8bit fixed Parity bit None fixed MODBUS data i 0 to 255 ms Extension time BN1 None 1bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit BO2 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 1 to 99 Slave address 9 Interval time 010 250 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Setthe extension time for the data interval time in the MODBUS communication which is lower than 24 bit time Set when the data time interval exceeds 24 bit time 53 Select the device address without overlapping
215. 01 900 901 9 44 9 5 10 Connecting to AG500 icone de edi nade 9 45 9 5 11 Connecting to 500 2 42 1 1 510516 dd nao 9 45 9 5 12 Connecting to MA900 901 7 9 45 9 5 13 9 45 9 5 14 Connecting to 5 100 5 200 9 46 9 5 15 Connecting X TIO 0 9 46 9 5 16 Connecting to SBT orne arai n natin ait nadie 9 47 9 5 17 Connecting 10 400 22 22204 06004 9 47 9 5 18 Station number 1 11202 000010 0000 EEEE EEREN AA nna 9 48 9 6 Device Range that Can 2 1 1 11 161111 9 50 9 6 n th d e PO ud 9 51 Po et e at e epe edes 9 51 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Connectable Model 40424 21 01 1 4 0 a 10 2 10 2 Serial Connection intime ed tette e o uet ne ie dept aed ied 10 4 10 2 1 Sys
216. 01 2 0133 01 4 015 016 017 018 9 E gt Decima Eur 16 a21 92 2 923 024 2 5 92 6 02 7 02 8 5 Logic result LQ Sin ic i 32 2 3 03 5 a3 6 7 a Logic input LI LIO to 13 7 E 0 48 41 042 043 a44 a45 046 047 048 Word device bit Specified bit of the 64 05 2 95 3 54 95 5 a56 057 058 following word devices 80 062 063 064 06 5 066 068 Fixedtoo Data byte D 00 to 099 96 071 072 073 0744 075 76 077 Q7 8 OFF Data word W wo to W49 112 08 1 08 2 08 4 5 08 6 087 088 o Decima 128 09 1 2 09 4 a9 5 09 6 097 09 8 amp EFI input byte El El110 to E1233 Decimal fe 2 4 144 010 1 010 2 910 3 010 4 010 5 010 6 010 7 010 8 2 Decimal E E 160 a11 2 11 3 a11 4 011 5 011 6 Q117 Q11 8 8 EFI output byte EQ EQ10 to EQ22 Decima 9 A 2 176 0121 0122 1233 012 4 012 5 012 6 0127 0128 Decimal 192 Device range error Logic input byte LD LDO to LD3 Decima Logic input word LW LWO to LW1 Decima c Logic result LQ gic input CIEN Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 gt 0 100 0 190 1 Lao 2 190 3 1004 La0 5 1006 190 7 8 1010 191 1 191 2 19133 101 4 1015 191 6 191 7 POINT 5 16
217. 09 C30R40302 6T 3m 1200 2 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m GT09 C100R40302 6T 10m LC02 0N RS 422 GT09 C200R40302 6T 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P GT09 C300R40302 6T 30m GT15 RS4 9S 1200 E 554 RS422 connection diagram Built into GOT B 93 4 Serial zu 22 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 8 3 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connectit to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 3 ur oe 7 2 3 System configuration for connecting to STARDOM Zo See Oro 5265 Cro FA500 FA M3 STARDOM Connection cable 2 Es On lt E 2 Connection cable GOT 5 lt Communica Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Series Option device Model tion Type Connection diagram number distance GT GT GT09 C30R20305 9S 3m e Built into GOT E STARDOM RS 232 15 1 GOT for 1 PLC 059 65232 connection 5 diagram 2 22 a GT15 RS2 9P 5 1 Connect the connection cable to the COM port of the PLC 2 a lt E 5 gt ae n z o 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 5 7 2 Serial Connection 7 2 4 Connection diagram The following diagram shows the connection between
218. 099 UT100 8 5 2 RR 0 PC link communication without sum check 5 5 Temperature controller 1 PC link communication with sum check SE UT2000 8 5 3 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings UTAdvanced 854 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units RS232C RS485 converter ML2 8 5 5 2 For the UT750 UP750 5 2 Item Set value H RS 485 n 9600bps fixed Es communication ee Transmission speed 1 High perf P ps ormance 19200bps om 38400bps communication Data bit 7bits 8bits 5 Parity bit Even odd none P we 5 Stop bit 1bit 2bits B lt 1 2 Address 1 to 99 2 o E me Quo 0 PC link communication oe o RS 485 without sum check communication 1 PC link communication with sum check Protocol selection o 0 link communication gt High performance Fah without sum check On RS 485 Ie 1 PC link communication os communication with sum check zS 20 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings lt 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units ES 55 55 29 2 QO 14 amp a z eX 2 ERU iO gt O 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 33 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 5 2 Connecting to 07100 Series Communication settings Make the communication settings by oper
219. 0bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity check how it is performed None Parity during communication Odd Default Odd Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to Stimes error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address station No of the GOT to which the PLC is host Address connected in the connected network on a Default 00 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the communication request from the GOT Default 5ms 1 If no setting is provided for the data length for the controller set 8 bits If the setting is provided for the data length for the controller set the same set value for the data length for the GOT as that for the PLC 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For deta
220. 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment The Communication Setting appears Verify that the communication driver name to be used is displayed in the communication interface box to be used When the communication driver name is not displayed normally carry out the following procedure again gt 1 1Setting the Communication Interface For 5715 GT14 or GT11 1 powering up the GOT touch Menu Communication setting from the Utility f go e j a O KZ ra TO We 95 ra as Time setting amp display 21 Program data control E Debug amp self check Clean Maintenance timing setting Addition times reset 5 F oO 25 E T 2 2 og 2 Touch Communication setting The screen on the left is not displayed on BE z Or 2 H 99 Zn 25 5 ec 2 oou DEP Zoe ZEE 3 The Communication Setting appears 4 Verify that the communication driver name to um be used is displayed in the box for the E 63 communication interface to be used On og 23 Extend I F Setting 5 When the communication driver name is not 5 2 Extend 1 1 E displayed normally carry out the following EA Ist ChNo None 0
221. 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring CONNECTIONS NON MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS dee me qe 10 12 13 14 15 16 CONNECTION HITACHI IES 2 1 CONNECTION HITACHI PLC 3 1 CONNECTION 4 1 CONNECTION TO TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER ete ee 5 1 CONNECTION YASKAWA 6 1 CONNECTION TO 7 1 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 4 245023 dudes 8 1 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 1 CONNECTION TO 11 1 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 CONNECTION SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER us 15 1 CONNECTION MURATEC CONTROLLER 16 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC GT16 1 14 12 11 Connectable Model 11 8 eg zo Oo oS d 6 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC System 2 3
222. 10 lt More than 1000 in case of CB series RDB2 RXD2 11 RDB1 RXD1 12 13 RSA RTS 14 NC 15 RSB RTS 16 NC 17 CSA CTS 18 lt NC 19 CSB CTS 20 1 Set the terminating resistor of GOT as follows GT16 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM Connecting terminating resistors 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 4 Forthe terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No Signal name 2 0 100 400 5700 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 2 CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 400 PF901 900 901 5000 RMC500 X TIO 54100 SA200 SB1 RS 485 AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 9 specifications SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 3 6
223. 15 RS4 TE 5 o gt User RS485 connection diagram 8 Built into GOT m 14 ed RS485 connection diagram 9 GT14 RS2T4 9P uj 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact Es ge MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 5 E x 3 to the 5 232 interface built into GOT ES ul nc 225 656 0 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 5 5 2 System Configuration 5 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 5 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 Interface converter side GOT side 77 1 CD 1 _ m 1 CD 1 1 RD RXD 2 i 2 RXD 1 1 SD TXD 3 3 TXD 1 ER DTR 4 m 4 DTR 1 1 SG 5 1 5 SG 1 1 DR DSR 6 DSR 1 1 RS RTS 7 7 RTS 1 1 CS CTS 8 CTS 3 20 9 NC FG 1 Use the interface converter the DCE mode RS232 connection diagram 2 GOT side NC RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS NC FG 1 1 Interface converter side SI 30A KS 485 1 3 gt 2 5 9 Other than above Use the interface converter in the DCE mode FG RXD
224. 2 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Em Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 6 TE Temperature Temperature v GOT side m Controller side controller side 9 I 1 Hie rd 1 m 1 x SDA1 1 m di FE 1 i La m 2 SDB1 2 m s3 1 1 1 t4 Um My RDA1 SEE Bo Sees S 1 4 9 o 725 Terminati istor 1000 1 2W BER erminating resistor SDB2 6 RDA2 7 2 8 SG 9 za FG 10 9 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table E 5 Model of temperature controller 5 Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin
225. 2 6 System configuration for connecting to MP2200 2300 23005 ac Communication driver Communication driver 5 E Tm 5 B YASKAWA GLICP9200 SH H CP9300MS YASKAWA MP a gt roo For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 For GT10 Taz zo On Connection cable E 8 _ Connection cable GOT Number of ls i z Mogel bora Cable model Max distance Option device Model DE name module Connection diagram number equipment 5 a 28 za GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m Differs E ilti GT GT or according to Built into GOT 2171F 01 8 69232 connection PLC side 218 01 RS 232 diagram 1 specifications 2181 02 3 GT15 RS2 9P E o 0 i 9 059 85232 connection same as Built into GOT 911022 diagram 6 above Ug S 5 i 3 MP2200 8069422 connection ee as Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 On MP2300 diagram 4 PRONS communicatio MP2300S GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m n module 5 5 GT15 RS2T4 9P 2 En Gi 2171F 01 RS 422 ia Us RS422 connection same as a diagram 8 above Built into GOT E d gr Boe GT o fa o GT15 RS4 9S oro 2171 01 RS 422 2 85422 connection Built into GOT diagram 11 above 51 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of th
226. 2 Serial Connection Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method For the NV1L RS2 For the NC1L RS2 oN lt al 8 8 Ol7 Ol 6 ol s 4 B 3 3 1 Dn ON Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON speed 19200bps ON ON Abit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 7bits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing A method By switch ON 4 20 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection Connecting to NC1L RS4 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting Switches Item Set value MODE Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits or 7bits Even or Odd Parity bit Done None Stop bit ibit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station 772 01099 Terminating resistor ON or OFF 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 3 Turn ON the terminating switch of a general purpose interface module which will be a terminal 2 Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting swit
227. 2 Source DW00005 Dest 0 00030 STORE A Stores the data size 0025 Source DW00006 Dest 0 00031 STORE A Stores the remote CPU 0029 Source DW00007 Dest 0 00032 0030 NL 1 20 0031 zi NL 1 2 TE 2 5 7 os 1 When connecting to multiple GOTs set connection numbers individually for each GOT 2 Set the offset for each device 8 Set the available write range for the holding registers 4 When connecting to multiple GOTs set channel numbers individually for each GOT 5 Set the Dev Typ of the message receive function lt MSG RCV gt to 00016 for the built in MP2300S Ethernet connection or the Ethernet port connection of 2181 02 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 27 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 4 side setting CP 9200SH series CP 312 CP 317 Settings by DIP switch series 1 Settings for 218TXB Set the DIP switch SW2 as follows N O TN 10 100 YASKAWA PLC F H For details of YASKAWA PLCs refer to the following i manuals INIT gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual TEST ON OFF Parameter settings Make the parameter settings with a peripheral tool Saing kan Sei Seuinglrange ON Extended mode 13 channels up to 1024 words i Mode Selecti ON 1 Settings for CP 218IF OFF Basic mode 10 channels Item Set value BESIDES m Module 218 Not used OFF Transmission ON 10Mbps CPU Number
228. 200 RS 485 W BW 01 02 3000 3 connection diagram j GT15 RS4 TE Z DIO Up to 16 9r 4 Total of Z TIO Z User RS485 4 User RS485 enn CT and Z DIO Up connection diagram 9 M Built into GOT to 31 for Z COM 15 GT AA 8 5485 eny 1200m connection diagram 2 GT14 RS2T4 9P 12 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 5 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 6 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 11 Tm ra E tr Fre a o 9 ae ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SYSTEMS PLC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER 9 2 4 Connecting to CB Series 100 CB400 500 700 900 When using the conver
229. 2000 44001 1 00 tnn 12 10 12 6 Device Range that Can Be 12 11 12 6 1 15 Industrial Systems 5 1 12 11 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 Connectable Dt ae ee es ate 13 2 19 22 System Configuration ic i nti ater ein eee di e ele aa 13 2 13 2 1 Connecting to Flexi 2222442 041 10 00 da natas da nina d 13 2 13 3 Connection DIagratric cito Ee eee eu aR eee oe haiti ain edna 13 3 19 32 RS 23Z cable ee P e n Pa Et ede e Onde p e COR 13 3 13 4 GOT SIde Setlings ze e Ret tr th eret S dto edd 13 4 13 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 13 4 13 4 Communication detail 13 4 13 5 PEG Side Settirigis i ii bant bite E A AA edi legends 13 5 13 541 Connecting to Flexi Soft z te ee ern ed ee bee Mae Pe a LR 13 5 13 6 Device Range That Can Be 0 11 0 16 600 13 6 13 6 1 SICK Safety Controller SICK Flexi 13 7 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 Gonnectable Model List A e a eed dee Meee 14 2 14 2 Senal Gonriectlori sax seine hand ie ERO E ee os 14 3 14 2 1 System configuration for connecting
230. 20002 697 0731 697 772 SIEMENS 57 300 400 Series SIMATIC S7 300 SIMATIC S7 400 697 782 697 928 697 935 1C697CPU780 IC697CGR772 IC697CGR935 1C697CPU788 1C697CPU789 697 790 2000 003 IC200UAL004 IC200UAL005 IC200UAL006 2000 007 2000 028 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD 120 IC200UDD212 IC200UDRO005 IC200UDRO006 20000 010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDRO64 2000 014 IC200UDD104 IC200UDD112 IC200UDRO001 IC200UDR002 IC200UDRO03 SIEMENS 57 200 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface SIMATIC S7 200 3 Setting I F The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used Set the I F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT c Ec D o Pz 16 z Extension interface 1 12 22 3rd stage Extension interface 2 Standard interface 3 2nd stage RS 422 485 interface built in the GOT Standard interface 4 Ethernet interface built in the GOT 1st stage Standard interface 1 RS 232 interface built in the GOT Example In the case of the GT1685 Standard interface 2 USB interface built in the GOT i Extension interface 1 Extension
231. 2R4 9S 0 2m GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m 5 1 GOT for up to 6 PLCs F70 FFK120A C10 RS 485 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 232C 485 interface GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m GT15 RS4 9S capsules or 500m connection diagram Built into GOT 2 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 4 6 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs using general purpose interface modules o Ong TO E E e 298 aos zo On p Connection cable GOT E e OE penea Commun Number of connectable Oa Model purpose cee Cable model Max 2 t s Option device Model equipmen name interface Ws Connection diagram number distance module 5589485 connection diagram 1 500 Built into GOT Zo 16 1 GOT for up to 31 PLCs 2 72 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m ou GTO9 C30R41001 6T 3m Gan general purpose interface _ GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m GT15 RS2T4 9p modules zo za F70 NC1L RS4 5 485 GT09 C200R41001 6T 20m OF GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m RE or 1 GOT for up to 10 PLCs 9 Built into GOT general purpose interface Ga RS485 connection di
232. 3 B b Device 0 3 Byte number A A A A O EFIO 1 ByteA 1 2 Hn EQOA T i UM wj A A A CPU type CPUO CPU1 EQ O 1 2 EFI number Q 1 2 EFI number T 0 2 Byte number Device Input position 1 to 8 0 2 Byte number name Module number 1 to 12 7 DA RS232 data A 0 99 Dec Byte number Safety controller to RS232 b Logic result LQ Logic input LI WA Device A 0 49 Dec Word number x w Word virtualization of D GOT independent device 3 s H device Not available 0 D1 Upper bits Device Bit position 0 to 7 DO Lower bits name Byte number 0 to 3 LD LDA RS232 data A 0 3 Byte number RS232 to safety controller c EFI input El WA Device A 0 1 Word number Word virtualization of LD GOT independent device 2 M 3 Not available T LWO LD1 Upper bits Device Byte number 0 to 3 LDO Lower bits name F 1 When the mapping position is changed by the engineering Device numbers 15 3 software for SICK a mismatch occurs between virtual EFI number 1 to 2 devices on GOT and SICK safety controller mapping devices When mapping is changed use D devices or LD devices 13 6 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 6 Device Range That Can Be Set 3 When using offset specification f EFI output EQ
233. 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 5 m 52 A length between a hub and a node maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used 3 following shows the number of the connectable nodes when repeater hub is used 8 x E 10BASE T 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 9 100BASE TX 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m 4 When switching hubs used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE 2 5 standard use the switching hub and operate in a 10Mbps 100Mbps mixed environment For how to check the function version refer to the following c GT16 User s Manual Hardware 4 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 5 number of increases the communication becomes highloaded and it may affect the communication performance 6 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBDE 9 Z9 ins On uz 2 zz On CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 9 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 3 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 300 40
234. 33 GT15V 75V4R1 0 2 GT15 RS4 TE 0 3 GT16M ROUT 0 11 GT15 RS2T4 9P 0 098 GT15V 75ROUT 0 11 GT15 J71E71 100 0 224 GT16M MMR 0 27 GT15 J71GP23 SX 1 07 GT15 CFCD 0 07 GT15 J71LP23 25 0 56 GT15 CFEX CO8SET 0 15 GT15 J71BR13 0 77 GT15 SOUT 0 08 GT15 J61BT13 0 56 GT15 DIO 0 1 Bar code reader 2 GT15 DIOR 0 1 GT15 PRN 0 09 RFID controller 2 GT16M V4 0 12 GT15 80FPA 0 22 GT15V 75V4 02 54 Value used for calculating the current consumption of the multi channel function For the specifications of the unit refer to the manual included with the unit 2 When the GOT supplies power to a barcode reader a RFID controller from the standard interface add their consumed current Maximum value is less than 0 3 A 1 20 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 3 Calculation example 22 a When connecting GT15 J71BR13 GT15 RS4 9S 3 units GT15 J71E71 100 for the gateway 9 function and a bar code reader 0 12 A to the GT1575 V fo Be emm Current supply capacity of GOT Total consumed current A e 2 2 0 77 0 33 0 33 0 33 0 224 0 12 2 104 g Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT they can be connected to the b When connecting the GT15 J71BR13 GT15 RS4 9S 2 units GT15 J71E71 100 for the gateway function bar code reader 0 12 A to GT1585 S s Oo Current supply capacity of GOT A Total consumed
235. 422 connection diagram preparing aps GT 2 Built into GOT 5588422 connection diagram ini pum 500m Built into GOT 1 16 2 GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m 2 LQP510 RS 422 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P 2 1 GOT for 1 PLC E g 9 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m E gt GT15 RS4 9S 55508422 connection diagram Yeparing ma 37 2 Built into GOT 1 Product manufactured by Hitachi Ltd For details of the product contact Hitachi Ltd e 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 2 9 On lt 25 5 oS ES z Ox 52 T 2 oo gt amp a Zea Oost 559 uoc a 6565 0 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 3 3 2 System Configuration 3 2 2 Connecting to S10mini Connection cable Communication driver ir HITACHI S10mini S10V ii PLC Connection cable GOT ee umber Sense Communication poss Cable model Max IUIUS p connectable module 1 Tbe Connection diagram number distance equipment GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m ETS 4504 LQE560 or Built into GOT LQE060 RS 232 15 ET 941 LQE160 5 RS232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P T 6589422 connection diagram 500m Built into GOT rae 1 510 communication GT09 C30R41301 95 3m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m module LQE565 GT09 C100
236. 450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE 14 2 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 Connectable Model List 14 2 Serial Connection ra zoe i 14 2 1 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC S7 300 400 series Qu Dg Zoz ll When connecting to one PLC 9x9 Communication driver Cem SIEMENS 57 300 400 gt Za Connection cable Og 55 2 40 25 20 ora Octo PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Pomme Gable P N or connectable Series HMI Adapter nication Connection diagram Option device equipment z Type number GT09 C30R20801 9S t 3m iti cem 2 z Built into GOT Sm oF 15m 6741 GT 50 9 E E E apter diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P o o U 8 5232 connection 45m Built into GOT E G diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens AG T 2 zow 225 When connecting to multiple PLCs 985 gt oc 2 PROFIBUS Connection cable 2 J o 59 AE T zn 1 gt m 2x2 T Connection cable GOT Number of aj Galie moda Max connectable Series HMI Adapter nication Connection diagram Opti
237. 4818 environment and 49153 lt gt 11 3 2 Communication detail settings Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication Ret timeout occurs 0 to 5times Click the OK button when settings are completed i When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times POINT Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the The settings of connecting equipment can be Startup Time Communication with the cpu 7 19225886 confirmed in I F Communication Setting Default 3sec For details refer to the following Set the time period for a 3 7 1 1 2 I F communication setting Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing the 0 to 10000 Delay Time load of the network destination PLC 10 Default Oms be 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 15 10 3 Ethernet Connection 1 2 10 16 Click the Setting button and perform the setting the GOT IP Address Setting screen GOT IP Address Setting GOT IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Ethernet Download Port No This setting is shared by other items of Ethernet Driver x 192 168 3 18 5014 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers C 3 Ethernet set
238. 5 SDB2 TXD2 6 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 8 N 14 Shell 1 2 3 4 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Signal name DM REM Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 RDB 25 m RDA 26 24 SG 27 25 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal Connecting terminating resistors Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 4 GOT side Temperature controller 1 Temperature controller 5 Tipus t sd da c ux nn Lu RDA 2 L E E SDB i SDAC 1 i orz 7 SDA 2 ji i RDB 1 i eas SDA 1 r3 BEAD T3 r3 RDB 1 1 1 SDB 6 Ly L RDA 95 1 1 1 1 SG 5 T SG 4 4 k 4 Terminating resistor 9 za On FG EZ A Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to t
239. 5 2 value T Counter Set A5 C3 0 1 PRE to C255 255 1 PRE 2 value 3 Counter Decimal 5 Current value C3 0 2 ACC C255 255 2 ACC Integer N3 0 to N255 255 32bit integer L3 0 to L3 255 Ly L255 0 to L255 255 32bit float F3 0 to F3 255 L F255 0 to F255 255 A Writing to device is not allowed for 32 bit data 2 Writing to device is not allowed for 16 bit data 3 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 4 This is not supported by GT10 10 20 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set UATIONLNOO SWALSAS YATIOWLNOO 21d SNaWaIs H3TIOHINOO ONH 431108109 JdHnivsadiWal OAY AQ31QVH8 N3TIV 01 Re 15 AL34VS MOIS OL NOLLO3NNOO NOILVHOdHOO VL VHIH OL NOLLO3NNOO OL NOILOANNOO OL NOILOANNOO 101 NOILOANNOOD OL NOILOANNOO OL NOLLO3NNOO NO O s WO 1 1 wr NS vr _ or vc Te rM D E E 5 B X0 x xu x4 o 40 23 21 OG 2 x 00 53 i 9 3 2 t no p 8 i o 0 RPL LE A o o L S c oc 9 5 2 o E 5 Fl 0565 956024120 09 ao x
240. 5 2 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 9 or PXH9 When connecting to one temperature controller Communication driver TIT FUJI PXR PXG PXH Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Model name Option device Model ation Type Connection diagram number distance bn Built into GOT PXG5 GT GT PXG9 RS 232 ZZPPXH1 TK4H4563 1 3m 1 temperature controller for 1 GOT PXH9 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by FUJI CO LTD For details of the product contact FUJI CO LTD 5 4 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers RS 232 communication gt amp i Ow 9 uc E 34 Connection cable 2 HOS anos n a Connection cable 1 5 o OS Temperature 7 zo Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 GOT za controller Number of 8 Cable model Cable model connectable Model Max Model Model Max Connection diagram a ode i Connection diagram i Option device Model equipment name distance name name
241. 5 PLC Side 15 2 B38 15 6 Device Range that Set 15 2 898 E x lt c on Zo oxe Fob 250 o cz MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 15 CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER For the connection to the HNC controller manufactured by Hirata Corporation please contact our company 15 1 Connectable Model List 15 2 System Configuration 15 3 Connection Diagram 15 4 GOT Side Settings 15 5 PLC Side Setting 15 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 15 1 Connectable Model List E 559 Zee 828 m CONNECTION MURATEC amp ER CONTROLLER 5 4 58 16 1 14 12 etl 1 10 16 1 Connectable Model 16 2 8 Oza 16 2 System 16 2 Tr 16 3 Connection Diagram 16 2 522 164 GOT Side 5 16 2 16 5 Controller Side 5 0 16 2 16 6 Device Range that Can Set 16 2 959 555 Ono o 52 5 25 90 FE TE 582 BES 5 ac a E z s gt 2 O 16
242. 5 RS GOT 1 connection 1200m CD485 V RS232 connection 15m 6741 1 di 8 232 di 3 Serial W BF 02 3000 iagram 8 iagram 3 Up to 31 GT GT 3m iid temperature controllers for GT GT Built into RS GOT RS485 connection diagram 8 1200m CD485 V 232 RS232 connection 15m diagram 3 Serial GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 21 Tm ra E tr Fre a o 9 ae ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SYSTEMS PLC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER 9 29 Connection to SRX Communication driver Eim RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS When connecting to temperature control module with a converter Connection Connection cable 2 Temperature Connection cable 1 Interface Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model Tm TET Commun Cable model connectable Series Connection du ication Connection Nae Option device Model equipment distance name di
243. 50PSCB GT16 50PSGB GT16 50PSCW GT16 50PSGW GT16 90PSCB 012 GT16 80PSCB 012 GT16 70PSCB 012 GT16 60PSCB 012 GT16 50PSCB 012 GT16H 60PSC For GT16 GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW For GT15 6714 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW 6112 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW 6111 ST11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW For GT10 Protective cover for oil GT05 90PCO GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO GT05 50PCO GT16 50PCO GT10 40PCO GT10 30PCO GT10 20PCO USB environmental protection cover GT16 UCOV GT16 50UCOV GT15 UCOV GT14 50UCOV GT11 50UCOV Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 Attachment GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 GT16 90XLTT GT16 80SLTT GT16 70SLTT GT16 70VLTT GT16 70VLTTA GT16 70VLTN Backlight GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT16 60VLTN GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT
244. 562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GOT1000 GT155 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD Series GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157L1 6 1560 155 1 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD a GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QMBD GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT1450 Q GT1275 GT1275 V Abbreviation of GT1275 VNBA GT1275 VNBD GT1265 GT1265 V Abbreviation of GT1265 VNBA GT1265 VNBD GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275 GT1265 GT4155 Q Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT115 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD GT11 Abbreviation of GT115L GT11 Handy GOT GT1055 Q Abbreviation of GT1055 QSBD GT105 GT1050 Q Abbreviation of GT1050 QBBD GT1045 Q Abbreviation of GT1045 QSBD GT1040 GT1040 Q Abbreviation of GT1040 QBBD Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBL GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 GT1030 LBLW GT1030 LWD GT1030 LWD2 GT1030 LWL GT1030 LWDW GT1030 LWDW2 GT1030 GT1030 LWLW GT1030 HBD GT1030 HBD2 GT1030 HBL GT1030 HBDW GT1030 HBDW2 GT1030 HBLW GT1030 HWD GT1030 HWD2 GT1030 HWL GT1030 HWDW GT1030 HWDW2 GT1030 HWLW Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 GT1020 LBLW GT1020 LWD GT1020LWD2 GT1020 LWL GT1020 LWDW GT1020 LWDW2 GT1020 LWLW G
245. 62144 8 Data register D D1 to D8192 8 Common register R R1 to R4096 Decimal E Index register V V1 to V256 3 GOT cannot read or write data from to consecutive devices M3 Series Device No Device name Setting range representa tion Input relay X X00201 to X71664 Output relay Y Y00201 to Y71664 Internal relay 1 4 I1 to 165535 L00001 to L08192 L10001 to L18192 L20001 to L28192 L30001 to 138192 L40001 to L48192 g L50001 to L58192 gt 160001 to 168192 Decimal 170001 to 178192 a Common relay E E1 to E4096 Special relay M 3 M1 to M9984 Timer TU TU1 to TU3072 Counter CU CU1 to CU3072 Specified bit of the following word devices Word device bit dL Excluding TP TS CP and CS Timer TP TP1 to TP3072 Timer TS TS1 to TS3072 Counter CP CP1 to CP3072 Counter CS 1 CS1 to CS3072 Filer register 5 B1 to B262144 Data register D D1 to D65535 Common register R R1 to R4096 Index register V1 to V256 3 W00001 to W08192 o Decimal T W10001 to W18192 W20001 to W28192 Link register W W30001 to W38192 W40001 to W48192 W50001 to W58192 W60001 to W68192 W70001 to W78192 Special register zy3 Z1 to 21024 Bit device word Converting bit devices into word Except TU and CU 1 Writing is not possible 2 Writing to continuous devices is not possible 3 The GOT cannot read or write
246. 92 168 0 1 Set the port No of the connected the Port No PLC 251 to 65531 Default 507 Communication Top fixed TCP fixed format 1 Connection with the PLC is unavailable if the IP address is the default value Set the value to the IP address of the PLC to be connected 2 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers Communication detail settings 3 sure that the port No is equivalent to Self port reference No in the PLC 251 C Setting the IP address and self port reference No COR 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GTO User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 27 4 3 Ethernet Connection CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 3 PLC side setting MICREX SX SPH FUJI PLC For details of PLCs refer to the following manuals gt FUJI PLC user s Manual Setting the IP address and self port reference No Set the IP address and self port reference No using a peripheral tool of the PLC
247. ANET Q gt Product name Model Specifications S RS 422 t i 7 d GT16 CO2R4 9S RS 422 485 Connector RS 422 conversion cable D sub 9 pin cable 3 FA LTBGTRACBL05 5 RS 485 terminal block i o ermina FA LTBGTR4CBL10 RS 4221489 Connector 485 Terminal block c x conversion modules Supplied connection cable dedicated for the conversion unit 2 E FA LTBGTR4CBL20 95 ui c 2 5 888 1 3 4 Connector conversion adapter 2 Product name Model Specifications 2 9 On Connector conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S RS 422 485 D Sub 9 pin connector RS 422 485 Terminal block 5 5 23 5 os 1 3 5 Serial multi drop connection unit Product name Model Specifications za i i Ox Serial multi d GOT multi drop connection module GT01 RS4 M connection unit 3 Mitsubishi Products 18 GOT MULTI DROP CONNECTION 2 2 oo gt 1 3 6 RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter amp Product name Moe Specifications Es RS 232 485 signal ean ee GT14 RS2T4 9P RS 232 signal D Sub 9 pin connector RS 485 signal Terminal block SES conversion adapter 5 656 o gt 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 19 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 7 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position This section describes the precautions for installing units on another unit For the installation method of each unit refer to the Us
248. Address connected in the connected network Tus Default 1 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address and host address 10 9 10 2 Serial Connection gt 21 a lt nd m pa lt 2 AB MicroLogix 3 AB Control CompactLogix Property Property Value Transmission Speed BP5 19200 Transmission 5 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Parity None Sum Check Done Sum Check Type BCC Sum Check Type BCC Retry Times 3 Adapter Address 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Host Address Adapter Address 0 Host Address 0 Delay Time ms 0 Item Description Range Item Description Range Set this item when change the 4800bps Set this item when change the 9600bps transmission speed used for ps transmission speed used for 19200bps Transmission 9600bps Transmission need communication with the connected 19200bps communication with the connected 38400bps P equipment Pide equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Specify the format in which the sum Set this item when change the data check is performed during length used for communication with J Sum Check when performing sum CRC16 Data Bit the connected equipment Default 8bits Default BCC Specify the stop
249. BISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED o 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 lt 3 GT11 the number of connectable temperature controllers differs according to the hardware version 9 For the procedure to check the hardware version refer to the following manual Z 2 GT11 User s Manual lt 5 Model name of GT11 Hardware version Number of connectable temperature controllers 5 or later 31 GT1155 QTBD earlier 10 GT1155 QSBD F or later 31 GT1150 QLBD E or earlier 10 8 4 to the RS 232 interface built into GOT m 58 FO 55 oz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 17 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter COM A Connection cable 3 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Temperatur nnection Interface Moin Connection cable 1 Counsel Connection cable 3 GOT controller cable 2 converter F MOX Number of Cable model gabie modelo m ie Cable model connectable Connection diagram Connection dista 4 Model equipment name diagram name on 4 device number diagram number nce number Type W BF 28 0500 0 5m W BF 01 0500 W BF 28 1000 1 1 Built into to 31 M oon
250. C 7 8 7 17 H HITACHI IES PLC Connecting to H 200 to 252 series H series board type or EH 150 series 2 4 Connection to large sized series 2 3 HITACHI PLC S17 OM INN pele 3 4 hie ahaa ee 3 3 l t 1 9 I F communication 22 2 1 13 L LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC K2008 iani et pde AEE 12 5 3005 5 o auttm tote ie pie 12 6 5 206 e 12 O Option Unit iecore eee 1 19 P PLC Side Setting CONNECTION TO FUJI FA PLC 4 19 CONNECTION GE FANUC PLC 11 15 CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC 15 2 Index 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 9 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 8 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS 12 10 CONNECTION MURATEC 16 2 Precautions CONNECTION FUJI FA PLC 4 31 CONNECTION TO SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 19 CONNECTION TO GE FANUC PLC 11 17 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 51 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 38 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORIN G edid scr 1
251. C 6 10 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection RS232 connection diagram 7 RS232 connection diagram 9 GOT side GOT side YASKAWA PLC side terminal block YASKAWA PLC side PT CDNC f a Get FG SD m NR RAD RD RXD 2 2 4 RD RD SD TXD RXD Clamped by hood ER DTR 4 NC DR i RTS SG 5 H 7 GND da 14 GND DR DSR 1 9 NC BS i i eis RS RTS 7 14 RTS 99 i 2 CS CTS L s NC 9 8 EST NC NN 4 1 16 GT15 CD 6714 GT12 NC GT11 NC GT1050 NC GT1040 NC GOT side RS232 connection diagram 10 terminal block YASKAWA PLC side GOT side terminal block YASKAWA PLC side SD 3 RXD eee RD i 2 TXD j Ease foe i lt r 1 ER e DSR DR r 20 DTR ER 6 1 1 i SG 7 SG of i 9 NC 1 RS 1 FG m i T GND 1 1 1 1 cs 4 RS RS 7 ce FG NC Lt s cs cs NC MER CD NE 5 CTS NC a ee ae 1 EST 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The maximum length of the RS 232 cable differs according to the specifications of the YASKAWA PLC side For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual
252. C SR Mini HG MODBUS ra B tr Fra a 0 3 gt 20 9 2 o ro 2 59 96 Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 26 eae Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Number of E EH Mia Cable model ee ie core Modal connectable a tee nication Connection diagram diagram equipment number number o z U i o way RS422 connection 1000m Built into GOT diagram 1 9 a GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m Up to 31 ee W BF 02 0500 0 5m User i temperature RS 422 W BF 02 1000 1m 82 88422 1000m GT15 RS4 9S controllers for 1 W BF 02 3000 3m diagram 2 Built into GOT W 2 37 2 oon gt 2 422 connection 1000 GT44 RS2T4 9P 5 a ES diagram 6 a Oz 0 55785485 connection Built into GOT diagram 1 FA LTBGTR4CBLO5 0 5 2 ieee Sa connection FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m diagram 3 2 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m or ul T uL THV A1 W BF 01 0500 0 5m 529 W BF 01 1000 1m 2x z W BF 01 3000 3 1 020 GT15 RS4 TE Curs S 95 485 connection Up to 31 W BF 02 0500 0 5m diagram 4 RS 485 W BF 02 1000 1 1200 Br Ue 1m W BF 01 0500 0 5m n controllers for 1 z
253. C starts up a communication timeout occurs 9 a ins On uz 2 zz Q wW On Operations during communication During normal communication any operation which 5 makes the GOT restart including writing a project and 5 lt changing utility data may display the system alarm 2 E 402 Communication timeout Confirm communication 5 82 pathway or modules when the GOT restarts 2 E 2 Ore 52 53 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 15 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 4 Device Range that Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item 57 300 400 series and S7 Ethernet Bit CH1 SIEMENS 57 300 400 Device Information Kind BIT 8 Range Device 0000 5117 Network Hos Other Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the dev
254. CNCOM 05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd is necessary connect to the 150 series connect to the serial port of the CPU module The module jack 8 pins D sub connector 15 pins conversion cable 05 made by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd is necessary Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 PLC 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 2 System Configuration 2 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the c Uu 506 woz 2 2 3 2 RS 422 cable 2 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 Connection diagram GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side 2 Eg RS232 connection diagram 1 SDA1 TXD1 1 E x RXDP E a i i i GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side SDB1 TXD1 2 RXDN 5 1 SUE RI ZO CD NC 1 RDA1 RXD1 let 2 amp i i RD RXD 1 B RDB1 RXD1 4 TXDN SD TXD 3 p 5 SDA2 TXD2 5 TXDG ER DTR 4 e 7 RV2 DR SDB2 TXD2 6 RXDG o se 5 77 RDA2 RXD2 7 i DR DSR 6 em RDB2 RX
255. CSB LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side terminal block 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG 1 For the system terminal connect 1200 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively RS422 connection diagram 3 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side terminal block 1 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG FG 12 8 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side terminal block 1 eee RDA i RDB SDA SDB 6 5 E FG For system terminal connect 1200 1 2W terminating resistor across RDA and RDB and across SDA and SDB respectively RS422 connection diagram 4 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC GOT side side terminal block SDA1 1 gt _ gt RDA SDB1 2 EM RDB RDA1 k SDA RDB1 4 SDB SDA2 5 SG SDB2 6 FG RDA2 7 RDB2 8 i RSA 9 i RSB 10 csa CSB 12 SG 13 NC 14 fuge emn Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 500m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC
256. Commun connectable 3 2 Model BER Cable model Max den O Series Connection diagram A ication ML Option device Model equipme distance Connection diagram number distance number Type H E GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m um 164 15 oos 55 Built into gt lt Us 1 RS485 connection or cece diagram 19 1200m ML2 85 232 15m GOT RS232 connection controllers UT35A 4 wire type 4 diagram 1 UT55A GT15 RS2 9P GI UT75A UP35A pr GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Up to 31 UP55A Built into RS485 connection or t t UM33A 4 di 20 1200m ML2 RS 232 15m GOT emperature T Aa 9567 88232 connection controllers ci 2 wire type ELI for 1 GOT zu diagram 1 or 5 GT15 RS2 9P 99 GT GT UT52A GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Built int Up to 31 5 5485 connection ST 5 55 5 preparing or GOT temperature 6 diagram 12 1200m ML2 RS 232 15m i UP55A 55 89232 connection controllers 2 wire type for 1 GOT Em UM33A diagram 1 or zum GT15 RS2 9P GA Gi opi LL 5 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation m E For 2 to 7 only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected a 5 Suffix code Annotation Optional suffix code Remark Function Open network i
257. Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable b GT14 GT11 GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 Q For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC side When connecting an LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected gt 12 3 2 RS 422 cable m Connection diagram 12 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 3 Connection Diagram 12 4 GOT Side Settings 5 FE 12 4 1 Setti JE 4 etung communication 9 12 4 2 Communication detail settings 6552 interface Communication zee Make the settings according to the usage environment Bes settings Property Value Transmission Speed BP5 38400 Set the channel of the connected equipment PUB ata Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Eu Parity None D Retry Times 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Dp z Controller Setting Host Address 0 5 4 9 A Rr risum Delay Time ms 0 Dm CH 3 None o CH 4 None Controller Type LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Ethene id Standard 1 85232 tj Routing Information Gatewa
258. Connection CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO ra O KZ ra TO 95 ra aos CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER HITACHI IES PLC YOKOGAWA PLC 12 GT1050 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch resistor setting switch Nb U 1100 OPEN 3309 d Terminating resistor selector switch cr11 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch GT1040 Terminating resistor selector switch
259. Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 11 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 GOT side Communication Modules CD NC 1 1 SHILD RD RXD 2 ke 2 TD SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 4 RTS SG 5 7 SG DR DSR L s RS RTS 7 8 DCD CS CTS k 20 DTR NC Dm FG RS232 connection diagram 2 GOT side PLC CD NC 1 RD RXD 2 k LJ 4 TxD SD TXD 3 gt RXD ER DTR 4 1 SG 5 8 GND DR DSR 6 z r 2 CTS RS RTS 7 5 DCD CS CTS 8 6 DTR NC 9 j 7 5V FG 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual gt GE PLC user s Manual Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 4 connector specifications 3 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 9 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 3 2 RS 422 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 Communication Module TERM RD B
260. Controller Side Setting 5 5 6 Connecting to interface converter KS 485 5 5 7 Connecting to interface converter K3SC 10 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps Terminating resistor Nu ON OFF selection 1 Set as necessary Settings by switch RS 485 417 setting switch e PENIS Be oe RS 232C Front Rear 1 Settings of transmission speed and terminating resistor Setting item Transmission speed selection Switch No Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the DIP switch of the temperature controller Item Transmission speed 1 Data bit Set value 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 8bits Parity bit Odd even none Stop bit Abit Communication Type RS 232C RS 485 Set value 9600bps ON OFF ON 4 5 ON Terminating Enable ON ON resistor selection 1 2 5 16 Disable Set as necessary Disabled OFF OFF Echo back Without 1 Make the same setting as that of GOT side Settings by DIP switch SG RDA 50 D1 12 NC RDB 08 WR RD SD 0000 K3SC 10 INTERFACE CONVERTER
261. D2 Se 1 1 i zo RS RTS 7 6 RV1 ER RSA RTS Ze OT CS CTS 9 4 RS RSB RTS 10 Sel IRRE k 5 CSB CTS 2 bt 2 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC SG 1 RS232 connection diagram 2 NC 14 ni 1 1 2 a GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side Shel 5 3 CD NC 4 1 LC RD RXD 2 SD RS422 connection diagram 2 ls GOT side HITACHI IES PLC side SD TXD 3 gt 3 RD RDA TXDP ER DTR 4 r e 7 RV2 DR 65h i RDB TXDN lt a SG 5 9 SG omo SDA RXDP gas DR DSR 6 1 i gt 5 CS SDB RXDN RS RTS 7 6 RV1 ER RSA TXDG CS CTS 4 RS RSB S 9 8 PHL 63 CSA 5 z 14 ER E i CSB 93 PE AEAEE FG FG 25 2 20 1 6716 CD GT15 CD GT14 GT12 NC GT11 NC Ss SG RXDG Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length FG go The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less ES 2 GOT side connector 86 For the GOT side connector refer to the following Zg _ 5 1 4 1GOT connector specifications Oe 3 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module a For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s es manual ecu 558 S98 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 5 2 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing a cable 1 C
262. DB2 TXD2 RDA2 RXD2 RDB2 RXD2 RSA RTS RSB RTS CSA CTS CSB CTS SG SHLD Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 1 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 10 terminating resistor 120072 gt lt d du foo Bog w p os s x cr o o Oo o 90 m 2 Ice Eee pede Ee p 1 1 1 1 e 1 1 1 RM MES a CET 1 HEP Lar as ea se 1 OL NOLLO3NNOO ov RTS A tc Communication Module RD B RD A SD B SD A RTS B CTS B SHLD terminating resistor 12002 Module 24 Communication Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS422 connection diagram 3 GOT side wo Sze es 8 cue a Wo e Ro oGCau OG OQ Y 9 o 5 ERX EEE c 55854252 88
263. DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication a port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in With Omg the E3 terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication _ With port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 2 m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 25 Terminating resistor 5 Temperature 2200 1 4W Temperature GOT side controller 4 ____ _____ controller S k SDB SDA1 TXD1 1 F e SDB 1 1 SDA 1 1 SDB1 TXD1 2 x o SDA 59 ba ba ba ba roo SG 13 Y RDB RDB 5 toy RDA1
264. E T 100BASE TX standards 2 2 2 Alength between hub and a node E g 9 The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used E The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used m 10BASE T 4 nodes for cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 connecting GT16 of the function version to an equipment that meets the 10BASE 2 5 standard use the switching 5 hub and operate a 10Mbps 100Mbps mixed environment m lt For how to check the function version refer to the following Es 5 GT16 User s Manual Hardware Zn 4 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBDE G lt YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 25 4 3 Ethernet Connection 4 3 2 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Controler Sed Q CH 1 FUJI MICREX SX CH 2 None 3 None CH 4 None Controller Type FUJI MICREX SX SPH Networ Bhemet Standard F Ethemet
265. E71 100 Ethernet 100Base TX unit 1 18 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 3 2 Option unit n4 9 LL Product name Model Specifications 2o cz Printer unit GT15 PRN USB slave PictBridge for connecting printer 1 ch E 5 Multimedia unit GT16M MMR For video input signal NTSC PAL 1 ch playing movie S z GT16M V4 Ec Video input unit For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch GT15V 75V4 GT16M R2 RGB input unit For analog RGB input signal 2 ch 9 GT15V 75R1 22 ol GT16M VAR1 EZ Video RGB input unit For video input signal NTSC PAL 4 ch for analog RGB mixed input signal 1 ch GT15V 75V4R1 zo E GT16M ROUT RGB output unit For analog RGB output signal 1 ch GT15V 75ROUT CF card unit GT15 CFCD For CF card installation B drive For GOT back face CF card eject 5 CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8SET For CF card installation B drive For control panel front face CF card eject z T Sound output unit GT15 SOUT For sound output a GT15 DIOR For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Negative Common E lt Input Source Type Output E External I O unit GT45 DIO For the connection to external I O device or operation panel Positive Common Input Sink Type Output 2 1 3 3 Conversion cable i o 25 T
266. EAE ransmission Utility the latest setting is effective hi ec 59 speed 273 57600bps OT Data bit 8bits Stop bit 1bit Parity bit Even 5 Error check CRC16 1 Set the address according to the Host Address setting on the 8 GOT side OQ For the Host Address setting on the GOT side refer to the Es following 5 5 3 6 2 8 Communication detail settings ou 2 Only transmission speeds available on the GOT side are shown Also the setting range differs depending on the YASKAWA 3 PLC model 3 transmission speed setting must be consistent with that m of the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to 2 the following 9 g g 6 2 8 Communication detail settings 2 oro 9 Po 2 On os Eier Ze 5 os CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 17 6 2 Serial Connection 0000 gt 0000 NL 1 0001 gt 0001 NL 2 0002 gt 0002 NL 2 0003 gt 0003 NL 2 0004 gt 0004 NL 2 0005 gt 0005 NL 2 0006 gt 0006 NL 2 0007 gt 0007 NL 2 0008 gt 0008 NL 2 0009 gt 0009 NL 2 6 18 Sequence program To communicate the YASKAWA PLCs with the GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive messages is required The following shows an example ladder program for MP2000 series ladder program to receive massage
267. ERING COMPANY LIMITED z 5 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into Sz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 9 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to communication extension module Z COM with converter Connection cable 2 z H H terminating resistor Connection cable 1 Z COM Connection cable 1 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 GOT e umber TR del Model Terminating Sable Model Communic Option Connection diagram 3 Connection diagram i Model equipment name resistor distance name ation Type distance device quip number number B Up to 16 Z Built LU EP coms 7 7 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BF 28 0500 0 5m into GOT for 1 GOT W BF 02 1000 1m W BF 28 1000 1m Z TIO Up to 16 BF 02 BF 28 ES Z CT Up to 16 z com w Bw o2 VBF 0230005m 4200m RS 232 9 28 30008m 15m a ato or or DIO RS422 RS232 GTi 2n connection diagram 3 connection diagram 2 RS2 9P 164 15 c DIO Up to 31 for Z COM 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 10 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting directly to communica
268. FF OFF specification setting RS485 ON ON Enable ON Termination resistor setting Disable 2 OFF 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 18 Station number setting Set each station number so that no station number overlaps The station number can be set without regard to the cable connection order There is no problem even if station numbers are not consecutive Station Statio No 3 No 10 Station No 6 Station No 15 n Station No 1 Examples of 1 Direct specification The station number setting range of the temperature controller side differs from that of the GOT side Specify the station No of the temperature controller to be changed when setting devices referring the following ion number setting table Module address GOT side emperature setting of station Remark controller temperature number controller side setting H PCP J H PCP A OtoF 11016 The GOT alee station H PCP B Hexadecimal Decimal number setting is the module Z TIO address setting value 1 Z COM The GOT sid ti 0toF Coa M saon Z DIO number setting is the module Hexadecimal Decimal address setting value 17 The GOT sid ti OtoF 33to48 S 77 Sice stanon Z CT Hexadecimal Decimal number setting is the module address
269. GD11 1 to 99 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error occurs 115 GD25 Device settings of RKC temperature controller Network dioit E Set by a value of unit address 1 For unit address 0 Set 1 For unit address F Set 16 9 50 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 9 6 1 RKC SR Mini HG Device No Device name Setting range 1 representation Tm ra E tr ra 0 3 O 9 ae 57 Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices Bit device Data 0000 to FFFF Hexadecimal Word device ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC 07 Precautions Station number setting of the temperature controller system Make sure to establish temperature controller system with No 01 station CONNECTION TO GE PLC ll GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment By setting GOT internal device GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller For example faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC gt GT De
270. GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Before mounting an optional function board or Multi color display board wear a static discharge wrist strap to prevent the board from being damaged by static electricity Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in the User s Manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT When loading the communication unit or option unit to the GT16 GT15 fit it to the extension interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit When mounting the multi color display board onto the GOT GT15 connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Loose tightening may cause the unit and or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact Overtightening may damage the screws unit and or they might malfunction When mounting the option function board o
271. GOT1000 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 gt 20 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT1695 GT1695M X Abbreviation of GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD GT1685 GT1685M S Abbreviation of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD GT1675M S Abbreviation of GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD GT1675 GT1675M V Abbreviation of GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VN Abbreviation of GT1675 VNBA GT1675 VNBD GT1672 GT1672 VN Abbreviation of GT1672 VNBA GT1672 VNBD GT1665M S Abbreviation of GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD GT1665M V Abbreviation of GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD GT1662 GT1662 VN Abbreviation of GT1662 VNBA GT1662 VNBD GT1655 GT1655 V Abbreviation of GT1655 VTBD GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT16 Handy GOT GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD a GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1570 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD 2782 GT1
272. GT1150 QLBD E or earlier 10 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 25 9 2 System Configuration ra B tr O 9 S2 ac ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 9 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the temperature controller 9 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular connector 1 CD 1 E UTE 1 NC RD RXD 2 k 2 SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 5 NC SG 5 EE SG DR DSR k 5 6 sc RS RTS 7 CS CTS _ 9 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 2 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller RS232 connection diagram 2 RKC temperature controller side RS RTS 7 CS CTS GOT side Modular connector 1 cD 1 1 NC RD RXD 2 amp i 2 sD SD TXD 3 RD ER DTR 4 5 NC SG 5 3 56 i 1 DR DSR 6 6 CS
273. I HIDIC HITACHI HIDIC Protocol2 Connection cable F To use transmission control procedure 2 S a as protocol select HITACHI HIDIC H 9 H Protocol2 as a communication driver n 9 E PLC Connection cable GOT Sx Intelligent C Number or eee Calie mot Max connectable name 4 Connection diagram number distance P equipment module Type H 2 aug 7 T 7022 Built into GOT cm E 1002 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 2002 2 RS 232 or 15m 29 B User i E H 300 RS232 connection diagram 1 amp 03 15 H 700 H 2000 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or Ys t RS232 connection T diagram 1 Built into cm Gm n Specified transmission speed 2 19200bps o2 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 1 GOT for 1 PLC 232 connection diagram 2 Specified transmission speed 4010 RS 232 38400bps 15 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m ea I or Ys t RS232 connection Q 9 diagram 2 Zee Transmission speed other than GT RES GT15 RS2 9P the above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or Ys t RS232 connection diagram 1 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 20 232 connection diagram 2 5 GT GT GT 20 GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m Built into GOT 8 5 RS 232 15 E Yser RS232 connection diagr
274. KOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 7 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 5 System configuration for connecting to CP 9200SH CP 317 Communication driver Communication driver Erem YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS YASKAWA MP For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 For GT10 d Connection cable Connection cable GOT umber gomman Cable model connectable Model name 3 Max distance Option device Model module Connection diagram number equipment Type GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m Differs according Built into GOT 2171 71050 CN1 RS 232 Gs RS232 connection diagram 9 specifications Seda zm connection GT15 RS2 9P User i i RS232 connection diagram same as above Built into GOT 10 or CP 9200SH CP 317 communication module CP 217IF GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m Built into GOT CN2 RS 232 or same as above CET connection 5 5 8232 connection diagram 5 1045 GT15 RS2 9P 2171 2 RS 232 055 8232 connection diagram 8 same above Built into GOT connection 51 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 6 8 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6
275. LC 2 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 3 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC rtt tette n eret acre 12 3 CONNECTION TO MURATEC i tet etna 16 2 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER tenentes 9 4 CONNECTION SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 2 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS 14 3 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 3 6 20 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 7 16 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 T Temperature Controller Side Setting CONNECTION TO FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 7 5 13 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 39 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 33 Terminating resistors of 1 31 Y YASKAWA PLC CP 312 6 20 6 8 92008 2 2 4 2 1 6 8 6 20 GL120 61130 00 6 3 GL60S GL60H 6 4 MP2200 MP2300 6 9 6 20 920 nnr 6 5 6 20 MP 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H PROGIC S iiti rri ed dee feda 6 5 Miles io 6 7 YOKOGAWA PLC PASO 7 5 7 3 7 16 STARDOM aeei ee 7 5 YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER GREEN Series
276. LNOILO3NNOO OL NOILOANNOO OL NOLLO3NNOO eo e F Tr gt E E x WEN 252 EIS 2 MEE oj i i i i gt 2 i T T a ma A I P S 5 c 0 rc 2 5 5 o o 0 5 2 5 8 S z Pis qm c gt o wn Lu Z N 2 b wr wr wr 14 1 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Ethernet Communicatio Type RS 232 57 14 2 2 SIMATIC 57 200 Eth t uis communication x LOS 14 3 2 RS 232 x 57 14 2 1 SIMATIC 87 300 o WRITE ojo x x x x 07374434 Ethernet p communication 97 14 3 2 RS 232 x 371424 FETCH SIMATIC 57 400 WRITE 7 37 14 3 1 Ethernet pd O x x x communication Los 14 3 2 SIMATIC 57 1200 Ethernet Sr communication x x x x 2714 32 1 Not available with the Ethernet connection 2 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1
277. La20 La21 1022 1923 1024 1025 1026 1027 24 103 0 193 1 103 2 193 3 La3 4 1035 1036 1037 Device of SICK Flexi Soft 32 Z Only reading is possible for all devices d Logic input LI Offset 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 102 110 3 105 106 107 5 9 o 8 uto uaa 14 2 urs ut4 14 5 ute utz 2 16 120 12 1 112 2 123 12 4 125 112 6 1127 o 2 24 130 2 3 3 uas 137 On 32 Device range error e EFI input EI Offset 0 1 2 3 8 to 15 2 0 EM10 EM11 EM12 E1113 TE 16 E1120 E124 E122 E123 SEg E 32 EM30 E134 1132 E133 5 ua 48 Fixed to 0 5 S Fixed to 0 QEZ 240 256 210 E1211 E1242 1213 272 220 1221 E1222 1223 288 E1230 E1231 E1232 E1233 Device range error E 302 Device range error z 55 2 13 CONNECTION SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 7 13 6 Device Range That Can Be Set 13 8 13 CONNECTION SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 6 Device Range That Can Be Set UATIONLNOO 39 SWALSAS 957109109 EE els H3 TIOHINOO ONH SBITIOMINOO JdHnivsadiWal oM AQ31QVH8 N3TIV OL NOLLO3NNOO 15 AL34VS MOIS OL NOILLO3NNOO NOILVHOdHOO V LVHIH OL NOLLO3NNOO OL NOILOANNOO OL NOILOANNOO STlO
278. MICREX F Series Device No Device name Setting range bun 9 representation relay B0000 to B511F Auxiliary relay M 0000 to M511F Keep relay K K0000 to Special relay F F0000 to F125F Decimal A iat Hexadecimal nnunciator relay A0000 to AO4SE A Differential relay D D0000 to DO63F Link memory L 0000 to L511F ia Timer output a 000 to T511 0 01s T Timer output Decimal T512 to 999 0 15 Counter output C000 to C511 Specified bit of the following word devices Word device bit Direct access user file relay WB WBO000 to WB511 Auxiliary relay WM WM000 to WM511 Keep relay WK WKO00 to WK063 Decimal Special relay WF WFO000 to WF125 Annunciator relay WAO00 to WA045 WA Differential relay WD000 to WD063 WD Link memory WL WLOO0 to WL511 Decimal Direct access 97 W24 0000 to W24 0255 W24 User file W30 467 User file W31 4 67 W30 0000 to W30 4095 8 W31 0000 to W31 4095 User file w108 467 W108 0000 to W108 4095 User file W109 0000 to W109 4095 w109 467 Data memory BDO to BD4095 BD Timer set value 2 3 TSO to 75511 Decimal 0 01s TS Timer current value 3 TRO to TR511 0 01s TR Timer current value 3 W9 0000 to W9 0487 0 1s W9 Counter set value 123 CS0 to 5511 CS Counter current 253 CRO to CR511 value CR 4 30 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 4 Device Range that Ca
279. Model code Stored in DVD ROM JY997D24701 GT10 User s Manual 09R819 QUICK REFERENCE Creating a project Obtaining the specifications operation methods of GT Designer3 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 3 Designer3 1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT a Obtaining useful functions to increase efficiency drawing Setting details for figures and objects GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Setting functions for the data collection or trigger action 1 2 2 2 Setting functions to use peripheral devices Simulating a created project on a personal computer GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Connecting a controller to the GOT Obtaining information of Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT Connecting Mitsubishi products to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for Connecting multiple controllersto one GOT Multi channel function GT Works3 Establishing communication between a personal computer and a controller via the GOT FA transparent function Obtaining information of Non Mitsubishi products applicable to the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Connecting Non Mitsubishi products to the GOT Products 2 for GT Works3
280. Muti 3 Ei Routing information 5 66 Gateway Communication Se Tons FTP GOT PLC No 18 Q Redundant EL Ae A Station No Switching IP Label D Buffer Memory Unit No 51 Subnet Mask 2552552550 Defaut Gateway 0000 Elhemet Download Port No GOT Communication Port No Retry Times Startup Time Sec 192168318 Timeout Time Sec Delay 10 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer FUJI Controller Type FUJI MICREX SX I F Interface to be used Driver Ethernet FUJI Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 237 m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 communication setting 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 3 Ethernet Connection Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 IP Label Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Ethemet Download Port No 5014 GOT C
281. N Irn3 OL NOLLO3NNOO N 1 liil Z3 wz K i o i 5 O 0 Lr o LLI YATIOULNOD T OL NOILOANNOO 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set OI NOLLO3NNOO VWV9OMOA YATIOULNOD OL NOILOANNOO FYNLWHAdWAL OL 01193 09 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 The following table shows the connectable models Connectable Model List Model name Clock Communication Refer to dps 37624 GL60S GL60H x kae 737622 GL70H MP920 MP930 CP 9300MS x iE 737 6 3 CP 9200 H PROGIC 8 MP940 x en 57624 CP 9200SH RS 232 O O 2 6 2 5 2200 2300 dips lt gt 6 2 6 MP2300S MP920 MP2200 MP2300 MP2300S x Ethernet 3 634 CP 9200SH CP 312 CP 317 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBDE 6 2 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 1 Connectable Model List 6 2 Serial Connection
282. NNECTION TO SYSTEMS PLC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485V Connection Connection cable 2 0 cable 1 Temperature P Connection cable 1 Converter 1 Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable mosta Cable model connectable Connection Max Model Communication Model name Connection Option device Model equipment diagram distance name Type distance 4 diagram number number p to User RS485 User RS232 GT GT amp 1 1200 2 RS 232 15 Built into GOT temperature connection m CD485 V connection m controllers for 4 diagram 8 diagram 3 Eau GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 9 24 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 11 Connecting to B400 Communication driver Ce RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 oda Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT VE Vere umber Model Commun Cable model Cable model elem connectable 8 ication Connection diagram Connecti
283. O series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 MODEL SW1 GTD3 U CON3 E MODEL 1D7MC4 SH NA 080870ENG V 1504 MEE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan April 2015
284. ONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H GL70H Connection cable Communication driver Loz YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS PLC Connection cable GOT Number of connectable Model MEMoBus Commun Cable model Max n ication pes Option device Model equipment name module T Connection diagram number distance ype GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m ners Built i Gi JAMSC IF60 Lo a accordingto 7 P t into GOT JAMSC IF61 PLC side Use Serial 5558232 connection diagram 1 specifications GT15 RS2 9P GL60S same as 2 aie 52 88422 connection diagram 1 above Built into GOT 4 GOT for 1 MEMOBUS GL70H GT16 C02R4 9S module GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m 0 2m JAMSC IF612 8 422 GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m 35 7 i GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m meas GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m above GT15 RS4 9S or GT GT 8 65422 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT GT 1 Product manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 6 4 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 3 System configuration for connecting to 920 930 CP 9300MS 9200 H or
285. PLCs refer to the following Command setting type start stop MODE manuals synchronization nonsequence format gt FUJI PLC user s Manual Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Sus ET Si Data bit 8bits or 7bits 5 Refer to Even or Odd 5 Parity bit 1 5 5 232 m Connecting to Done None gt lt NV1L RS2 S interface card NV1L RS2 NC1L Stop bit bit 2bits NC1L RS2 RS2 Initializing method By switch General purpose interface NC1L RS4 m Connecting to 1 the settings with GOT settings NC1L RS4 module E BEIGE Connecting to 2 Settings by switch Zo FFU120B Make the communication settings using each setting a oS RS 232C 485 i switch 1 FFK120A C10 m Connecting to 2 9 interface capsule FFK120A C10 For the NV1L RS2 For the NC1L RS2 RUN Character configuration RS2 SND o switches 50 8 RCV ES Operation mode setting switch ge zu Front view Rear view Front view Rear view 3 a Setting of the MODE 5 the MODE settings using the MODE switch EN ogo 5 Switch position ae MODE 686 NV1L RS2 NC1L RS2 MODE Command setting type start stop 1 synchronization nonsequence format lt sj Oa lt 25 5 v os CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 19 4
286. R41301 9S 10m 165 RS 422 GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P 2 GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m 500m GT15 RS4 9S 88422 connection diagram preparing t 2 Built into GOT 1 Product manufactured by Hitachi Ltd For details of the product contact Hitachi Ltd 2 Connectit to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 3 4 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 2 System Configuration 3 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING GOT and the PLC 3 3 2 RS 422 cable 3 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS422 connection diagram 1 Connection diagram GOT side PLC side 22 H RS232 connection diagram 1 SDA1 TXD1 2 RD H 5 gt the GT16 6 15 GOT side SDB1 TXD1 1 RD L R zo D sub 9 pin PLC side RDA1 RXD1 3 SD H T cD 1 RS RDB1 RXD1 4 504 1 RD RXD 2 80 SDA2 TXD2 6 1 1 SD TXD 3 2 RD SDB2 TXD2 7 ATT H 1 zs ER DTR 4 1 9 DR RDA2 RXD2 8 o9 1 1 Ka SG 5 h L 5 SG RDB2 RXD2 9 n T DR DSR 4 RSA RTS s sc 1 RS RTS 7 Tt 1 RSB RTS CS CTS 8 CS CSA CTS
287. RATURE CONTROLLER Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed communication mode data length parity bit and stop bit COM PORT3 COM PORT1 COM PORT2 COM PORT1 COM PORT2 setting switch SW2 z Co Co 8796 2 COM PORT3 setting switch SW3 z Co ooo 9219S8vt cl Right side 1 Transmission speed settings COM PORT1 COM PORT2 Sw2 Communication speed 3 4 OFF OFF 9600bps ON OFF 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps b COM PORT3 SW3 Communication speed 3 4 OFF OFF 9600bps ON OFF 19200bps OFF ON 38400bps 9 39 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting ra Sr aa zx oz 9 2 ae ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATACORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 2 Communication mode settings 9 5 2 Connecting to H PCP A H a COM PORT1 COM PORT2 PCP B 2 E E E Communication protocol a Communication settings ON OFF OFF OFF MODBUS protocol Make the communication settings of the temperature controller b COM PORT3 Item Setting range HE Communication p
288. RIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 6 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 8 4 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 2 Connecting to UT100 Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Communication driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced m Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature RS232C RS485 Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Number of Cable model TEE Commun Cable model Ni connectable Series Connection diagram ication Connection diagram SEa Option device Model equipment distance name distance number Type number Built into 52783232 97100 connection diagram 1200m ML2 RS 232 ee 15 controllers for 1 Serial GOT 12 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation When connecting directly Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT a Number of connectable S
289. ROLLER HITACHI IES PLC 9 a lt lt 9 9 gt 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 14 System configuration for connecting to FA M3 M3V Communication driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Ethernet k Maximum Number of connectable Mosel interface Cable model segment Option device Model equipment name 4 Connection diagram number 3 module length 5 05 GJA F3SP08 Built into GOT Wh i ic N PLC GOT is 1 F3FP36 The following shows the F3SP21 number of PLCs for 1 GOT 5 25 F3LEO1 5T For GT16 GT14 gt F3LE11 0T 4OBASE T 128 or less r3gp3g FStE12 0T Shielded twisted pair cable STP or cak F3SP53 unshielded twisted pair cable UTP 10 rises F3SP58 Category 3 4 and 5 100m UDP 128 or less prem GT15 J71E71 100 F3SP76 7S Shielded twisted pair cable STP 15 When PLC GOT is 1 N F3SP71 4S F3LE11 0T Category 5 and 5e The following shows the F3SP66 number of GOTs for 1 PLC F3SP67 TCP 8 or less F3SP71 4N _ UDP 128 or less F3SP76 7S recommended to 16 or less F3SP71 4S 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet net
290. RS 485 4 wire type S01 FA LTBGTR4CBL05 0 5m ser t i pua RS485 connection diagram 14 1200m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m 3 4 wire type FA LTBGTRACBL20 2mY Up to 16 temperature d controllers for 1 GOT User want RS485 connection diagram 18 4200m GT15 RS4 TE 4 wire type User 55485 connection diagram 22 1200m GT14 RS2T4 9P4 4 wire type 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 3 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 8 6 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration 8 2 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series 2 When using the RS232C RS485 converter Po cz Communication driver OS 22 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 aos UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable 2 222 815 p 25 Connection cable 1 Or Tem t 5232 5485 Ma Connection cable 1 4 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Number of Cable model
291. S FOR MONITORING 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel setting Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT Setting Controller Setting QD CH 1 MELSEC Rn 2 The Controller Setting dialog box appears Select the channel No to be used from the list menu 3 Refer to the following explanations for the setting Channel No 2 to No 4 Use the channel No 2 to No 4 when using the Multi channel function For details of the Multi channel function refer to the following gt Mitsubishi Products 20 MULTI CHANNEL FUNCTION es aS 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Setting item This section describes the setting items of the Manufacturer Controller Type Driver and I F When using the channel No 2 to No 4 put a check mark at Use CH CH 1 MELSEC Rn Q CH 2 None Manufacturer MITSUBISHI Z CH 3 None CH 4 None Controller MELSECiG R RnMT Network Duplex Setting Standard F Ethemet Muti Bhemet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 GOT No Fl Transfer FTP GOT PLC No lly Q Redundant GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 AQ Station No Switching IP Label X Buffer Memory Unit No Si Subnet Mask 2552552550 Default Gateway 0000 Ethemet Download Po
292. Sacom corp For details of the product contact System Sacom corp Lu ne E sa o ae YOKOGAWA PLC YASKAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 5 2 System Configuration When connecting via RS 485 communication Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of Model Communic Cable model Max opion device Model connectable name ation Type Connection diagram number distance equipment teft RS485 connection diagram 5 500m Built into GOT FA LTBGTRACBLO5 0 5m 2 User i i 1 2 16 PXR3 gea RS485 connection diagram 4 500m FA LTBGTRACBL 10 1m Up to 31 PXR4 FA LTBGTRACBL20 2m temperature PXR5 22 Gi controllers PXR9 929783485 connection diagram 6 500m GT15 RS4 TE for 1 GOT 95785485 connection diagram 8 500m Built into GOT pet x 14 995485 connection diagram 9 500m GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT
293. Select Common Controller Setting from the default value is set 5 gr menu Default 255 255 255 0 2 5 Set the router address of the default 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Default gateway where the GOT is TO channel to be used from the list menu Gateway connected Only for connection via 255 255 255 255 router e 3 Set the following items Default 0 0 0 0 Sr Manufacturer SIEMENS 2 OLD E Controller Type Depends on Ethernet connection Set the GOT port for Ethernet 5023 to 65534 Ug E type Download Port download Except for 5011 E 5 No Default 5014 5012 5013 and Ono FETCH WRITE SIEMENS 57 Ethernet 2 SIEMENS Ethernet Sat the GOT port No for the nterface to be used connection with the Ethernet Driver Depends on Ethernet connection type module 1024 to 5010 2 FETCH WRITE Ethernet SIEMENS 57 Gateway GOT oc 2029410 65594 59 OP communication Ethernet SIEMENS Communication Ethernet SIEMENS 7 Gateway Fo Port No 5012 5013 and T2 Gateway 5023 49153 2 Ethernet SIEMENS OP Gateway 5 5 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer 5024 On Controller Type I F and Driver are set Specify the time period from the i i i GOT start til GOT starts th Make the settings according to the usage environment Startup Time Startup until GOT starts the 1 255 sec 2 E co
294. Select the communication format S 9 Default 1 The settings of connecting equipment can be Formati confirmed in I F Communication Setting Format pices DIS To PARIPXG PXH ue E For details refer to the following 5 Accessible to PXR PXG ui gt 1 12 I F communication setting Not accessible to PXH Loe o gt 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 11 5 4 GOT Side Settings 1 Host address Do not specify a number between 200 and 215 2 Format When connecting to PXH specify the format 1 When connecting to only PXR PXG specifying the format 2 is recommended 3 Delay Time Set the delay time to 5ms or more 4 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt Users Manual 5 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 5 12 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 4 GOT Side Settings 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting a 5g 55 5 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 or PXG9 592 KES 1 FUJI
295. T10 Abbreviation of GT105L1 GT1040 GT1030 GT1020 Abbreviations and generic terms Description Abbreviation of GT1665HS VTBD GT16 Handy GT1665HS V Handy GOT 8071000 Feta GT1155HS Q Series Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD Handy GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication unit GT15 J71GP23 SX CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z Interface converter unit GT15 75IF900 Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M Connection Conversion Adapter RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S GT14 RS2T4 9P
296. T15 RS2 9P 4 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT 5 232 485 interface T Cable mogel Max Option device Model i aide name 4 Connection diagram number distance equipment capsule Type GT GT GT 120 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m Built into GOT 140 FFK120A C10 RS 232 or 15m F150S 9232 connection diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 4 8 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs using RS 232C 485 interface capsules Ge Connection cable orz TO E E Ugo aos zo 9 p OS 22 6E Connection cable GOT 2 RS 232C 485 Number of Cable mogel Max Option device Model alma Connection diagram number distance P equipment T capsule Type zo za 5 5 RS485 connection diagram 8 F pm 500m Built into GOT 1 GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 500m GT16 CO2R4 9S 0 2m 1 GOT for up to 6 1205 GT09 C100R41001 6T 10m a PLCs RS 232C 5 F140S
297. TIO SA100 SA200 AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 SG 25 13 25 44 13 3 17 1 10 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 1 16 2 11 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 2 15 3 12 4 following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector Modular connector pin No 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 9 RS485 connection diagram 10 ra RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side RKC temperature controller side Modular 1 Modular 1 GOT side Modular connector Sox m cc WP a TRO 2 2 TRO SDA TRB T R A 1 1 T R A SDB TIR A Q 5 1 1 1 02 5 SG 3 3 SG RDA NC 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 RDB NC 122 LINE 1 I N C 5 5 N C SG SG gt SG 6 6 SG e sc 5 8 o5 1 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following 1 Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of Dp z manual he RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows wi W 2 Wwi i e 77 3 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller 2 ua e type Pain lt
298. TS 16 2 zzz CSB CTS Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W mo NC 1 NC 3 NC 4 SDA2 TXD2 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 RDA2 RXD2 9 Oa RDB2 RXD2 11 5 5 NC 13 o 5 15 17 os NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller e 2 GREEN Series GREEN Series an Paana UT UP UM US o 5 5 ot Pin No Pin No zo SDB 23 21 5 SDA 24 22 gt 25 23 2 RDA 26 24 a SG 27 25 5 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal o2 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal E 2 m Connecting terminating resistors 5 3 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line iO gt 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 11 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 12 RS485 connection diagram 3 GOT side Temperature ____ __ _ __ _ iJ conten RDA1 RXD1 Li i SDB RDB1 RXD1 4 V 7 E SDA SDA1 TXD1 4 H T a 7 7 RDB SDB1 TXD1 2 EJ o J 7 RDA SG 13 E E NE 6 RSA RTS 9 Mu i Dom UE T CSA CTS 11 aot m Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W CSB CTS 2 6 SDA2 TXD2
299. TXD1 2 Li LL T SG SG ty SG SG RDA1 RXD1 3 la m 9 1 RDB1 RXD1 4 E hd IE A xO SDA2 TXD2 5 T Combination module Combination module pd 4 SDB2 TXD2 6 n RDA2 RXD2 7 i 2 RDB2 RXD2 8 X E pag Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W RSA RTS 9 pag lt d More than 1000 in case of CB series pn RSB RTS 10 nib 1 4 CSA CTS 11 E Zio CSB CTS 12 ke Sam 1 SG 13 E NC 14 1 Shell 1 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT as follows gt GT16 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM 7 Connecting terminating resistors 9 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the m communication terminal on the both end of the combination module resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 2 4 terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table e Terminal 5 2 Signal ihe Z TIO CB100 CB400 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 bro CB700 RB700
300. Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature controller controller controller n controller TIR B TIR B TEI 2073 TR TIR B TIR A it TR TIR A it it SG SG La Ii SG SG 1 1 PO d Jd INS NET Terminating resistor 120Q 1 2W More than 1000 in case of CB series Combination module E 4 oA When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 3 the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No Signal name ZTIO CB100 CB400 5700 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 00 2 CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 SG 5 13 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 name PF901 900 901 MA900 MA901 RMC500 THV A1 X
301. The communication type of the GOT standard interface is displayed Driver Set the driver for the device to be connected None Host PC Each communication driver for connected devices Detail Setting Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver L3 Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the GOT RS232 Setting To validate the 5V power supply function in RS232 mark the Enable the 5V power supply checkbox The RS232 setting is invalid in the following cases CH No of I F 1 RS232 is 9 in GT15 and 16 CH No of I F 1 RS232 is 9 or 8 in GT14 For GT12 GT11 and GT10 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface Item Description Extend Setting Set the communication unit attached to the extension interface of the GOT Set the CH No according to the intended purpose The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel CH No setting 5 to 7 Used for barcode reader connection RFID connection and PC remote operation connection For the gateway function MES interface function Ethernet download report function hard copy For printer output video RGB input RGB output multimedia function ra O KZ ra TO We 95 ra as
302. Time Sec 3 Delay Time ms 0 Station No Selection Item Description Range Set this it h th is i Bm when change the 4800bps os transmission speed used for Transmission EE 9600bps communication with the connected Speed equipment 19200bps 384006 Default 19200bps ps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with x Data Bit Tbit fixed the connected equipment Default 7bit Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity check and how it is performed during communication Default Even Parity Even fixed Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication error occurs Default Otime Retry 0 to 5times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the GOT Default Oms 0 to 300 ms Specify whether to use the station No during communication If Yes is selected the station No 1 Yes or No fixed to 0 Default Yes Station No Selection 2 8 2 CONNECTION HITACHI IES PLC 2 4 GOT Side Settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Se
303. Transfer FTP Redundant AD Station No Switching Standard 1 5232 HITACHI 510 510 Delay Time ms 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer HITACHI Controller Type HITACHI S10mini S10V Interface to be used Driver HITACHI S10mini S10V 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment gt 3 4 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 communication setting Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Data Bit Stop Bit Parity Transmission Speed BPS Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Value 13200 8 bit 1 bit Odd ow Item Description Range Set this item when change the 9600bps Transmission transmission speed used for 19200bps Speed communication with the connected 38400bps equipment 57600bps Default 19200bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connecte
304. Ute PF900 RS422 0 5m 1000m R amp 232 W BF 28 3000 3m ibm T temperature PF901 connection diagram 4 W BF 01 1000 1m or controllers W BF 01 3000 3m for 1 GOT R232 GT15 RS2 9P connection diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485 V Sae Connection cable 2 588 Connection cable 1 Temperature 5 A Connection cable 1 Interface converter Connection cable 2 GOT m Max Number of connectable Model Cable model distance Model Commun Cable modal Mews equipment Connection diagram d ication Connection diagram dista Option device Model number Type number nce PF900 PF901 Built into 400 401 6741 HA900 8 RS485 1200m CD485V RS 232 28 RS232 15m 901 Connection diagram 8 connection diagram 3 controllers for 1 GOT RMC500 52 GT15 RS2 9P SA200 4 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 18 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 9 2 8 Connection to 1 When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Communication driver RK
305. When using GT15 z oS T 5 T When using GT1050 When using 671585 GT157LI 671040 gt GT1560 GT155L1 6711 GT1050 GT1040 671030 p ili 20 2 point press 5 When using GT1030 571020 eain Menu ESC 5 Language Comm Setting Y T 9 Zn 25 82 2 Utility call When setting Pressing time to other than 0 second on the setting screen of the utility call key press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sounds For the setting of the utility call key refer to the following 7 GTO User s Manual 3 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting be changed the Utility s Communication setting after writing 2 Communication Settings of project data e m 9 For details on the Utility refer to the following manual L gt User s Manual 4 Precedence in communication settings 2 When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective os 2 5 os eo 55 52 29 oo gt 5 B 5 6 225 S98 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 39 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 1 Check on the Check for errors occurring on the GOT Presetting the system alarm to project data allows you to identify errors occurred on the GOT PLC CPU servo
306. YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 Connect the connection cable 1 to the standard RS 485 communication interface 3 Connect the connection cable 1 to the high performance RS 485 communication interface 5 55 T 2 QO gt a 5 lt ES 9 x e gt m Ens n O mE iE ZOE Lc 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 8 2 System Configuration When connecting directly Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT eum S umber of connectable Model Communic Cable model Max equipment name ation Type Connection diagram number distance GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m 1200 1 GT16 CO2RA 9S 0 2m Em Up to M 2 GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m controllers for E E 2 GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P m Up to the following GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m GT15 RS4 98 number of temperature or 1200m controllers for 1 GOT 85485 connection diagram 4 GT16 GT15 31 UT320 germ 9 Built into GOT i UT321 4 wire type GT11 10 UT350 U ser 4 n UT351 88 RS485 connection diagram 3 4200m Built into GOT UT420 4 wire type UT450 Gser JT590
307. a iu Y a CONTROLLER 9 4 Side Settings 9 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings 9 4 2 Communication detail settings Set the channel of the connected equipment QD CH 1 RKC SR Mini HG CH 2 None Manufacturer RKC CH 3 None QD CH 4 None Controller RKC SR Mini HG Network Duplex Setting E Ethernet t Standard F RS232 tx Routing Information 5 Gateway RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS Communication S Gateway Server BE Gateway Client E Mail FTP Server File Transfer FTP 18 Redundant D Station No Switching Delay Time x10ms Format dL Apply 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer RKC Controller Type RKC SR Mini HG I F Interface to be used Driver RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment gt 9 4 2Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 227 1 1 2 I F communication setting Property Transmi
308. a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal EM Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 RS485 connection diagram 14 5 H Terminating resistor 100Q i 2 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller x SDA1 TXD1 6 3 RX RX SDB1 TXD1 E 5 n 5 La TX ii Pa zi RDA1 RXD1 10 m 4 m mt 4 n it 1 it RDB1 RXD1 12 6 r3 6 TX ore se it SG 2 E 2 2 86 5 2 PERS autos RSA RTS 14 1 Seo RSB RTS 16 S 222 Lu CSA CTS 18 oro CSB CTS 20 NC 1 NC 3 e 2 NC 4 Oa SDA2 TXD2 5 5 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 25 2 RDA2 RXD2 9 5 2 RDB2 RXD2 11 13 15 NC 17 EG za NC 19 Ox Ez 1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 9 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 9 Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 2 a lt o 9 e o z O lo LC Ot 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 19 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 15 GOT side
309. able length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 200m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 27 1 4 1GOT connector specifications 3 HITACHI IES PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the HITACHI IES PLC side module For details refer to the HITACHI IES PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable b For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 Q For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 97 1 4 3Terminating resistors of GOT 2 HITACHI IES PLC side When connecting an intelligent serial port module to a GOT a terminating resistor has to be connected to the intelligent serial port module HITACHI IES PLC user s Manual 2 6 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 3 Connection Diagram 2 4 Side Settings 2 4 1 Setting communication i aH 2 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication unicau ing PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 HITACHI HIDIC H Set the channel of the connected equipment O Property Value
310. able shield line 1 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a PLC which will be a terminal 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 12 Precautions when preparing cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be 1200m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 27 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 3 GE PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the GE PLC side module For details refer to the GE PLC user s manual Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable b For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 3300 For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 GE PLC side When connecting a GE PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 7 GE PLC user s Manual 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 3 Connection Diagram 11 13 CONNECTION TO GE PLC i i 11 4 GOT Side Settings 11 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment O CH 1 GE Series 90 CH 2 None Manufacturer GE QD CH None QD CH 4 None Controller Type GE Series 90 N
311. ace 1 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extend interface 2 Recognized as the 2nd stage of extend interface 1 Recognized as the 1st stage of extend interface 2 Recognized as the 1st stage of extend interface 1 GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 Relay connector 2 Standard size bus connection unit GT15 QBUS and GT15 ABUS A bus connection unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Example Installing a bus connection unit and serial communication units Serial communication unit Bus connection unit 1 22 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit or CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Install a MELSECNET H communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit or CC Link communication unit in the 1st stage of an extension interface These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage a 2 2 ra Re 26 ra gt Example When installing MELSECNET H communication unit and serial communication unit Serial communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit 9o 2 a MELSECNETIH Serial communication unit Communication unit 5 zo E OT 2 25 d POINT Precautions for using MELSECNET H communication unit
312. agram 2 modules erial 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 9 z 99 Zn TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YASKAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 7 4 2 Serial Connection 4 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX F120S 140S 15 S For details on the system configuration on the PLC side refer to the following 4 5 Precautions When using general purpose interface modules TINH al Communication driver Lom FUJI MICREX F Connection cable 0 PLC Connection cable GOT i Number of eneral purpose Cable model Max Option device Model ide Ge name 4 Connection diagram number distance module Type GT GT GT F120 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 general F140S FFU120B RS 232 or 15m purpose interface 215 User RS232 connection diagram 1 module grami1 G
313. al Directly connecting to the CPU Setting details MicroLogix Item Se ee 1500 Series Series 4800b 4800b 4800bps p3 psi 4 9600bps 9600bps Baud Rate 9600bps 2 19200bps 19200bps B 38400bps 38400bps Parity EVEN NONE NONE Control Line NO HANDSHAKING Communication Driver DF1 HALF DUPLEX SLAVE Duplicate Packet DISABLE Detection Station Address 0 Error Detection BCC BCC BCC CRC 1 Set the Baud Rate according to the transmission speed setting on the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 2 Set the Error Detection according to the sum check format setting on the GOT side For the sum check format setting on the GOT side refer to the following 10 2 5 Communication detail settings 10 12 Connecting to DH485 network via adapter 1770 Item Baud Rate KF3 Setting of Adapter Setting details 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps Parity Even Flow Control Disable No Handshaking DF1 Devi ios DF1 half duplex slave local mode Category Error Detection BCC DH 485 Baud Rate 19200bps Maximum Node 3 Address DH 485 Node sare Address in 1 Set the Baud Rate according to the transmission speed setting on the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following
314. al Number Model code GT Works3 1 Installation Procedure Manual Enclosed in product GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 1 2 2 2 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080866ENG 1D7MB9 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 1 2 2 2 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080867ENG 1D7MC1 GT Simulator3 Version1 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080861ENG 1D7MB1 GT Converter2 Version3 Operating Manual for GT Works3 Connection manuals Manual Name Stored in DVD ROM Packaging SH 080862ENG 1D7MB2 Manual Number GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080868ENG 1D7MC2 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080869ENG 1D7MC3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 2 for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080870ENG 107 4 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals for GT Works3 Extended and option function manuals Manual Name Stored in DVD ROM Packaging SH 080871ENG 1D7MC5 Manual Number GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM SH 080858ENG 1D7MA7 GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual for GT Works3 Stored in DVD ROM
315. al Systems 586 Connection cable p P z a Og Er 58 PLC Connection cable GOT 28 Number of 6 9 m Oma Series 1 Comune CNRC dias ram Max Option device Model baat UF mecie ation Type g distance p equipment number User Built into GOT im RS232 connection 15m zm diagram 2 E K200S G6L CUEB RS 232 1 PLC for 1 GOT o GT15 RS2 9P 20 889232 connection 151 Built into GOT 571020 diagram 4 51 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd When connecting to multiple PLCs qa ve 2 c nao gt Za Connection cable 2 B a B i 4 i gt ne 2 onu Connection cable 1 Woe 555 Connection cable Connection cable 77 PLC Cnet I F module GOT po 1 2 os Number of Cable model Commu Cable model distance connectable Series Connection Model name nication Connection Option device Model equipment diagram number Type diagram number 20 958422 z i 500m Built into GOT 5 31 PLCs for UE iagram 4 1 GOT 2 3 GT16 C02R4 On 95 0 2 GT GT m 14 12 5 0285422 0285422 Built into GOT The following number 2 m 2005 connection G6L CUEC RS 422 connection of PLCs for 1 GOT e diag
316. am 1 1002 User ion di 200m Built into GOT 9 TOGE ES eie comu 285422 connection diagram 1 HA z a H 4010 COMM 2H GTO9 C30R40401 7T 3m GT16 CO2R4 9S 0 2m intelligent serial 300 port module H 700 GT09 C100R40401 7T 10m w 2000 RS 422 GT09 C200R40401 7T 20m GT15 RS2T4 9P 4 zo GT09 C300R40401 7T 30m 200m Sp GT15 RS4 9S 5 RS422 connection diagram 2 Built into GOT 1 Product manufactured by HITACHI Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd For details of this product contact HITACHI Industrial E Equipment Systems Co Ltd m ES 2 Connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module E 5 2 43 Can be specified with the CPU software of revision J or later 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 2 9 6565 o gt oO 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 3 2 2 System Configuration 2 2 2 Connecting to H 200 to 252 series series board type or EH 150 series PLC Connection cable Connection cable GOT Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC HITACHI HIDIC Protocol2 To use transmission control procedure 2 as a protocol select HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol2 as a communication driver Model name H 200 H 250 252 1 H 252B H 20DR H 28DR H 40DR H 64DR H 20DT H 28DT H 40DT H 64DT HL 40DR HL 64DR Commun ication Type RS 232 Cable
317. ame IC693CPU363 CPU port 2 Communi cation Type RS 422 Built into GOT Connection cable GOT Cable model T Max 7 Connection diagram Option device Model distance number User 5885422 1200 Built into GOT connection diagram 2 1200m 1 16 02 4 95 0 2 GT15 RS2T4 9P GT GT 95422 GT15 RS4 98 connection diagram 5 1200m 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 Built into GOT 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration Number of connectable equipment 8 PLCs for 1 GOT Number of connectable equipment 8 PLC for 1GOT 11 5 RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC Zz z org ura 2 220 OZ CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 11 2 2 Connecting to Series90 70 Only the models that are compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected For the RS 232 connection Ceo GE SNP X Communication driver
318. amplifier and communications For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual gt GTO User s Manual When using GT15 r Error code Communication Channel No x GOT error ChNo 1 Reset 402 Communicat ion timeout Confirm communication pathway or modules 17 17 36 CPU error No Error Network error No Error Error message Time of occurrence Displayed only for errors Advanced alarm popup display With the advanced alarm popup display function alarms are displayed as a popup display regardless of whether an alarm display object is placed on the screen or not regardless of the display screen Since comments can be flown from right to left even a long comment can be displayed all For details of the advanced popup display refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring Perform I O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I O check function If this check ends successfully it means correct communication interface settings and proper cable connection Display the I O check screen by Main Menu For GT16 GT12 Display the I O check screen by Main menu Self check I O check For GT15 GT14 GT11 Display the I O check screen by Main menu Debug
319. an be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 RKC SR Mini HG Device Information 10000 0 A Kind 23 eo nag ded 0000 o Network Station No Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Devi evige The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Network 11099 monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Station No 100 to 115 To specify the station No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register 1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register Station No GOT data register GD Setting range 100 GD10 101
320. any unused terminal screws with a torque of 0 5 to 0 8Nem Failure to do so may cause a short circuit due to contact with a solderless terminal e Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque If any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it into the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Plug the communication cable
321. ating the key of the temperature controller 2 Communication mode settings Make this setting by operating the communication mode select DIP SW Switch position Communication mode ON T Item Set value ON PC link communication mode OFF Transmission speed 9600bps Data bit Tbits 8bits Parity bit Evan nde hone 3 A setting of the station No this setting by operating the station No select Stop bit 1bit 2bits Rotary switch Address 1 to 99 Switch position Station No 0 link communication without sum check Protocalselection 1 PC link communication with sum check 0 1 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 1 2 52 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 2 3 3 4 8 5 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series 4 5 5 6 Communication settings 6 7 Make the communication settings using setting 7 8 switches 8 9 9 10 Item Set value 1 Transmission speed 9600bps B 12 Data bit 8bits fixed T Parity bit Even odd none D 14 Stop bit 1bit fixed E 15 Station No 72 1to 16 F 16 Communication mode PC link communication mode 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units Settings by switch Communication mode select DIP SW Communication setting Rotary switch Station No select Rotary switch 1 Settings of the tra
322. ation to 5times menu error occurs Default 3times 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Set the time period for a channel to be used from the list menu Timeout Time communication to time out 1 to 30sec Default 3sec 3 Set the following items Set this item to adjust the Manufacturer SICK transmission timing of the Controller Type SICK Flexi Soft Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300 ms GOT I F Interface to be used Default 5ms Driver SICK Flexi Soft 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer POINT Controller Type I F and Driver are set the settings according to the usage 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility environment The communication interface setting can be 2 13 4 2 Communication detail settings changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project Click the OK button when settings are completed data For details on the Utility refer to the following POINT manual User s Manual The settings of connecting equipment be 2 Precedence in communication settings confirmed in I F Communication Setting When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the For details refer to the following Utility the latest setting is effective 2 gt 7 1 1 2 communication setting 13 4 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 4 GOT Side Settings
323. b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 50 65281 65301 65321 65341 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 65282 65302 65322 65342 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 65283 65303 65323 65343 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 65284 65304 65324 65344 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 65285 65305 65325 65345 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 65286 65306 65326 65346 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 65287 65307 65327 65347 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 65288 65308 65328 65348 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 For details the GS Device refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Appendix 2 3 GOT special register GS 46 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 3 Network No station No notification The network No and station No of the GOT in Ethernet connection are stored at GOT startup If connected by other than Ethernet 0 is stored Description GS378 GS380 GS382 GS379 GS381 GS383 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR Network 1 to 239 Station No 1 to 64 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 47
324. bit length for Specify the adapter address station Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits 2 No of the PLC that the GOT will Default 1bit Adapter Address 0 to 63 monitor in the connected network Specify whether or not to perform a N Default 0 parity check and how it is performed s Parity s Even Specify the host address station No during communication Odd 2 of the adapter to which the GOT is Default None Host Address 0 to 63 connected in the connected network Specify the format in which the sum Default 1 check is performed during ace 1 Do not specify the same value for the adapter address Sum Check communication when performing sum GRC host address check Default BCC Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication Ot Blimes error occurs Default 3times Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the adapter address station No of the PLC that the GOT will Adapter Address 5 eee M 0 to 254 monitor in the connected network Default 0 Specify the host address station No f the adapter to which the GOT i Host Address auapter o wien dese 106254 connected in the connected network Default 0 Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300ms 10 10 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection GOT
325. by the system The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers Consult with the administrator of the network before setting an IP address to the GOT and controller When connecting to the multiple network equipment including GOT in a segment By increasing the network load the transmission speed between the GOT and PLC may be reduced The following actions may improve the communication performance Using a switching hub More high speed by 100BASE TX 100Mbps Reduction of the monitoring points on GOT 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 9 z Oa os Be 2 9 6 4 Device Range that Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item Bit CH1 YASKAWA MP2000 MP900 Device d Information MB 000000 2 2 When setting as a word device Set the device using the format of word address DEC Device B ws Devic
326. c 5 OFF 1 Select Reboot Maintenance Mode the Reboot SE 3 Station No switch LC02 ON only screen of the FCX Maintenance Page to set the maintenance mode Settings 2 Set the COM1 port driver to be used Execute JEROS z Rota For RS For RS 4 d Description 232 422 Basic Setting File from the Edit System Setting File 5 T SWI communi communi Screen on the FCX Maintenance Page cation cation Confirm that the line of Com1SioDriver is as follows 53 874 Station No Com1SioDriver DUONUS_ SIO 2E STATION NO 5 1 10 s digit 0 0 Station No 3 Set the COM1 port to be used Execute COM1 Port B x 2 t s digit Setting File from the Edit System Setting Files 2 screen the FCX Maintenance Page Make the T settings as follows according to the communication 2 specifications the setting screen E g Leave the settings as default if not listed on the 525 communication setting items Communication setting items in the table shows the names on the FCX Maintenance Page Item Set value m 4800bps 9600bps 9 a Transmission speed Baudrate 19200bps 38400bps Os 57600bps 115200bps S Data length DataBitLength 8bits 7bits 8s Stop bit StopBitLength 1bit 2bits Parity bit Parity none odd even ge Baudrate 1 Z Em Og DataBitLength 1 E StopBitLength 5 Parity 1 55 FifoMode YES InitialDTRState ON SendFlowControlMode
327. cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section When the GOT is connected to the Ethernet network the available IP address is restricted according to the system configuration When multiple GOTs are connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the GOTs and the controllers in the network When a single GOT is connected to the Ethernet network Do not set the IP address 192 168 0 18 for the controllers except the GOT in the network Doing so can cause the IP address duplication The duplication can negatively affect the communication of the device with the IP address 192 168 0 18 The operation at the IP address duplication depends on the devices and the system Turn on the controllers and the network devices to be ready for communication before they communicate with the GOT Failure to do so can cause a communication error on the GOT MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit option function board or multi color display board onto from the
328. cautiorisz tont etta Sete DIM NO mecs iS eas 8 38 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 Connectable Model Fist 4 4 05 5 o er o ne dad iden e en 9 2 System Conflguration niente ade ecd 9 4 9 2 1 Connecting to 000 0 0 dedi eene diede dde desee ade dd 9 4 9 2 2 Connecting to H PCP A 9 7 9 2 3 Connecting to S RZ a dete eee depen eie e itd 9 9 9 2 4 Connecting to CB Series CB100 400 CB500 CB700 9 9 12 9 2 5 Connecting to FB series FB100 FB400 or 9 9 13 9 2 6 Connecting to RB Series RB100 400 RB500 RB700 9 9 16 9 2 7 Connection to PF900 901 400 401 900 901 RMC500 MA900 901 AG500 y WILL 9 17 9 2 8 eat tai ee died 9 19 9 2 9 Connection to SRX ico eciam eeu 9 22 9 2 10 Connecting to ipee Ld e qe e Ett beige AU ec de ed egent 9 23 9 2 11 sGonnecting to B400 E eet er OUR RU ake aes 9 25 Connection
329. ces a b c d Notation method of the bit device The difference in bit memory notation between GOT and PLC is as follows Notation of GOT Notation of PLC Q0007 Q0 7 Preparing to set a data register It is necessary to define the data block using a peripheral software and sequence program before using a data register Setting more than one data block cannot be done for the data register Object that cannot be set Timer current value T Only one device can be set for the write target of this device Therefore multiple devices such as using the recipe function etc cannot be used Notation method of the data registers with the bit specification The notation of the data registers with the bit specification differs between the GOT and the PLC The following shows the correspondence table Notation in GOT Notation in PLC DB1 DBWO bO DB1 DBX1 0 DB1 DBWO b1 DB1 DBX1 1 DB1 DBWO b7 DB1 DBX1 7 DB1 DBWO b8 DB1 DBX0 0 DB1 DBWO b15 DB1 DBX0 7 DB1 DBW2 b0 DB1 DBX3 0 DB1 DBW2 b7 DB1 DBX3 7 DB1 DBW2 b8 DB1 DBX2 0 DB1 DBW2 b15 DB1 DBX2 7 57 200 Series lt Bit gt CH1 SIEMENS 57 200 Device 3 Information Kind Range Device 00000 51197 Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device POI Displays the device ty
330. ch 554 ep ooo RS 485 station No gt switches Character configuration switches 50 J 4 gt Terminator switch fer gue all gir EAS MODE switch Front view Rear view a Setting of the MODE Make the MODE settings using the MODE switch MODE Switch position Command setting type start stop synchronization nonsequence format b Setting of the station No Make the station No using RS 485 station No Connecting to FFU120B x switches 1 Communication settings 0 H a z SETS Make the communication settings using setting 52 switches TO uoz Item Set value E ADDRESS Command setting type start stop MODE synchronization nonsequence format Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Connecting terminating resistors Data bit 8bits or 7bits 2 a Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS ERU 9 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch Parity bit 5 p PEN ON Stop bit 1bit 2bits Initializing method By switch Station 72 0 to 99 _ Terminating resistor 3 ON or OFF 4 Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit 5 Parity bit Initializi thod 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings arity Dit Ini ia izing
331. cify the host address station Host address 1 to 31 gt gt E of the PLC that the GOT will monitor iud Host Address 1 to 31 Roa in the connected network lt 9 Default 2 295 020 POINT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility 2 communication interface setting be 5 2 changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project 2 n data 9 For details on the Utility refer to the following manual lt GTO User s Manual 5 EE 2 Precedence in communication settings su When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the 20 Utility the latest setting is effective 555 8 589 EI g PE 8 EO Oe Ss 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 7 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 7 Connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 Communication settings Set the communication settings of PLC and PC PPI cable 1 PLC settings Set the communication settings of PLC by operating the SIEMENS programming tool STEP7 WIN32 Setting item PLC Side Setting Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even fixed Stop bit 1bit fixed Host address 1 to 31 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Set the address without overlapping the address of other units 2 PC PPI cable settings Set the transmission speed by operating the DIP switch on the PC PPI cable DIP switch
332. controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series Ms UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 SG 30 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Set the terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal gt m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 28 Temperature Temperature GOT side num 4 controller _____ a controller SDA1 TXD1 6 EE E RSB SDB1 TXD1 m E 3 m SG 2 t t D m SG SDA2 TXD2 5 E E Y l MJ SDB2 TXD2 7 B cu RDA1 RXD1 10 E bag RDB1 RXD1 12 ha ba RSA RTS 14 E E Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W RSB RTS 16 4 6g CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 PN N NC 1 T NC 3 4 NC 4 RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller Sianal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 S
333. ct access W24 and user file W30 to W109 W9 set as follows CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC Device x 0 Word number Device name File number fe of ze a Use 888 4 CONNECTION FUJI PLC 4 29 4 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Only reading is possible Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed Decimal points are not displayed To read write data from to a user file set SI data for the data format of the PLC CPU and 16 bits for data length on GT Designer3 With any setting other than the above the PLC does not operate normally Data format of the PLC CPU GT Designer3 setting Binary 16 bit length Device data bit 16 bits DI Binary 32 bit length Cannot be used BD 8 digit BCD Cannot be used As bit specification of a word device is performed after the GOT reads the value do not change the value in the sequence program during this period When it is used with bit specification bit specification of word device the offset function cannot be used When bit specification bit specification of word device is performed the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Higher Lower 50 bf asse b14 b15 4 4 2 FUJI MICREX SX Series 4 4 1
334. ct to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 2 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 3 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE T 2 5 standard use the switching hub and operate a 10Mbps 100Mbps mixed environment For how to check the function version refer to the following GT16 User s Manual Hardware 4 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of the product contact Siemens AG 5 number of GOTs increases the communication becomes highloaded and it may affect the communication performance 6 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE 14 10 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 3 3 Side Settings
335. d equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 8bits Specify whether or not to perform a n None 5 parity check and how it is performed Parity RAE Even during communication Odd Default Odd Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission timing of the Delay Time communication request from the 0 to 300m GOT Default 0 CO 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 237 GTO User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 4 GOT Side Settings 9 Zz 9 HITACHI PLC 3 5 PLC Side Setting HITACHI PLC For details of HITACHI PLCs refer to the following manuals gt HITACHI PLC user s Manual Model name Refer to LQE560 LQE060 Communication module LQE160 3 5 1 LQE565 LQE165 3 8 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 5 PLC Side Setting 3 5 1 Connectin
336. d for a communication to time out Default 3sec 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 0 to 10000 X 10 ms Ethernet setting Controller Setting Port Na 10500 Delete All Paste All Item Description Set value Hast The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the N W No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the PLC No connected Ethernet module 1to 64 Default blank Type YASKAWA fixed YASKAWA fixed Set the IP address of the PLC side IP IP address connected Ethernet module address Default blank Set the port No of the connected Port No Ethernet module 256 to 65534 Default 10500 Communication Select a communication protocol UDP TCP format Default UDP 1 Connection with the PLC is unavailable if the IP address is the default value Set the value to the IP address of the PLC to be connected 2 Each of GOT PLC set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 9 W Communication detail settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing
337. d pair p 100m 12 7 5 w Category 3 4 and 5 1756 EN2TR 10 100Mbps 6 100BASE TX Shielded twisted pair cable GT15 J71E71 100 RA STP Category 5 and 5e 2 When PLC GOT is N 1 e uu ram Te following shows the Sm Built into GOT number of PLCs for GOT Zo 10BASE T For GT16 GT14 gt ES Shielded twisted pair cable TCP 128 or less 5 a STP or unshielded lt For GT15 GT12 gt 020 twisted pair cable UTP TCP 10 or CompactLogix Ethernet Win palf cable 100m Category 3 4 5 100BASE TX When PLC GOT is 1 N Shielded twisted pair cable GT15 J71E71 100 The following shows the 2 STP Category 5 and 5e number of GOTs for 1 PLC 5 m TCP 32 or less hs recommended to 16 3 fe less 2 2 1 Allen Bradley product manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc For details of the product contact Rockwell Automation Inc 2 destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet network system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 3 Alength between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub
338. data from to consecutive devices 4 With STARDOM FA M3 F3SP59 only if communications that include the maximum device number 32767 or 65535 occurs system alarm 322 Dedicated device is out of range Confirm device range may be detected If such system alarm is detected do not use the last 15 bits 5 With STARDOM do not use B32768 or later Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 7 23 PREPARATORY CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC o 24 pa Q YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER HITACHI IES PLC 9 a lt lt 9 gt 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Tr CONNECTION TO amp 24 YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER AAA 16 15 14 111 a 5 8 1 Connectable Model 15 8 2 ji 8 2 System 8 3 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 10 5 8 4 GOT Side 8 31 m 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 33 8 6 Device Range that Set 8 37 555 8 7
339. dd 3 5 3 3 85 232 rm 3 5 9 9 2 55422 Da Mot ES 3 5 34 USOT SIMS aes tede uq ttn etu inniti e netiis 3 7 3 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 3 7 3 4 2 Communication detail settings sse eene nennen 3 7 3 5 PEG Side Setting cite ite eben etu ue etie Pto e lide pec dde 3 8 3 5 1 Connecting to communication 3 8 3 6 Device Range that Can Be 3 9 9 67 SA QMS 1 OV rr ate DR rS teda dee 3 9 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 4 Connectable Model List itti decedere need dde ada d dud 4 2 4 2 Serial Goririectlo a 4 3 4 2 1 System Configuration for connecting to 55 4 3 4 2 2 System Configuration for connecting to 0 4 5 4 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX F 120S 1408S 15 S 4 8 4 2 4 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX SX SPH 4 11 4 2 5 Connection 4 12 4 22 61 GOT Sde eee eee ea A eH ee PP pret 4 17 2 0 PLO Sde Setting 4 19 4 3 Ethern t Connection ese ice tat
340. ddress setting refer to the following gt m Communication detail settings CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 31 4 5 Precautions 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 5 Precautions CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 EE Q 2 9 12 11 10 Connectable Model List System Configuration 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 6 GOT Side Settings ex vus cx beets eet ER VV 5 11 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 13 Device Range that Be Set 5 18 ai PTT 5 19 PREPARATORY CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC FUJI PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING Lu oe ee sa ve ae YOKOGAWA PLC HITACHI IES PLC 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Refer to PXR3 PXR4 mE x RS 232 37524 Micro PXR9 Controller X PXG4 PXG5 x RS 485 737522 PXH9 5 2 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 1 Connectable Model List 5 2
341. de dd e nad dde n sida ede d d 7 15 742 Ethernet GOnnectiori 2 eet n e etia bna CO RS RR Etapa c 7 16 7 3 1 System configuration for connecting to 7 16 7 9 2 GOT Side Setlings e cre UR ne ane ROMPE 7 17 7 3 3 side setting nene ee do d da dd dde 7 19 7 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE01 5T 11 0 7 19 7 3 5 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module 12 0 7 20 7 3 6 Connecting to F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP71 4N built in Ethernet interface 7 21 7297 T OE RU E enn tem e 7 21 74 Device Range that Can 7 22 7 4 1 YOKOGAWA 3 7 23 7 4 2 STARDOMIFA MS 5 7 23 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 1 Connectable Model 042 120001 ane AA tene 8 2 9 2 System 8 3 8 2 1 Connecting to GREEN 5 8 3 8 2 2 Connecting to UT100 5 8 5 8 2 3 Connect
342. details of LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLCs refer to the following manual gt User s Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Model name Refer to K80S K120S PLC CPU K2008 12 5 1 K300S 12 5 1 Connecting to PLC CPU Settings of the communication specifications There is no item to be set using the hardware Set the items using the engineering software for MASTER K Item Station No Setting details 0 to 31 Communication 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600bps G7L CUEB G7L CUEC G6L CUEB 12 5 2 G6L CUEC G4L CUEA Cnet I F module 12 10 12 5 PLC Side Setting speed Data bit 7 or8 Parity bit None Even Odd Stop bit 10r2 1 For the setting method of the engineering software refer to the following LF Users Manual of the LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 5 2 Connecting to Cnet I F module Settings of the communication specifications There is no item to be set using the hardware Set the items using the engineering software for MASTER K Item Communication protocol Setting details Dedicated protocol Data bit 70r8 Communication Stop bit 10r2 format Start bit 1 Parity bit Even Odd None Channel selection Stand alone mode Interlocking mode Synchronization Asynchronous 300 600 1200 2400 4800 Transmission Reece 9600 19200 38400 Speen 300 600 1200 2400 4800 bps bps 960
343. distance number number GT Built into User User 14 12 90 RS485 500m RC77 RS 232 RS232 45m GOT Oz connection diagram 1 connection diagram 1 29 PXG4 Up to 31 GT GT PXG5 hee temperature Su PXG9 Si controllers PXH9 Built int for 1 GOT pou User Usern RS485 500m kasc 10 RS 232 RS232 45m GOT e connection diagram 7 connection diagram 3 GT15 RS2 9P 99 2 1 Product manufactured by SYSMEXRA CO LTD For details of the product contact SYSMEXRA CO LTD E 2 Product manufactured by OMRON Corporation For details of the product contact OMRON Corporation ou When connecting to multiple temperature controllers RS 485 communication Lu oe ee sa ve Ez 2 20 Connection cable 2 a os Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Tu e E S Model Communic Cable model Max Option device Model equipment ET name ation Type Connection diagram number distance 25785485 connection diagram 5 500m Built into GOT FA LTBGTRACBLO5 0 5m 2 E ase V z PXG4 059485 connection diagram 4 500m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m 2 lt 5 FA LTBGTRACBL20 2m Up to 31 temperature 9 PXG9 z controllers for 1 GOT PXH9 9785485 connection diagram 6 500m GT
344. dition 2 9 Confirmation of Communication Settings 90 P address of GOT specified by Ping command 5 B ez 55 225 S98 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 43 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring E Confirming the communication state the GOT For 5716 6714 PING Test can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT For details on the operation method of the GOT Utility screen refer to the following manual 5 GT16 User s Manual Basic Utility GT14 User s Manual Self check Diagnostics Ethernet status check IP address of the other terminal 192 168 3 39 Ping transmission 1 44 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring x 22 prz vag E ul 26 2 function SIS 16 crT15 14 1 cT1 1 The station monitoring function detects the faults communication timeout of the stations monitored by the GOT 2 9 When an abnormal state is detected the function assigns the information of the faulty station to the GOT special F register GS 52 1 of faulty stations 2 lt For the Ethernet connection except for the Ethernet multiple connection Total No of the faulty CPU are stored Device b15 to b8 b7 to bO GS230 00H fixed
345. down side 0 upper side 1 41 RS 232 PC PPI cable SWITCH 123 RS 485 57 200 CPU 000000000000 SWITCH 4 I SWITCH 5 Transmission speed 19200bps 0 1 0 0 0 9600 1 Adjust with GOT settings 14 8 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 8 Precautions GOT alarm list system alarm function Error information cannot be monitored when the GOT is connected to a SIEMENS PLC The error information on the PLC CPU side can be monitored For details on the alarm list system alarm refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual At system startup 1 When powering ON the system Turn ON all PLC CPUs before turning ON the GOT If the GOT is turned ON before power up of the PLC CPUs restart the GOT 2 When powering OFF a PLC CPU at another station When a PLC CPU at another station the PLC CPU to which the HMI Adapter is not connected is turned OFF monitoring by the GOT is stopped To resume the monitoring restart the GOT Monitoring will not be resumed on GOT even if the PLC CPU is turned ON again 14 3 Ethernet Connection 5 5 2
346. e Word address DEC Device name 6 4 1 YASKAWA GL PROGIC8 Cob 41516 c Kind BIT Range Device 000000 5553 0 Back JL Network O Host Other 1 g Station No 1 Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Displays the device type and setting range which are Information selected in Device Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Select this for monitoring other controllers After selecting set the station number of the Other controller to be monitored NW No Set the network No Station No Set the station No Network Device settings of YASKAWA PLC when using CP 9200SH CP 9300MS MP 920 MP 930 Set the coil device MB as follows 1 When setting as a bit device Set the device using the format of word address DEC bit number HEX Device 645 8 Device No Bit position HEX Device name Word address DEC 6 32 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Device No Device name Setting range representation Coil O1 to 063424 Input relay I 97 I1 to 163424 8 D1 to D2048 t H
347. e ent t t DR edu ao P Ce has dte Mea Ev snae 4 25 4 31 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX SX SPH 4 25 4 3 2 GOT Side Settings cai ica tabe De o abad 4 26 4 3 38 side setting MICREX SX 4 28 44 Device Range that 2 4 1 2 2 100 1 4 29 4 4 1 FUJI MICREX F Series 2 2222 2210 0000000000 00 aa a aa aa 4 30 4 4 2 FUJIMICREX SX 000 0 4 30 4 5 ice ei Bae 4 31 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 27 asia d ERE anes 5 2 5 2 System ConfIg ration 3 vec 5 3 5 2 1 Connecting to PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 or 5 3 5 2 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 or 5 4 5 3 Connection DI amp grarms iade eet Dr da date dept d fe ue 5 6 5 32 55 232 Hle da rtu Leto aca asd Roe lata da Re 5 6 5 3 2 RS 485 cable isis cdit did ded ed e 5 7 5 4 GOTT Side Seltltilrigs 5 11 5 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 5 11 5 4 2 Comm
348. e GT09 C300R41001 6T 30m GT15 RS4 9S Cm Gi capsules User H GT GT 55 RS485 connection diagram Built into GOT 2 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 4 4 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection 4 2 2 System Configuration for connecting to MICREX F70 oc For details the system configuration on PLC side refer to the following Po Yz 5 lt 4 5 Precautions sax ZOE woz When using general purpose interface modules rO Communication driver Ce FUJI MICREX F zo Connection cable Oo p OS 25 6E OI PLC Connection cable GOT General purpose Commun Number of connectable Model bl del Max oce interface ication ca s 2 Option device Model equipment 4 Connection diagram number distance 2 module Type o9 GT GT GT oO GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m Built into GOT 1 GOT for 1 general Z6 F70 NC1L RS2 RS 232 or 15m purpose interface G35 RS232 connection diagram 1 module preparing GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electr
349. e for 1 GOT FA LTBGTR4CBLO5 0 5 19 wens RS485 connection diagram 26 1200 FA LTBGTRACBL40 1 19 2 wire type FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2 19 5783485 connection diagram 11 ea 1200 GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type E 59185485 connection diagram 21 1200 GT44 RS2T4 9P 4 wire type GT09 C30R40303 6T 3 Up to 31 t t troll E m 120m mem GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m 2 GT15 RS2T4 9P Up to the following number of GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m GT15 RS4 98 temperature controllers for 1 or 2 1200 GOT G8 RS485 connection diagram 4 T GT16 GT15 31 Built into GOT DR Gul i 4 wire type GT11 10 User RS485 connection diagram 5 1200 GT15 RS4 TE UM33A RS 485 4 wire type GaRS485 connection diagram 21 1200 GT44 RS2T4 9P 4 wire type Up to 31 temperature controllers 55 89485 connection diagram 23 1200 Built into GOT for 1 GOT 4 wire type FA LTBGTR4CBLO5 0 5 19 65485 connection diagram 24 1200 FA LTBGTRACBL40 1 19 4 type FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m 19 8 8 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 System Configuration Temperature x Connection cable GOT controller Number of connectable ommun o Cable model Max equipment i Series ication Option device Model gt Connection diagram number dis
350. e Range that Be 21 1 4 12 1 11 11 17 16 1 GESSGrIOS 9Q tior Er ot e d duet 11 17 TASS COPrGCAautlons mn P t d T ei ce 11 17 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 1 Connectable Model Elst O 12 2 12 2 System Gonflguration i io do e Pt e ima reet D e HD 12 3 12 2 1 Connecting to K80S or 1205 12 3 12 2 2 Connecting to K200S edn et seer nee Ta ad 12 5 12 23 Gonnecting to K3005 cie ener EC eR E Suena 12 6 Tay Gonnection Diagram iiit iac sepe c DU ias EP a das dic beca NR andre cu ta bri aet HR vaL geet 12 7 42 9 9 232 cable t ee deo e edet ibn der IO E DEL 12 7 12 9 2 RS 422 cable nuit nis ed t bee s ie Pied e o ed ege ea trop ee 12 8 12 4 GO T Side oce tie ee ERU RD ete Do D taque 12 9 12 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 12 9 12 4 Communication detail 0 12 9 12 5 PEC SIde Settlng RR Dp ea eund 12 10 12 51 Gonnecting to CPU ie toe ee 12 10 12 5 2 Connecting to Cnet I F 222 2
351. e controller side 2 TIR Tut 3 S m 1 Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 4 wire type 2Pair Terminating resistor 3309 2 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 2 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal No Signal PF900 901 400 hame FB400 500 MA900 3 RS 422 900 400 401 MA901 SESS HA900 901 i SG 25 25 44 3 3 6 T A 26 26 45 5 5 T B 27 27 46 4 4 R A 28 28 47 1 1 R B 29 29 48 2 2 The following shows the pin assignment of the modular connector we Modular connector pin No 888884 0000 esc 6 T 5 IE 4 se E R B 2 R A 1 7 2 91 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram Precautions when preparing cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 422 cable must be within the maximum distance 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following L 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 3 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user
352. e extension interface These communication units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage For GT16 and the GT155 the MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 75J71BR13 Z and the CC Link communication unit GT15 75J61BT13 Z are not applicable Example When installing a MELSECNET 10 communication unit and a serial communication unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit Serial communication unit When using an Ethernet communication unit An Ethernet communication unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface For GT16 the Ethernet communication unit is not applicable Use the Ethernet interface built in the GOT Example When installing an Ethernet communication unit and a serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit Serial communication unit Ethernet communication unit When using a serial communication unit A serial communication unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the extension interface Serial communication Serial communication unit 1 24 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection When using the printer unit sound output unit or external I O unit The printer unit sound output unit or external unit can be installed in any position 1st to 3rd stage of the 2 LL 2 extension interface Be Ae Example When installin
353. e of CB series 1 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 1100 C Connecting terminating resistors 2 When combining the module because the communication line is connected between the modules with each other wire only the communication terminal on the both end of the combination module 3 resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal When using X TIO turn ON the terminating resistor selector in the terminal base When combining the module provide the terminating resistor to the end of the combination module the one that is far from the converter 4 For the terminal number for connecting to FB series or RB series refer to the table below Terminal No Signal name 2 0 CB100 CB400 0 47 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 Z CT CB500 CB900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 5 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 B400 name PF901 900 901 MA900 MA901 RMC500 X TIO 5 100 SA200 5 1 RS 485 AG500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 15 RKC
354. e product contact YASKAWA Electric Corporation 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 3 maximum transmission speed of 218IF 02 is 115200bps However the selectable maximum transmission speed of GOT is 57600bps 9 2 On os Eier Ze 5 os CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 9 6 2 Serial Connection 6 2 7 Connection Diagram RS232 connection diagram 4 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC CD NC 1 Clamped by hood RD RXD 2 1 TXD RS 232 cable SD TXD 3 3 RXD ER DTR 4 12 RTS 1 Connection diagram SG 5 14 GND RS232 connection diagram 1 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side 6 2 RS RTS 7 6 CTS 1 1 FG CS CTS 8 RD RXD 2 lt 2 TXD 9 SD TXD 3 3 RXD ER DTR 4 6 DSR 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 GT11 NC GT1050 NC 671040 NC SG 5 7 GND i RS232 connection diagram 5 DR DSR lt 9 DTR GOT side YASKAWA PLC side RS RTS 7 4 RTS ee
355. e terminating resistor selector to 330 5 SDA1 TXD1 1 R B 5 m Connecting terminating resistors 2 SDB1 TXD1 2 i R A 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following RDA1 RXD1 i T B manual RDB1 RXD1 4 i T A 22 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller SDA2 TXD2 5 SG SDB2 TXD2 SG RS422 connection diagram 3 1 o RDA2 RXD24 7 i RKC temperature controller side temperature controller side 5 ETE RDB2 RXD2 Modular Modular lt i T EEE ce RSA RTS 9 4 RA 1 1 RA 236 1 1 1 a RSB RTS 10 2 2 R B E 2 5 CSA CTS 11 SG 3 H 3 SG 1 1 1 1 CSB CTS 12 4 4 T B 1 1 1 1 SG 13 1 T A 5 H 5 T A 1 1 1 NC SGING s 5 NE 5 6 SG N C T Eu 1 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT as follows A For details of the pin assignment refer to the following GT16 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT manual 5 3 main unit to Disable User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller OHO 9 Connecting terminating resistors 52 For the terminal number of the temperature controller refer to the following table Terminal PF900 901 Signal B400 ore FB400 500 900 a Ge FB900 HA400 401
356. ease the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out When using the GT1655 V Handy GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 or GT105L1 The POWER LED blinks green orange and the monitor screen appears blank When using the GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 or GT1662 gt The POWER LED blinks green orange and the monitor screen appears dimmed When using the GT104L1 The monitor screen appears blank When using the GT1030 or GT10201 gt The monitor screen appears dimmed The display section of the GT16 GT1595 X GT14 GT12 or GT1020 are an analog resistive type touch panel If you touch the display section simultaneously in 2 points or more the switch that is located around the center of the touched point if any may operate Do not touch the display section in 2 points or more simultaneously Doing so may cause an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction When programs or parameters of the controller such as a PLC that is monitored by the GOT are changed be sure to reset the GOT or shut off the power of the GOT at the same time Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction e Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm apart Not doing so noise can
357. ecting to Flexi Soft Communication driver SICK Flexi Soft Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Communic Cable model Max Number of connectable equipment Series 3 Option device Model ation Type Connection diagram number distance Part Number 6021195 2m Built into GOT Part Number 6036342 3m GT15 RS2 9P Sel Flexi Soft RS 232 1 PLC for 1 GOT Part Number 6021195 2m Part Number 6036342 3m 3 3m Builtinto GOT 5232 connection diagram 1 1 Product manufactured by SICK Inc For details of the product contact SICK Inc 13 2 13 CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 13 1 Connectable Model List 13 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC 13 3 1 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 GOT side SICK cable male side terminal block D Sub9 pin SD gt 3 RD 2 ER DR SG RS CS NC Askeen RER E Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 30cm or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 7 1 4 1 GOT connector specifications 3 SICK PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the SICK PLC side module For details refer to the user s manual of the SICK PLC 13
358. ection between the GOT and the temperature controller 8 31 RS 232 cable Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 RS232C RS485 GOT side side cD a A r 1 CD RD RXD 2 2 RD SD TXD s SD ER DTR 4 4 SG 5 H 5 SG DR DSR 6 6 RS RTS 7 7 CS CTS cs 9 E i D 9 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller 8 10 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 32 RS 485 cable US Connection diagram 7 Zz RS485 connection diagram 1 z a E uc p 5 RS232C RS485 Terminating resistor 2200 1 4 2 Temperature interface converter Te
359. ed for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5485 connection diagram 7 2 2 4293 Terminating 2200 1 4W 2 o GOT side 7 Temperature controller lt fj Temperature controller 1 ty Tag 21 ry SDB 1 zu germen 98 oat 55 T Ti T SDA2 TXD2 5 i ia RDB RDB o SDB2 TXD2 7 jd ici RDA RDA SG 2 5 RDA1 RXD1 10 ERE SG 1 1 5 RDB1 RXD1 12 2 RSA RTS 14 4 4 RSB RTS 16 zur CSA CTS 18 CSB CTS 20 5 a NC 1 2 A NG a FE RDA2 RXD2 9 RDB2 RXD2 11 NC 13 NC 15 NC 17 NC 19 9 On sq Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table 5 5 Model of temperature controller E S Signal GREEN Series GREEN Series ES UT UP UM us Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 go RDB 25 23 5 RDA 26 24 5 SG 27 25 2 9 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be terminal e Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 5 oz ME EA iO gt O 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA
360. ement No Setting by GT Designer3 Device 1 3 M a None vi 15 File type L Module SL Element No Bit position 03 1 Z 15 File type Bit position Module No Bit delimiter Element delimiter Element No Setting by GT Designer3 Device 21 2 none 15 File type Module No L Element No Bit position 10 CONNECTION ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 10 19 b When setting an element address as a word 10 4 1 16500 device 7 15 50 Device Quit File type L Element N 5 Device name Setting range 2 E represen 205 Element delimiter i tation Bit B3 0 0 to B3 255 15 0 Setting by GT Designer3 B10 0 0 to B255 255 15 Device Timer Timing 74 0 14 to T4 255 14 TT e T bit T 2 T10 0 14 TT to T255 255 14 TT E N v E 15 lt Timer Timing T4 0 13 DN to T4 255 13 DN bit T T10 0 13 DN to T255 255 13 DN 2 File type File Element No Hm El es sd Counter Up C5 0 15 CU to C5 255 15 CU n 2 E 4 7 ACC 5 counter C10 0 15 CU to C255 255 15 CU Decimal i j Counter C5 0 14 CD C5 255 14 CD _ ini Bown 222 E File No Word delimiter c
361. er s Manual for the communication unit and option unit you are using For the method for installing a unit on another unit refer to the following 53 7 User s Manual of GOT used Calculating consumed current For using multiple extension units a bar code reader or a RFID controller the total current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply For the current that the GOT can supply and the current for the extension units bar code reader or RFID controller refer to the following tables Make sure that the total of consumed current is within the capacity of the GOT 1 Current supply capacity of the GOT Current supply Current supply GOT type capacity GOT type capacity A A GT1695M X 2 4 GT1595 X 2 13 GT1685M S 2 4 GT1585V S 1 74 GT1675M S 24 GT1585 S 1 74 GT1675M V 2 4 GT1575V S 2 2 GT1675 VN GT1672 VN 2 4 GT1575 S 2 2 GT1665M S 2 4 GT1575 V GT1572 VN 2 2 GT1665M V 2 4 GT1565 V GT1562 VN 2 2 GT1662 VN 2 4 GT1555 V 1 3 GT1655 V 1 3 GT1555 Q GT1550 Q 1 3 2 Current consumed by an extension unit barcode reader RFID controller Consumed Consumed Module type current Module type current A A GTI6M R2 0 92 GTISV 76R1 oz GT15 RS2 9P 0 29 GT16M V4R1 0 12 GT15 RS4 9S 0
362. erature s H PCP B GT15 RS2 9P controller oF for 1 GOT 5 E o 8089422 connection 1200 Built into GOT go diagram 1 9 S 2 IE 1200 2 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m RS 422 GT15 RS2T4 9P 08795422 connection GT15 RS4 9S e diagram 2 1200m gt m GT GT Built into GOT 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 6 9 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 2 5 lt n On 2 zu zz On 2 ocu Zio 95 lt 549 OTE n a 2 8 84 32 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 7 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Modular connector 1 Connection cable 1 Modular connector 2 Modular connector 1 Connection cable 2 Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT Cable model Cable model Max Model Communication 3 oe x sue dist connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram Istance Option device Model equipment number number RS422 connection 120012 Built into GOT diagram 1 120013 GT16 C02R4
363. eries SLC500 AB 1 N When connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series AB MicroLogix When connecting to Control Compact FlexLogix Series AB Control CompactLogix lt GT10 gt When connecting to SLC500 Series SLC500 When connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series AB MicroLogix 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 10 2 5 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed Fam The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following gt 1 12 communication setting Communication detail settings 1 AB SLC500 AB 1 Ns Property Transmission 5 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Sum Check Done Sum Check Type BCC Adapter Address 0 Host Address 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Item Description Range Set this item when change the Transmission transmission speed used for 4800bps Speed communication with the connected 9600bps equipment 19200bps Default 19200bps Specify the adapter address station 4 of the PLC that the GOT will Adapter Address monitor in the connected network Default 0 Specify the host address station No 4 of the adapter to which the GOT is Host
364. eries Su ulead nae Option device Model equipment ation Type Connection diagram number distance User RS485 connection diagram 10 1200m Built into GOT 2 wire type 0 ion di FA LTBGTRACBLO5 0 5m RS485 connection diagram Ups Sb 9 i aie controllers for 1 GOT 2 wire type FA LTBGTRACBL20 2m RS485 connection diagram 13 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 8 2 System Configuration PROCEDURES FOR PREPARATORY MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO 99 YOKOGAWA PLC a 5 lt 9 x e gt m En n O mE iE ZOE 8 2 3 Connecting to 072000 Series When using the RS232C RS485 converter Communication driver Lio YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 RS232C RS485 Temperature Connection cable 1
365. eries UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No RSB 28 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 SG 30 28 303 503 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal gt m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 29 8 3 Connection Diagram PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO 99 YOKOGAWA PLC a 5 lt ES 9 z e gt O x mE OTO me ZOE 2 ekoko 565 Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be within the maximum distance 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature controller Connecting te
366. ers are not consecutive Station Station Station Station Station No 3 No 7 No 1 No 15 No 6 Examples of station number setting 1 Direct specification When setting the device specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed 3 All station specification Target station differs depending on write in operation or read out operation For write in operation all station will be a target In the WORD BIT write in operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable lt gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings n the read out operation only the temperature controller whose station No is the same as host address is applicable For details of host address setting refer to the following gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings The all station specification can be set for the following temperature controllers only Specification UT420 UT450 UT520 0 550 T551 UT 750 ange UP550 UP750 1 to 99 US1000 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115
367. ess recommended to 16 or less ControlLogix5570 When PLC GOT is N 1 the following number of the PLCs can be connected to 1 GOT lt For GT16 GT14 gt TCP 128 or less lt For GT15 gt TCP 10 or less When PLC GOT is 1 N the following number of the GOTs can be connected to 1 PLC TCP 128 or less recommended to 16 or less 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 Ethernet Connection 10 3 2 GOT Side Settings Communication detail settings OE REN Make the settings according to the usage environment Setting communication interface j 3 Communication settings 1 GT16 GT14 Set the channel of the connected equipment Property GOT NET No GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 IP Label Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 ff Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Contral CompactLagix Ethernet Download Port 5014 5 i ern sas 4 Standard I F Ethernet Multi GOT Communication Port No 5015 20 AIR d iver Gateway Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 to Mel ss GOT NET No 1 Timeout Time Sec 3 D Delay 10 0 f Q Redundant GOT IP Address 182168318 D Station No Switching 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Ethemet Download Port No 5014 GOT Communication No 5015 Retry Times 3 Startup 5 3 Timeout 3 EN Delay 10 0 I
368. et OE 2 Kind BIT Description Set the device name device number and bit number Devi dis The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device 2 10 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set a When setting bit device Set the device using the format of module No slot No module bit No Device settings of HITACHI IES PLC 1 When specifying an external I O device Device 5 64 2 Device number Module internal bit No 00 95 DEC 2 Device name Slot No 0 A HEX Q Module No 0 5 DEC 25 b When setting a word device ee Set the device using the format of module No slot No module bit No For the device name setting enter w before the bit device name Device wx wj 057 Device number Module internal bit No 0 7 DEC Device name Slot No 0 HEX Module No 0 5 DEC 2 When specifying a remote external I O device a When setting a bit device Set the device using the format of remote master station remote slave station slot No module bit No k 49985 Device number Module bit No 00 95 DEC Device name Slot 0 9 DEC Remote slave station 0 9 DEC Remote master station 1 4
369. et only when specifying the bit of word device Set the CPU No 1 2 of the device to be monitored When device B is selected the CPU No is fixed to 1 Device Information Displays the device setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Select this item when writing data to all the temperature controllers connected When bit specification of word device is performed data are written to the temperature controller of the station No set for Host Address of the communication detail settings Monitoring and writing with bit specification of word All device are performed only for the station No set for Host Address When writing the data in numerical input the data is written to the connected temperature controller other than the ones specified by the word device during Network input and the temperature controller set for Host Address is monitored during other than input displaying Select this item when monitoring the temperature controller of the specified station No After selecting set the station No in the following range 11099 To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No To specify the station No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register Statio nNo 100 to 115 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER A The following shows the relation between sta
370. etthe port No of the host link service used on the PLC side 3 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers m W Communication detail settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt GTO User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 7 3 3 side setting YOKOGAWA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals gt YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Model name Refer to 01 5 7 3 4 Ethernet interface module F3LE11 0T F3LE12 0T 135 F3SP66 Built in Ethernet interface F3SP67 7 3 6 F3SP71 4N 7 3 4 Connecting to Ethernet Interface Module F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T Switch settings of Ethernet Interface Module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LE01 5T F3LE11 0T switch Right side view without the cover 1 IP address switch Set the IP address with eight Hex rotary switches on the side of the base unit 07 07 07 07 amp X amp
371. f the GOT to which the PLC is 0 to 99 connected in the connected network Default 0 Set this item to adjust the Delay Time transmission timing of the 0 to 300ms communication request from the GOT Default 5ms 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 17 4 2 Serial Connection PREPARATORY CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES CONNECTION TO gt HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC FUJI PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER For FUJI MICREX SX SPH Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 38400 Data Bit 8bit Stop Bit ibit Retry Times Timeout Time Sec Delay Time ms Item Description Range Set this item when change the 2 Transmission transmission speed used for Speed communication with the connected 57600bps equipment Default 38400bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used for communication with 7 1 Data Bit the connected equipment PEDIS Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for 1 Stop Bit communications Default 1bit Mbiu abits Specify whether or not to perform a a None n parity check and how it is performed Parity duri Li ir Even uring communication Odd Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs
372. g a printer unit E Oz Communication Pinter nit rae Communication unit 222 n iu oO 25 5 T 2 Ge When using the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or 22 multimedia unit oz Install the video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit or multimedia unit at the 1st stage of the extension interface These units cannot be used if installed in the 2nd or higher stage When any of these units is used the communication units indicated below must be installed in the 2nd stage of the 2 extension interface 5 Communication unit Model hi Sj o Bus connection unit GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS2 5 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 CC Link IE controller network GT15 J71GP23 8X communication unit 5 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 555 Example When installing a video input unit a MELSECNET H communication unit SES 252 MELSECNET H Video RGB SES Ay e ion uni input unit a gt y Video RGB MELSECNETIH input unit communication uni Da Oa lt ns 2 5 YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 25 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection Precautions for video input unit RGB input unit video RGB input unit RGB output unit and
373. g to communication module Communication settings Make the communication settings of the Communication module Item Set value Channel No setting 0 to 3 Protocol setting H 7338 protocol Transmission speed 19200bps fixed Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Odd fixed Start bit 1 bit fixed Stop bit 1 bit fixed 1 The ranges of available channel No differ depending on the model of communication module 2 Avoid duplication of the channel No Settings by switch Make the communication settings using each setting Switch Setting switches for the channel No and the protocol CN1 MODU CN2 MODU 1 Settings of the channel No and the protocol Switch position Protocol 4222 1 gt 22 il T MODU 9 1 H 7338 2 5 fe 2 z CN2 3 eet MODU 3 6 Device Range that Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows 3 6 1 HITACHI S10mini S10V Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The device specifications of controllers
374. gnal conversion adaptor 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 16 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch Terminating Switch No resistor 4 2 com SW1 100 OHM ON ON CE Disable OFF OFF 1 default setting is Disable For GT1685M S 19 BACHE E MIDI le IE m 2 Or 8 Q Q Terminating resistor setting switch inside the cover GT14 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch F E 5005 c 0 ACCESSOFF ON SD CARD z e A i Lord 2 i ow 6 Terminating resistor selector switch 1 31 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective
375. gram 5 1 Use communication 1 for the communication format 2 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 9 14 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration GOT When connecting directly to a temperature controller by RS 485 Tm ra E tr Fre a o 9 ae ox Connection cable Za Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Number of E Model Communication Cable model Max Model connectable Connection diagram number distance equipment 8 lt a Gs RS485 connection diagram 5 1200m Built into GOT FA LTBGTRACBLO5 0 5m U 4 5485 connection diagram 6 1200m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m E 400 RS 485 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m Up to 31 temperature controllers for 1 GOT 900 55 85485 connection diagram 7 1200m GT15 RS4 TE BS 20 55509485 connection diagram 14 1200m Built into GOT GT 85485 connection diagram 11 1200 GT14 RS2T4 9P2 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED e 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface
376. grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line RS485 connection diagram 17 GOT side Temperature controller Temperature controller spa 4 Li 1 rg RX f 11 RX ra ra SDB 6 um 5 5 RX 1 1 1 1 RDA 2 f 4 4 TX tt TX tt RDB 7 J m 6 ra 6 TX mn SG 1 SG 5 1 2 EE PU 2 SG RSA 3 n ed le eae I RSB Terminating resistor 1 cse FG 1 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal The value of terminating resistor varies between GT15 GT14 GT12 and GT11 Set the value as follows For the GT15 GT12 100 1 2W For the GT14 GT11 2200 1 4W 2 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal gt m Connecting terminating resistors 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 18 GOT side 459 _____ Temperature controller controller 5 Tow an 1 RX
377. gs with GOT settings 2 Data bit configuration Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8n1 8 None 1 8n2 8 None 2 8 1 8 1 8E2 8 Even 2 801 8 Odd 1 802 8 Odd 2 3 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the FB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following L gt FB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 43 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting Tm ra B tr 0 3 22 9 2 ae ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SYSTEMS PLC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER 9 5 7 Connecting to RB Series 1 Communication settings 9 5 9 Connecting to HA400 401 HA900 901 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Communication 1 Item Setting range Communication protocol 1 MODBUS Device address 4 1 to 99 Slave address un gt 2 9600bps Communication speed 3 19200bps Data bit configuration 2 Refer to the data bit configuration Item Communication speed 11 Setting range 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Interval time 0 to 250 When the setting value
378. h Comm Monitor 1 42 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet a O io xz ra TO x UE 95 ra as connection 16 15 14 cerle m A er Confirming the communication state on Windows GT Designer3 1 When using the Command Prompt of Windows Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows 5 a When normal communication C gt Ping 192 168 0 18 Reply from 192 168 0 18 bytes 32 time lt 1ms TTL 64 Lr b When abnormal communication Zo C gt Ping 192 168 0 18 Request timed out 2 2 When using the PING Test of GT Designer3 Select Communication Communication configuration Ethernet and Connection Test to display PING Test 2 1 Specify the GOT IP Address of the PING GOT IP Address 182 Test and click the PING Test button 2 The Test Result is displayed after the PING 2E Timeout Period PING Test 5 B Test is finished Test Result 3 TE Ovo SHS 2 29 On 9s est onnection lose PING Test t Ch 2 8s 3 When abnormal communication At abnormal communication check the followings and execute the Ping command again lt Mounting condition of Ethernet communication unit Cable connecting con
379. h the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor o Connecting terminating resistors 4 8 14 8 3 Connection Diagram GOT side which will be a terminal Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER RS485 connection diagram 6 E RS23C RS485 Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W interface converter Temperature controller Temperature controller a Po i i 1 SDB i if i 1 e Z 2 4 ar r r SDB 2 5 1 1 1 1 3 T z SDA 9 bg tg o i i DB p E E RDA Pi RDA 1 1 1 1 GND 6 ere Y m esed 4 4 9 zo Al Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller E e Sianal GREEN Series GREEN Series S AUS UT UP UM US Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 SDA 24 22 RDB 25 23 2 26 24 9 SG 27 25 ur 22 2 Terminating resistor should be provid
380. he RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications c ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the ALLEN BRADLEY PLC side module For details refer to the ALLEN BRADLEY PLC user s manual 10 8 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 2 Serial Connection 10 2 5 Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Controller Setting Controller Setting QD CH 1 AB 512500 CH 2 None CH3 None CH 4 None Netwaik Duplex Sel Ethernet Routing Information Gateway fiver AB SLCS00 1 N Communication S Gateway Server Gateway Client Mail FTP Server Fi File Transfer FTP Q Redundant D Station No Switching Controller AB SLC500 Standard I F RS232 1 Select Common menu Controller Setting from the 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer Controller Type Set either of the followings SLC500 AB MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 AB Control CompactLogix Interface to be used Driver Set either of the followings For GT16 GT15 GT14 GT11 When connecting to SL C500 S
381. he following table E 5 za Model of temperature controller Or UTAdvanced Series UT35A GREEN Series GREEN Series UT55A product product Signal name UT32A UP35A ub condition B UT UP UM US condition A UT75A UM33A UP55A product o UP55A product s condition condition Ea Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 5 a SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 c 5 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 5 lt RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code lt Model Produc Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS Es 1 485 communication 4 type 2 wire ZS type UT55A Product with two RS 485 communication B 1or2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor B Product without the additional contact n output points DO and with the open Se Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code E model 9 25 Product with the RS 485 communication z m E m _ With CH3 port 4 wire 1 2 wire type specified in terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type
382. he procedure to check the GT15 hardware version refer to the GT15 User s Manual 2 terminal block MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 and e GT1020 gt lt 2 Connector pin arrangement 55 20 GT16 GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 6 105 GT104 GTO1 RS4 M GT1030 GT1020 5 part connector from the back see from the front GOT main part f 5 E ooo 222022222 a 6 9 zzouoomzao ez QNHHODAATDYI 9 D sub male 9 pin terminal block o 2 828 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 27 1 4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection RS 422 interface Use the following as the RS 422 interface and RS 422 485 communication unit connector on the GOT For the GOT side of the connection cable use a connector and connector cover applicable to the GOT connector 1 2 Connector model GOT Connector type Connector model Manufacturer 9 pin D sub female RS 422 conversion unit M2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D2AC DDK Ltd fixed type GT16 1 14 pin female HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd GT14 GT12 9 pin D sub female GT1150 Q M2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd fixed type GT1050 Q id GT1040 Q GT1030 GT1020 9 pin terminal block MC1 5 9 G 3 5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc GT15 RS4 9S 9 pin D sub female
383. he temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 8 1 8bit None 1bit 8 2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit 801 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 4 Slave address 2 Setting DIP switches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol Dip switch ON ON Hi gt Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Select the device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 15 Connecting to X TIO Module 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings of the temperature controller Item Communication speed Setting range 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication protocol MODBUS Data bit configuration Data bit 8bit Parity None Data bit 8bit Pa
384. he transmission speed and data format according to settings of the transmission speed data length parity and stop bit on the GOT side For details on these GOT side settings refer to the following 7 2 5Setting communication interface Communication settings Transmission speed and data format Irem Transmis Stop sion Data bit Parity bit i speed Communication 9600 8bit E 1bit mode 0 bps br d Communication 9600 Communication mode 1 bps 8bits None 1bit 4 mode Communication 19200 8bit E 1bit mode 2 bps d Communication 19200 Bbits None 1bit mode 3 bps Communication 38400 Bbits Even 1bit mode 4 bps Communication 38400 bits None 1bit mode 5 bps Communication 57600 Bbits Even 1bit mode 6 bps Communication 57600 Bbits None 1bit mode 7 bps Communication 115200 Bbits Even 1bit mode 8 bps Communication 115200 Bbits Nona 1bit mode 9 bps Set the following when using the CPU programming port as the PC link function Make the checksum setting according to the sum check setting on the GOT side For the sum check setting on the GOT side refer to the following CPU PC link 7 2 5 Setting communication interface function Communication settings settings Item Set value Use of PC link function Mark Use enabled Mark ON Do not mark OFF Do not mark OFF Do not mark OFF Checksum End character Pr
385. he usage environment gt m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 227 1 12 communication setting Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment For MICREX F Property Value Transmission Speed BPS 9600 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Retry Times 0 Timeout 3 Host Address 0 Delay Time ms 5 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 2 Transmission transmission speed used for ps e 38400bps Speed communication with the connected ipment Default 9600b d equipment Default ps 115200bps Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for TN Stop Bit communications Default 1bit Specify whether not to perform parity check how it is performed Parity AD Even during communication Odd Default Even Set the number of retries to be Retry performed when a communication 0 to 5times error occurs Default Otime Set the time period for a Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address station No Host Address o
386. hich will be a terminal 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line m Oa lt RS485 connection diagram 3 9 2 Interface Terminating resistor 100Q 1 2W 2 5 Convents Temperature Temperature gt 5 485 777775 lt Controller side lt TS controller side E E bag zi TRD 2 r1 m x i 74 T 1 1 1 1 TRD 3 DU ry bog o SG 1 ndm z 3 t 3 lt 9 51 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table z 2 oo Model of temperature controller gt Signal PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 5 9 9 15 7 1 7 1 14 B 14 8 2 8 2 16 a 22272 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Ej fs Turn ON the terminating switch of an interface converter which will be a terminal o 3 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line EIE 898 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 7 5 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 4 GOT side 0 controler side SDA1 TXD1 f z M 1 SDB1 TXD1 n 1 SG 2 foii x SDA2 TXD2 5 x
387. ible with SNP X protocol can be connected 5 a E Communication driver 5 d 9 Dam Cim GE SNP X H nz Connection cable o 2 EE i 2 5 For the RS 232 connection PLC Connection cable GOT T Number of Communication EA 2 i p d d OIN EU sees connectable e F name ication onnection diagram Ista ption device ode 1 equipment 2 Modules Type number E z org IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 IC693CPU311 Built i c a Built into GOT Us RS232 020 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU313 IC693CMM311 RS 232 LAN 15m IC693PWR332 IC693CPU323 connection diagram 1 IC693PWR328 GT45 RS2 9P IC693PWR321 IC693CPU350 2 gt or IC693PWR330 IC693CPU360 5232 Built into GOT 2 E IC693PWR331 IC693CPU366 IC693CMM311 RS 232 post n 15m m 1PLCfor1GOT 9409 IC693PWR332 IC693CPU367 connection diagram 1 255 94542 IC693PWR328 IC693CPU374 995 IC693PWR321 IC693PWR330 Built into GOT 14 12 IC693PWR331 IC693CPU363 1C693CMM311 RS 232 Gea RS232 15m DB e IC693PWR332 connection diagram 1 9 O IC693PWR328 E GT15 RS2 9P 9 zu 1 Product manufactured by GE Corporation For details of the product contact GE Corporation Oo z o E og oe Zao Ore FOE lt 589 E gf 58 Fo
388. ic Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd O 5 When using the RS 232C 485 interface capsule ge Zn OS 5 2 Connection cable gt FE DEP 2 888 Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Model ble model Max ca s Option device Model equipment b o name 4 Connection diagram number distance capsule Type 2 E 2 GT GT GT Ww GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m Built into GOT 2 1 GOT for 1 RS 232C 485 o F70 FFK120A C10 RS 232 or 15 eH 941 lt GHrsese interface capsule C connection diagram GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by Fuji Electric Co Ltd For details of the product contact Fuji Electric Co Ltd CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 5 4 2 Serial Connection When connecting to multiple PLCs using RS 232C 485 interface capsules PLC Connection cable GOT RS 232C 485 Commun Number of connectable Made interface ication Cable model Max Option device Model equipment name T Connection diagram number distance capsule Type T F ss RS485 connection diagram 500m Built into GOT GT09 C30R41001 6T 3m 500 2 GT16 CO
389. ice type and setting range which are Inf ti selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Select this item to monitor the controller specified Host as the host station in the GOT utility setup Select this item to monitor a controller other than the one specified as the host station Network SIEMENS S7 300 400 Set the MPI address of the controller monitored SIEMENS S7 Ethernet Set the network number and the station Other number of the controller monitored Device settings of SIEMENS PLC 57 300 400 series S7 Ethernet 1 When setting a bit device as a bit device Set the device using the format of byte address DEC bit address 0 to 7 Device _ Device name ow Device number Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC 14 16 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 2 When setting a bit device as a word device Set the device number For the device name setting enter W after the bit memory device name Device Mw Dew 0128 Device name W added Device number Setting with even number 3 When setting a data register Set the device using the format of data block DB data word DW Device DB 10 DBw 10000 Device name Data word DW number Data block DB number 4 Precautions when setting devi
390. igners The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored 1 When using YOKOGAWA PLC FA M3 When YOKOGAWA PLC FA M3 is used the device range that can be used differs depending on the PLC model selected by the GT Designer3 Since YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 has larger device points that can be set than YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 select YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 if a large device points should be set 2 Devices to be set for an object When a device outside the range is set for an object an indefinite value is displayed on the object No error is displayed in the system alarm A device to be set for an object must be in the device range of YOKOGAWA PLC For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manual gt YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual 7 22 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 4 Device Range that Can Be Set Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 Device Information Network O Host Item Device Kind BIT Range Device 00201 71664 Other Station No Description Set the device name device number and bit number The bit number can be set
391. ils on the Utility refer to the following manual User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective Delay Time 0 to 300ms 11 5 PLC Side Setting 5 FE zoe O m H 11 5 2 Connecting to VersaMaxMicro 936 Zoz EE 6x6 GE PLC Communication settings ore For details of GE PLCs refer to the following manuals Make the communication settings using the gt GE PLC user s Manual engineering tool gt Fw Setting item PLC side setting 5 lt Model Refer to 9600bps 19200b En Data Rate ps ps 90 30 11 5 1 38400bps 22 z i zu VersaMaxMicro 11 5 2 Bits Tbits 8bits E Communication 693 311 11 5 3 Parity EVEN ODD NONE Modules 697 711 11 5 4 Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Port Mode SNP Port 2 Slave 5 11 5 1 Connecting to Series 90 30 Flow Control NONE 5 z Timeout Long Communication settings Around Delay 0 Make the communication settings using the SNP ID 00 to 31 engineering tool 9 9 f Set to the SNP protocol 8 When making the settings set Configuration Mode on i i hs 2 E o n 3 et to Long the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only 4 SettoO 9 lt 5 Set wi
392. in advance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ee E Ede cu eet e der OPERE 1 aute tu dt die 9 CONTENT EE 9 MANUALES oa i uuu Dedit A 17 QUICK REFERENCE ene cte eet et eec te esa Rene A 19 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC ARR A 21 HOW TO READ THIS e a dea a dc A 26 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication 1 3 1 1 1 Setting connected equipment Channel setting se 1 3 1 1 2 VF communication setting eee ennemis 1 13 AAS Lice npe 1 15 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the 1 16 1 2 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the 1 16 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing ON 1 17 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 18 1 3 1 Communication 1 18 12 22 1 19 13 3 Conversion cable nni d edet ditt inc edet EE EQ cede Lp eee 1 19 1 54 Connector conversion adapter 0 1 19 1 3 5 Serial multi drop c
393. inal block YASKAWA PLC side SDA est Lf RX SDB 4 RX RDA le 1 D RDB A 2 TX SG 14 GND RX RSB 7 RXR CSA 8 TX CSB TX 10 RX 11 12 13 VCC 6 14 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of RS 422 cable 2 must be 300m or less The maximum length of RS 422 cable 1 differs according to the specifications of the YASKAWA PLC side For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following gt 1 4 1 connector specifications c YASKAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YASKAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YASKAWA PLC user s manual 3 Connecting terminating resistors a GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to Disable For GT14 GT11 GT10 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 Q For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 14 3 Terminating resistors of GOT b YASKAWA PLC side When connecting a YASKAWA PLC to a GOT connect a terminating resistor to the YASKAWA PLC if required gt YASKAWA PLC user s Manual 6 2 8 Side Setti
394. ing to UT2000 Sorig S 8 6 8 2 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced 5 8 7 9 3 Connection Diagram oct ete tee epe ete needs 8 10 8 3 1 232 cable intei edd ede dn duda e nuda edad ned 8 10 9 3 2 RS 485 cable dico ati beri xdi tiis d inei nese 8 11 8 4 8 31 8 4 1 Setting communication interface Communication 8 31 8 4 Communication detail 8 31 8 5 Temperature Controller Side 8 33 8 5 1 Connecting to GREEN EAA 8 33 8 6 87 8 5 2 Connecting to UT100 Series 2 2 4 424 4 4 2 1 01 244 4444 8 34 8 5 3 Connecting to UT2000 Series 8 34 8 5 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced 5 8 34 8 5 5 Connecting to RS232C RS485 converter 2 8 35 8 5 6 Station number 8 36 Device Range that Can 1 1 nsns innen hs 8 37 8 6 1 YOKOGAWA GREEN UT 100 UT2000 UT Advanced 8 37 Pre
395. interface 2 i b 6115 3rd stage 2nd stage Standard interface 1 RS 232 interface built in the GOT iL _ Standard interface 2 Example In the case of the GT1575 USB interface built in the GOT 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 9 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface c GT14 SD CARD 4 E sp Reser 100 SD 1 T M JIRD E A Front view Rear view Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 3 GOT built in USB interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface 10BASET 100BASE TX Standard interface 4 GOT built in Ethernet interface Under view d GT12 Standard interface 4 GOT built in Ethernet interface Front view Rear view Standard interface 1 GOT built in RS 422 interface Standard interface 2 GOT built in RS 232 interface 1 10 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface GT11 GT11 Serial Front view Standard interface
396. into GOT Z DIO Up to 16 e SRZ connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m Total of Z TIO Z diagram 8 diagram 3 CT and Z DIO Up GT15 RS2 9P to 31 for 1 GOT 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd 8 za pun ro When connecting directly to temperature control module Z TIO Z CT i z 2 sie Oz gt ne 2 Eu 2 5 Ono Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT Communication able mode Max Number of connectable equipment Series Connection diagram Option device Model ZO Type distance On number 5 2 User i zi esi RS485 connection 4200m Built into GOT 22 diagram 5 On FA LTBGTR4CBL05 0 5m 2 ser RS485 connection FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m 2 diagram 6 FA LTBGTRACBL20 2mY Z TIO Up to 16 2m Z CT Up to 16 os SRZ RS 485 User RS485 connection Z DIO Up to 16 preparing Zao i 1200m erie keris Total of Z TIO Z CT and Z DIO Orr diagram 7 FOE Up to 31 for 1 GOT 820 User i 2 85485 connection 1200m Built into GOT 589 diagram 14 Oz r i RS485 connection 1200m GT44 RS2TA 9P diagram 11 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 5 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact amp g MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINE
397. ir No 00001 Ch No 00001 Param DA00000 Normal completion I END IF Parameter settings completed 5 000004 DB000400 Q Sends a Message Receive instruction Execute MSG RCV Message receive function MSG RCV Execute 5 000004 Busy 08000210 When the receive message command coil Execute turns on the executing coil Busy turns on The normal completion coil Complete or abnormal completion coil Error turns on at the completion of processing Receive message abort coil Communication device type Dev Typ 5 2171 Communication protocols Pro Typ 1 MEMOBUS Line number 1 For 2171F any of 1 to 16 set in 2 Transmission buffer channel number Ch No 1 Always 1 for 2171F IF DB000211 true NEN Checking the normal completion Does the normal completion coil turn on INC Dest DW00024 Increments the normal pass counter by 1 END_IF Abnormal completion IF DB000212 true INC Checking the abnormal completion Does the abnormal completion coil turn on Dest 0 00025 Increments the abnormal pass counter by 1 STORE Source 0 00000 Dest DW00026 Stores the processing results STORE Source DW00001 Dest DW00027 END IF Stores the status END 1
398. it length used for communication with 7bits bits E the connected equipment S 2 Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits menu Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a None 2 Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Parity parity check and how it is performed en R channel be used from the list menu during communication Odd g Default Odd 52 Q 3 Set the following items Set the number of retries to be Manufacturer FUJI Retry acommunicaton Controller PXR PXG PXH eos Default Otime I F Interface to be used o Set the time period for a m Driver FUJI PXR PXG PXH Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec 4 Default 5 5 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Specify the host address station No 25 Controller Type I F and Driver are set of the GOT to which the temperature 9 2 Make the settings according to the usage Host Address controller is connected in the 1 to 255 za 9 9 9 environment connected network TNT Default 1 gt 5 4 2 Communication detail settings Sa ihis tem io adusie a transmission timing of the a i icati Og Click the OK button when settings are completed Delay Time request from the 0 to 300ms 5 me z Default 5ms 9 PO NT
399. it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and 155 11 6 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 2 System Configuration 11 2 3 Connecting to VersaMax Micro Only the models that are compatible with SNP X protocol can be connected For the RS 232 connection Telele amp Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Communication Model name Connection diagram Max distance Option device Model ype number 2000 003 IC200UAR014 1200000104 Built into GOT 1 200000112 68 232 85232 connection 15m IC200UDRO01 diagram 2 IC200UDRO02 IC200UDRO03 usd IC200UALO04 SS IC200UALO05 u IC200UAL006 Built into GOT IC200UAA007 2000 28 IC200UDD110 IC200UDD120 IC200UDD212 RS 232 89232 connection 15m IC200UDRO05 diagram 2 IC200UDROO6 IC200UDRO010 IC200UDD064 IC200UDD164 IC200UDR164 IC200UDRO64 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC Communication driver Liz GE SNP X Number of connectable equipment 1 PLC for 1 GOT 11 7 11 2 System Configuration RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC Zz z CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO
400. itches Make the settings of transmission speed data bit configuration communication protocol LU rinner Dip switch 3 1 ary M COM i off gt rJ OFF ON 1 h COM1 COM PORT2 ME ty h u 2 COM PORT4 ts ee CE Front side Right side Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 ff 8 Communication 9600bps ON OFF speed 19200bps ON COM1 ON ON Communication protocol kost ON MODBUS COM1 Communication 9600bps OFF speed COM2 19200bps ON Communication Host protocol ON OFF OFF MODBUS COM2 Dip switch settings valid OFF valid invalid 9 42 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 3 Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch o 4 Interval time settings Unit address setting switch Setting range 0 to F Configure the interval time setting using the RKC communication setting tool WinPCI After the communication is started set as follows Setting item Instrument Set val
401. le gu 200 at Ort FOE 1 OUO Setting by GT Desi 3 259 etting by esigner TE Device wr 8 8 gi n id File type File No Element No 58 65 2 10 4 2 MicroLogix1000 1200 10 4 3 MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series 1400 1500 Series Device extended Device PA For details of this communication driver please contact our Device name Setting range represen company tation Bit 1 1 0 0 0 to 16 7 15 Bit O 0 0 0 to 16 7 15 Bit B B3 0 0 to B255 255 15 10 4 4 AB Control CompactLogix Timer Timing 3 T3 0 14 TT to T255 255 14 TT bit T Timer Device Completion bit T3 0 13 DN to T255 255 13 DN No 8 Ty3 Device name Setting range gt 5 represen Decimal Z Counter Up tation fra C3 0 15 CU to C255 255 15 CU 3 counter C g Counter Down 3 3 0 14 CD to C255 255 14 CD BOOL BOOLO 0 to BOOL999 31999 Decimal counter C 5 Count 2 3 a INT INTO 0 to INT999 999 Completion bit C3 0 13 DN to C255 255 13 DN 2 3 C DINT DINTO 0 to DINT999 999 Decimal gt Integer 3 0 0 255 255 15 5 REAL REALO 0 to REAL999 999 Bit B 4 B3 0 to B255 255 Timer Set 1 Only 32 bit 2 word designation is allowed 93 3 0 1 to 255 255 1 value Timer Current 43 T3 0 2 ACC to 255 25
402. ler 1 x 7 SS II f SS Ss SSS Se i rt il ad ing 1 1 SDB 1 1 RDA SDAS SDB K 2 1 1 1 1 Roe ee Li SDA eae EN 8 RDB 11 E SDA 13 RDB uoz Lag UM RDAC 1 HN SDB i Sc 11 i RDA r5 05 252 1 1 1 1 SG r2 SG ii PIE aes a oP 1 1 d gt ES inafi 2 zo Terminating resistor 220Q 1 4W 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table ZO Model of temperature controller 5 lt UTAdvanced Series SES GREEN UT35A UT55A product Signal name Series UT32A UP35A UT55A product condition B UT UP UT75A UM US UM33A condition A UP55A UP55A product product condition A condition B SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 m SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 ir RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 e RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network 2 Product with the open network port of RS 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire 9 9 type zu UT55A z5 Product with two RS 485 communication O5 B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power sup
403. ler Z CT SRX SA compatible Ethernet connection with SIEMENS PLC SIMATIC S7 300 400 series compatible Jul 2011 SH NA 080870ENG G Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 31H YOKOGAWA temperature controller UTAdvanced series compatible MURATEC controller connection compatible Oct 2011 SH NA 080870ENG H Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 37P GT14 GT12 are added Jan 2012 SH NA 080870ENG I Compatible with GT Works3 1 405 Communication Setting is compatible with 5V power supply AB MicroLogix1000 1200 1500 Series Device extended compatible Connectable model GT14 is added for the following FUJI FA PLC FUJI SYS TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 232 485 signal conversion adaptor is added Apr 2012 SH NA 080870ENG J Compatible with GT Works3 1 45 Connectable model GT14 is added Jun 2012 SH NA 080870ENG K Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 54G Description of the temperature controller manufactured by Azbil former Yamatake Corporation is moved from this manual to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Non Mitsubishi Products 1 Ping test at the GT14 compatible Sep 2012 SH NA 080870ENG L Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 58L YOKOGAWA PLC F3SP71 4N compatible Nov 2012 SH NA 080870ENG M Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 63R Ethernet connection with YASKAWA PLC CP 317 compatible RKC temperature contro
404. ller SB1 B400 compatible SAFETY PRECAUTIONS changed Feb 2013 SH NA 080870ENG N Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 67V ALLEN BRADLEY PLC expanded station number setting compatible SIEMENS PLC 57 1200 OP communication compatible May 2013 SH NA 080870ENG O Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 70Y e YOKOGAWA PLC model F3SP76 7S is added Jun 2013 SH NA 080870ENG P REVISIONS 1 Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 74C Company name change FUJI FA FUJI FUJI SYS FUJI GE FANUC GE ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 1756 L72S compatible SIEMENS PLC 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 compatible The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Nov 2013 SH NA 080870ENG Q Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 104J YOKOGAWA temperature controller UT75A compatible Apr 2014 SH NA 080870ENG R Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 111R The ALLEN BRADLEY PLC MicroLogix1400 is supported Jul 2014 SH NA 080870ENG S Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 118Y FUJI PLC MICREX SX SPH compatible SICK safety controller FX3 CPU320002 compatible Oct 2014 SH NA 080870ENG T Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 122C GT14 is added GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QMBD Jan 2015 SH NA 080870ENG U Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 126G Some corrections Apr 2015 SH NA 080870ENG V Compatible with GT Works3 Version1 130L
405. ller Side Setting 5 6 Device Range that Can Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set GT Designers The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the models even though belonging to the same series Please make the setting according to the specifications of the controller actually used When a non existent device or a device number outside the range is set other objects with correct device settings may not be monitored Setting item lt Bit gt CH1 FUJI PXR PXG PXH Device Information Kind WORD Range Device 0001 1398 Network Station No Item Description Device Set the device name device number and bit number PMES The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Information Displays the device type which is selected Device Bit Word Set the monitor target of the set device To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No Network 1 to 119 216 to 255 To monitor the temperature controller of the specified station No stationcNo 200 to 215 To specify the station No of the temperature controller to be monitored by the value of GOT data register 1 The following shows the relation between station numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register
406. mages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and
407. may differ Dues depending on the models even though belonging to the Device name Setting range same series pn tation Please make the setting according to the specifications of e External input X X000 to XFFF the controller actually used A When non existent device or a device number outside Pxternal output Y 1090 10 VERE 29 the range is set other objects with correct device settings Internal register R R000 to RFFF may not be monitored Keep relay K K000 to KFFF a Setting item Extended internal register 000 to MFFF M ge lt Bit gt CH1 HITACHI STOmini STOV Extended internal register A000 to AFFF 69 Device Information a Hexadec Kind On delay timer T T000 to T1FF imal 25 QE a Doves One shot timer U 0000 to UOFF ORE Up down counter C to CFF 8 Global link register GL 61 000 to GLFFF e M 0 Event register E000 to EFFF gt System register 5 5000 to SBFF Item Information i 8 R Transfer register J 4000 to JFFF Z Set the device name device number and bit number o3 Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit Receive register Q Q000 to QFFF of word device Specified bit of the information Displays device type and setting range which are following word devices 3 selected in Device One shot time
408. mmand setting type start stop 3 s 2 synchronization nonsequence i format 2 ON RS 232C 1 1 ote and RS 485 1 N Switch No 94 Command setting type start stop Setting item Set value 1 synchronization nonsequence gt lt format 3 Transmission 9600bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OF RS 485 1 N speed 19200bps OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Setting of the station Make the station No using RS 485 station No e Switches Connecting to NP1L RS1 NP1L RS2 NP1L RS3 NP1L RS4 NP1L RS5 Be Station No E 5 1 Communication settings E OT Make the communication settings using setting 01099 ADDRESS switches MODE switch x 2 Connecting terminating resistors RS485 station 2 Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS No switch 99 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch RS485 terminator switch sm c m 5 ag 2 fi B e d Setting of Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing 65h method 5a Make the settings using the character configuration 2 switches Em Switch Item Set value 8 MODE switch MODE 1937 6 RS485 station Station No 12 o ee No switch
409. mmunication with the PLC CPU 9 227 14 3 3 detail settings Default 3sec og5 gil Set the time period for a SEg Click the OK button when settings are completed Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 90 sec 82 Default 3sec E 250 i i OZ POINT Set the delay time for reducing the 0 to 10000 orf WUT Delay Time load of the network destination PLC x 10 Default Oms settings of connecting equipment be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 5 1 12 communication setting 38 ie Sz 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 11 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 12 1 Click the Setting button and perform the setting in the GOT IP Address Setting screen GOT IP Address Setting This setting is shared by other items of Ethernet Driver GOT IP Address Ethernet Download Port No Subnet Mask Default Gateway 192168318 2 Each of GOT PLC No set the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers C 3 Ethernet setting 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 3 Ethernet Connection 2 GT15 Ethernet Dow Property Value GOT NET No 1 GOT PLO No 1 GOT IP Address 192168318 Label Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 nload Port No 5014 GOT Communication Port No
410. model Connection diagram number GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m or Ass RS232 connection diagram 1 Max distance 15m Option device Built into GOT Model GT15 RS2 9P H 252C RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m RS232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m or 5232 connection diagram 2 Transmission speed other than the above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 5232 connection diagram 1 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT GT15 RS2 9P 10473 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 EH CPU516 EH CPU548 RS 232 Specified transmission speed 4800bps GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 Specified transmission speed 19200bps GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 Specified transmission speed 38400bps GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 2 Transmission speed other than the above GT09 C30R20401 15P 3m 232 connection diagram 1 GT09 C30R20402 15P 3m amp 5232 connection diagram 2 15m Built into GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 connect to 200 to 252 series connect to the peripheral port of the CPU module 2 connect to serial port 2 of H 252C CPU22 02HC CPE22 02HC the round connector 8 pins D sub connector 15 pins conversion cable
411. mote Properties Set 10 00 in TSAP Parameters Subnet Client mask PLC side subnet mask Enable the Keep Alive function for this Unmark the check box connection b Fetch port setting Item Setting details b 57 300 400 Set the following parameters Options Mode Select Fetch passive Wh he Eth aul en using the Ethernet module Local PLC side IP address 9 IP dec Remote Default Item Setting details Addresses PORT Local PLC side port No IP Address PLC side IP address dec Remote Default Properties sunet PLC side subnet mask mask c Write port setting When using the built in Ethernet port Item Setting details Options Mode Select Write passive tem details Local PLC side IP address ees i Remote Default IP Address side IP address Addresses Properties Subnet PORT Local PLC side port No mask PLC side subnet mask dec Remote Default c S7 1200 d Precautions for setting The Keep Alive function of the Siemens CP Module is not supported Specify 0 for Keep Alive Setting details Set the following parameters IP Address PLC side IP address Ethernet addresses Subnet PLC side subnet mask mask 14 14 14 CONNECTION SIEMENS PLC 14 3 Ethernet Connection 14 3 5 Precautions eg When connecting to multiple GOTs 14 1 Setting PLC
412. mperature controller with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following 57 8 4 2 Communication detail settings GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 8 38 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 7 Precautions Tm ra E tr Fre a o 9 ae CONNECTION TO amp TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 IE I IS cTl6 15 ct14 jetl2 ctl 1 6110 zie 9 1 Connectable Model List 9 2 2 9 2 System 9 4 295 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 26 52 9 4 GOT Side 5 9 38 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 39 9 6 Device Range that Can Be Set 9 50 la 9 7
413. mperature controller controller E gt EY der oe Mi 1 ed SDAC 1 Li EE Li RDA i it it SDB 2 RDB RDA 3 Li eL r Li SDA oe 1 1 1 1 RDB 4 e i SDB z 1 1 SG 1 1 sG 5 j Li L Li SG 94 1 1 1 1 GND y La K DE cS ZO 4 4 S lt OT 51 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UT UP UM US 2 Pin RDA 26 24 25 23 SDB 23 21 Sz SDA 24 22 SG 27 25 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Lr RS485 connection diagram 2 Be Temperature GOT side MEE TEES Temperature controller P controller Om Bx 1 RDA1 RXD1 10 Li La EET L4 SDB RDB1 RXD1 12 E x c T SDA SDA1 TXD1 6 Li LI p Li RDB a SDB1 TXD1 8 Lt 4 RDA e pi 1 SG 1 ii SG 2 SG Va le GND Ki ls E un RSA RTS 41 1 3 38 55 X Ie 1 GND Sa CSA CTS 18 4 4 RSB R
414. mple project POU to the new project 1 Open C Install Folder ogicDesignen Projects EXAMPLE J mwt 2 Right click Emulator in the Logic POU under the project tree in the Example J project and select Copy 3 Right click the Logic POU under the project tree in the created new project and select Paste 4 Double click the FAM3 Emulator file in the FAM3 Emulator folder 5 For the following terminals set as shown below REQ terminal TRUE TERMCHAR terminal FALSE PORT terminal COM1 STATION terminal STATION 1 SD CFAM3R OPEN COM1 VALID TRUE COM1 COM1 PORT ERROR ERROR FALSE 4 TERMCHAR STATUS STATUS1 FALSE CHECKSUM STATION1 STATION D D B B COMERR1 COMERR COMERR COMERR1 Definition example of Logic POU 5 Defining the instance Instantiate Logic POU Define an already defined instance to Tasko 1 Right click the Physical hardware Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Tasks Task0 CYCLIC and select Insert Program instance 2 Define the program instance name and select Emulator for the program type 6 Defining Target Setting Define the IP address or host name of STARDOM for which the communication settings are made Double click Physical hardware Configuration IPC_33 FCX01 FCX Target Setting and input the IP address or the host name Downloading the project 1 Execute Build Make Same as when pre
415. mpleted 85 8 The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 GT16 GT14 Property GOT NET No GOT PLC No IP Label Subnet Mask Retry Times GOT IP Address Default Gateway Ethernet Download Port No GOT Communication Port No 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 5014 5016 3 Startup 5 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time x10ms 0 Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT 4 to 239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT GOT PLC No 1 to 64 Default 1 GOT Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to IP Address Default 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default PUT 2 00 0010 ee 255 255 255 255 router Default 0 0 0 0 ish 1024 to 5010 5 ee Set the GOT port No for Ethernet 5014 to 65534 download Except for 5011 im Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 1024 to 5010 cor connection wih the ae 504 695 Communication Except for 5011 Por
416. munication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication ee port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in ERG the E3 terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication 2 With 4 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal gt m Connecting terminating resistors 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 27 Temperature Temperature GOT side mv 42 controller controller Ei RSB T ey SDA1 TXD1 1 E E 50 RSB it rag z SDB1 TXD1 2 RSA SG 13 r3 m ar 1 SG RDA1 RXD1 T X T aay RDB1 RXD1 4 E La SDA2 TXD2 5 Li 1 1 Hg i Terminating resistor 2200 1 4W it par erminating resistor RSA RTS 9 E RSB RTS 10 it CSA CTS 11 1 CSB CTS 12 RDA2 RXD2 7 RDB2 RXD2 8 NC 14 Shell 1 Pin No of temperature
417. munication with the PLC CPU Default 3sec 3 to 255sec Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 0 to 10000 10ms 1 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers gt Ethernet setting Ethernet setting Controller Setting Seting 0 CH 1 YOKOGAWA STAF CH 2 None PLE No Type IP Address Communication 1 YOKOGAWA 1111 UDP Delete All Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the N W No connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the PLC No connected Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank YOKOGAWA T YOKOGAWA fixed fixed fixed Set the IP add f th 2 PLC side IP address connected Ethernet module address Default blank Set the port No of the connected Port No 2 Ethernet module 12289 12291 Default 12289 Communication format Select a communication protocol Default UDP UDP TCP 1 Set the same IP address and communication format those of the PLC side 2 S
418. n b GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE GT1450 QLBDE 6 20 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 6 3 2 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment QD CH 1 YASKAWA 200 CH2 None CH 3 None CH 4 None N D Manufacturer YASKAWA Controller Type YASKAWA MP2000 MP300 CP92005H enok Duper Setting 12 Ethemet VF 289 Routing Information Ek Gateway Sp Communication S El Gateway Server BIB Gateway Client T Value Mail 3 1 FTP Server File Transfer FTP 18 0 Redundant 192168318 A Station No Switching Standard I F Ethemet Mult Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway 255 255 255 0 0000 5014 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer YASKAWA Controller Type Set either of the following CP9200SH MP900 series MP2000 MP900 I F Interface to be used Driver Ethernet YASKAWA Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 6 3 2 Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are co
419. n 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication wi ified i 2 _ _ With CH3 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in On he E3 terminal area option Detailed code lt UP55A model uz Product with two RS 485 communication E S 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard lt code model B Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified VIGA he E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 9 wn i s zu 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal Ox 3 Setthe terminating resistor of GOT side which will be a terminal 5 5 gt m Connecting terminating resistors eg 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line e a 5 lt 9 x e gt o gt eo mE OTO 0 0 2 ZOE 565 N 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 2 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 26 Terminating resistor me Temperature 2200 1 4Wy Temperature GOT side controller 1 BEN PS controller UM Ca UM 1 SDB Y SDA1 TXD1 6 Li
420. n Be Set Device Device name Setting range representation Specified bit of the following 3 4n word devices Word device bit Direct access a User file Non retain 1943 MO to M2097151 2 3 Retain memory o 1243 LO to L2097151 Decimal BY SMO to 5 511 5 29 1 bit specification of a word device is performed after the GOT reads the value do not change the value in the sequence program during this period 2 Whenitis used with bit specification bit specification of word device the offset function cannot be used 3 When bit specification bit specification of word device is performed the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Higher Lower 50 b1 b14 b15 4 5 Precautions Station No settings of the PLC side In the system configuration the PLC with the station number set with the host address must be included For details of host address setting refer to the following gt m Communication detail settings System configuration of the PLC side GOT can communicate in a system configuration where NC1L PS4 FFU120B and FFK120A C10 are mixed When using FFK120A C10 the number of PLCs that can communicate is at most 6 units GOT clock control The GOT clock function is available only for the PLC with the station number set with the host address For details of host a
421. n cable 2 Connection cable 1 Connection cable Connection cable PLC Cnet I F module GOT 1 2 NEK Number of Cable model Commu Cable model aes connectable Series Connection Model name nication Connection Option device Model equipment diagram number Type diagram number RS422 connection 500 2 Built into GOT diagram 4 31 PLCs for 1 GOT GT16 C02R4 9S 3 Sod 0 2m GT GT Kaos GseRs422 0895422 Built into GOT The following number 1205 connection G7L CUEC RS 422 connection of PLCs for 1 GOT diagram 3 diagram 1 500m d GT16 GT15 31 GT15 RS2T4 9P GT11 GT1050 6 104 10 GT15 RS4 9S RS422 connection 500 2 Built into GOT 211020 10 PLCs for 1 GOT diagram 2 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd 2 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable 4 to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 12 4 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 2 Connecting to 2005 Ww ac When connecting to one PLC 2 50 Ia Communication driver 2 2 TID 2 z LS Industri
422. n the first scan after startup Low speed scan DWGL 5 000003 High speed scan DWGH 5 000001 Clears DW register to zero 0000 NL 1 Variable Init 00000 Max 00031 Step 00001 STORE A 0002 Source 00000 I END FOR Dest DW00000i Sets the connection number Sets the coil offset Sets the input relay offset O Sets the input register offset k CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC Sets the holding register offset 72 0003 NL 2 STORE 0004 Source 00001 Dest 0 00002 STORE A 0005 Source 00000 Dest 0 00008 STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00009 STORE A 0007 NL 2 Source 00000 Dest 0 00010 STORE A 0008 Source 00000 Dest DWO00011 STORE 0009 Source 00000 Dest DW00012 Write range LO 2 Continued to next page 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 25 6 3 Ethernet Connection 0010 0010 NL 2 0011 0011 NL 2 0012 0012 NL 2 0013 0013 NL 2 0014 0014 NL 1 0015 0015 NL 1 0016 0017 NL 1 0017 0018 NL 1 0018 0019 NL 2 0019 0020 NL 2 010740 0021 NL 1 STORE Source 0000065534 Dest DW00013 STORE Source 00000 AJ Dest DW00014 H STORE Source 00000 Dest DWO00024 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00025 IF SB000004 DB000400 2 oat
423. ne Retry Times 0 Timeout Time Sec 3 Item Description Range Set this item when change the 4800bps eot 9600bps e transmission speed used for Transmission ade 19200bps communication with the connected Speed 384006 equipment 57600bps Default 9600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length Data Bit used for communication with the 7bits 8bits connected equipment Default 8bits Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity M check and how it is performed during Parity iva Even communication Odd Default No Set whether or not to perform a sum check Sum Check during communication Yes or No Default Yes Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Retry When receiving no response after retries 0 to 5times the communication times out Default Otime Set the time period for a communication to Timeout Time time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Set this item to adjust the transmission Delay Time timing of the communication request from 0 to 30 1 the GOT x 10ms Default Oms PONT 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the foll
424. nection cable 1 T t Interface lads Connection cable 1 5 Connection cable 2 GOT controller converter Number of Cable model distance Commu Cable model Max Connection diagram nae nication Connection diagram distan Option device Model equipment number Type number ce W BF 28 0500 0 5m W BF 28 1000 1m 1 Builtinto eum ex Up to 31 W BF 02 0500 0 5m W BE 28 3000 GOT temperature 1 W BF 02 1000 1m 1000m COM A RS 232 15m or Serial controllers for W BF 02 3000 3m TEOT RS232 connection diagram 2 45 15 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 9 20 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter CD485V Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Connection cable 3 Temperature Connection cable Connection cable Interface 4 Connection cable 3 GOT controller 1 2 converter Number ot umber o Max Comm bl Cable model Cable model dreic Cable model Max 7 connectable Model Model unicati 4 Option equipment Connection Connection Connection dista Model quip name device diagram number diagram number Tus diagram number nce W BF 02 0500 0 5m Built into W BF 02 1000 RS48
425. nel number of communication interface communication drivers allocation status Communication unit installation status 1 O io KZ ra TO We 95 ra as For details on the Utility refer to the following manual gt User s Manual E When using GT16 GT12 z On For GT16 eu 7 1 powering up the GOT touch Main menu So ee T 3 Communication setting from the Utility 2 main unit set 2 og 45 t OT 2 H 94 Zn 25 5 5 2 TOUCH Communication setting 5 Fw g ES E ee Oro J Communica g a Zsa SES Es On Te 25 5 oS ES 52 29 2 gt amp a zer lt 559 a 555 gt 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 35 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment Channel Driver assign ChNo USB 9 Host PC ChNo Ethernet ChNo RS422 485 0 None None Extend I F Setting Extend F 1 1st ChNo None Extend 1 2 ChNo None None None 2nd CtNo None 0 None None 0 None 3rd None 0 None ChNo None 0 lone Definition of ChNo 5 8 External device 1 4 device connection 9 connection 0ther connect ion
426. ng Port 256 to 65535 with software Transmission MPE720 parameter R T 0 N Tee detailed setting esponse Time ot require Count of Retry E communication Number of Retries with GOT Range of built in MP2300S Ethernet 1 to 4 Connection Number 1 Range of 218IF 02 1 to 20 Local Port 10500 256 to 65534 IP address 1 Node Address 1 1414 of GOT Message 4 Port No communication Dade of GOT of connection TCP UDP parameter recommended setting Extended MEMOBUS Protocol Type Extended MEMOBUS MEMOBUS MELSEC None MODBUS TCP Code BIN BIN Up to 32 one byte Node Name Arbitrary characters 16 two byte characters 1 Set the same the Node IP Address Remote Station s IP Address and the Node Port Remote Station s Port Number as the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side For the Local IP Address and the Local Port Local Station s Port Number on the GOT side refer to the following um 6 3 2 m Ethernet setting 6 24 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection Sequence program To communicate the MP2000 series or MP920 series with the GOT1000 series the ladder program to receive massages is required When connecting the MP2000 series or MP920 series with multiple GOTs ladder programs to receive messages for each GOT are required ladder program to receive massages Sets parameters i
427. ng of transmission mode LAT Please install the 05 ul S7 Turn on the GOT while the bottom right corner is touched 1 16 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 2 2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS project data and communication settings are properly written onto the GOT by reading from GOT using GT Designers For reading from the GOT refer to the following manual gt gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Communicate with GOT ESI E cor ve EM Write Project Data 05 Boot OS O Special Data Write Mode Select write data Write Check Acquire GOT information GOT Type GT16 V 640480 Destination Drive C Builtin Flash Memory Write Data Size Project Data 3 Kbyte Untitled Project1 05 4699 Kbyte Base Screen Total 4701 Kbyte In addition to the above Communication Settings use OKbyte GOT RAM Communication Settings with GOT IP List v Standard monitor 05 Write Drive Information E v Communication driver Extended function 05 LSS E Option 05 Common Settings WB Data Area Kbyte Free Space Kbyte Write after deleting
428. ng word devices _ timer counter word internal output External input WX WxX0000 to WX05A7 Hexadecimal Decimal External output WY WY0000 to WY05A7 Remote external input WX WX1000 to WX4997 Decimal 8 Remote external output WY WY1000 to WY4997 gt First CPU link WL WLO00 to WL3FF gt 2nd CPU link WL1 WL1000 to WL13FF Hexadecimal Data area WM WMO000 to WM3FF Timer Counter Elapsed value TC TCO to TC511 Decimal Word internal output WR WRO000 to WR3FF Hexadecimal 1 Overlapped numbers cannot be used 2 not set device outside the range If the set device is outside the range the object set by the device within the range may not be displayed 2 12 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 2 6 Device Range that Can Be Set SNINO LINOIN 5 AHOl1VHVd3Hd co SFI IHOVLIH OL NOILOANNOO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC IHOVLIH 01 NOLLO3NNOO 1 0 Connectable Model List 3 1 3 2 System OL NOILOANNOO 1 1 1 e o cC D c e Sp O S o og o 5 ke O 1 0 e o W3TIOH LNOO OL NOLLO3NNOO 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set VWV9OMOA YATIONLNOOD 01 NOILOANNOO 01 NOILOANNOO FUNLWYAAWAL VW900A OL
429. ngs Communication detail settings gt Setting communication interface Make the settings according to the usage environment gt us e Communication settings 1 YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS E De Set the channel of the connected equipment pam Property Value 9 S Transmission Speed BP5 19200 2 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit e Even ee CH 3 None za CH 4 None Controller Type YASKAWA GL PROGICS Retry T imes 0 Newark Duper Setting Soma cs Startup Time Sec 3 Or ke Gateway YASKAWA GL CPS200 SH H CPS300MS 5 2 Zp Conmsicalon Timeout 3 2 lt BE peti 9t Speed BPS Host Address 1 am Tende FTP a Delay Time 10ms 0 AD Station No Switching Parity Retry Times Startup Time Sec un Time Sec g Host Address S ae Description Range 5 m Set this item when change the 4800bps m 5 aR transmission speed used for 9600bps za Transmission 3 rd Speed communication with the connected 19200bps OT P equipment 38400bps Default 19200bps 57600bps 1 Set this item when change the data Select Common Controller Setting from the length used for communication with e menu the connected equipment 8bi 2 Controller Setting window is displayed
430. nsmission speed and the parity Make those settings by operating the communication setting Rotary switch 8 5 4 Connecting to UTAdvanced Series Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 7bits 8bits Parity bit Even odd none Stop bit ibit 2bits Address 1 to 99 Minimum response time 0 to 10 x 10ms Piotecolis laction 0 PC link communication without sum check rotocol selection Gu eser Parity bit 1 PC link communication with sum check 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 0 2 Avoid duplication of the address with any of the other units 1 9600bps Odd 2 Even 8 34 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 5 5 Connecting to RS232C RS485 converter ML2 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Setting 2 wire 4 wire 2 2 wire type or 4 wire type Terminating resistor 2 With Without Echo back OFF RS 485 driver active control AUTO 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Refer to the following connection diagram for setting C 3 8 3 2 RS 485 cable Settings by switch S gO gt may sy W gl a aO
431. nto the GOT GT16 connect it to the corresponding connector securely and tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT GT15 fully connect it to the connector until you hear a click When mounting an optional function board onto the GOT GT11 fully connect it to the connector When inserting a CF card into the GOT GT16 GT15 GT11 push it into the CF card interface of GOT until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT GT16 GT15 GT11 turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When inserting removing a SD card into from the GOT GT 14 turn the SD card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the SD card MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION e When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break e When removing a SD card from the GOT GT14 make sure to support the SD card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the SD card to drop from the GOT GT14 and break e When installing a USB memory to the GOT GT16 GT14 make sure to install the USB memory to the USB interface firmly Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to po
432. o CB400 1761 L32BWA 500 MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series 1761 L32BWB 9 zo CB700 1761 L32BBB 900 1761 L32AAA FB100 1761 L20AWA 5A FB400 1761 L20BWA 5A 900 1761 L20BWB 5A 5 1 psc ee 11 RB100 1762 L24BWA i RKC SR Mini HG RB400 1764 LSP 5 lt Or RB500 1766 L32AWA RB700 1756 L RB900 1756 L1M1 PF900 1756 L1M2 5 PF901 1756 L1M3 5 SH zane HA400 401 1756 L61 25 82 900 901 1756 162 RMC500 1756 L63 5 MA900 1756 L55M12 2 o MA901 1756 L55M13 2 E c AG500 1756 L55M14 lt o THV A1 AB Control CompactLogix 1756 L55M16 E SA100 1756 L55M22 REL SA200 1756 L55M23 X TIO 1756 L55M24 o SLC500 20 1769 L31 2 9 On SLC500 30 1769 L32E 5 SLC500 40 1769 L32C Og SLC5 01 1769 L35E Du AB SLC500 SLC5 02 1769 L35CR SLC5 03 1794 L33 Sy SLC5 04 1794 L34 za es SLC5 05 52 29 zv amp 585 0 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 7 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface GE Series 90 Type Model name IC693CPU311 IC693CPU313 IC693CPU323 IC693CPU350 IC693CPU360 Type LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Model name K7M DLILILIS DC K7M DLILILIU K3P 07L S K4P 15AS IC693CPU363 IC693CPU366 IC693CPU367 IC693CPU374 SICK Flexi Soft FX3 CPU000000 FX3 CPU130002 FX3 CPU3
433. o W BF 02 3000 3m J Og W BF 01 1000 1m GOT 5 a BE 01 uz Built into zu or On 55089485 connection diagram 15 s z W BF 01 0500 0 5m W BF 01 1000 1 z W BF 01 3000 3 5 zgo or GT14 RS2T4 9P 2 820 958485 connection ZEO reparing gt 5 diagram 12 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED lt gt 3 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 GT155 E gf 58 65 oz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 19 9 2 System Configuration 4 For GT11 the number of connectable temperature controllers differs according to the hardware version For the procedure to check the hardware version refer to the following manual gt GT11 User s Manual Model name of GT11 Hardware version Number of connectable temperature controllers C or later 31 GT1155 QTBD B or earlier 10 GT1155 QSBD F or later 31 GT1150 QLBD E or earlier 10 5 Connectit to the RS 232 interface built into GOT When connecting to multiple temperature controllers with interface converter COM A Connection cable 2 Con
434. oller side When connecting a FUJI temperature controller to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 97 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 10 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 3 Connection Diagram 5 4 Side Settings gt 2 17 5 4 1 Setting communication WE 0 2 ae 5 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication I uo j rco settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 2 Set the channel of the connected equipment Property Value Transmission 5 9500 ay He Data Bit 8 bit z Oo Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Odd 29 Retry Times 0 S 9 CH 2 None Manufacturer Timeout Time Sec 3 CH4 None E Controller Type FUJI PXR PXB PXH Host ddress 1 Elhemet Standard 1 5232 n Boo FUJI Delay Time ms 5 Format 1 z BB Gateway Client Property 9 EJ Mail Transmission Speed BPS Fo FTP Server File Transfer FTP Q Redundant Stop Bit ZO Station No Switching Parity za Retiy Times Item Description Range Delay Set this item when change the 9600bps transmission speed used for 19200bps Transmission ou Speed communication with the connected 38400bps Apply P equipment 57600bps Default 9600bps 115200bps Lr Set this item when change the data 9 9 Data B
435. ommunication Port No 5026 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Timetx10ms 0 Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT 1 to 239 Default 1 gt Set the station No of the GOT 11064 GOT PC Default 1 GOT IP Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to Address 1 Default 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub Ethernet network Only for connection via Download Port router 0 0 0 0 to If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 9 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default Default gateway where the GOT is 0 0 0 0 to G 4 connected Only for connection 255 255 255 255 ateway viarouter QUT UMS Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Ethernet Set the GOT port No for Ethernet 5014 to 65534 Download Port download Except for 5011 Default 5014 5012 5013 49153 Communication Port No Set the GOT port No for the connection with the Ethernet module Default 5026 1024 to 5010 5014 to 65534 Except for 5011 5012 5013 and 49153 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5 times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU Default 3sec
436. ommunication interface setting by Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication Settings after writing Communication Settings of project I F Interface to be used data Driver Set either of the following according to the For details on the Utility refer to the following Controller Type to be connected manual BUS User s Manual BUS A QnA 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 3 When changing Stage No and Slot No Change these settings with the PLC CPU turned detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage OFF and then reapply the power to the PLC CPU environment and GOT 5 3 2 Communication detail settings Failure to do so may generate a system alarm Click the OK button when s ttings are completed No 487 Indicates the location of related content Since the above page was created for explanation purpose it differs from the actual page About system configuration The following describes the system configuration of each connection included in this manual The configuration of equipment connected to GOT is shown The cable connecting the GOT to the equipment is shown m The configu
437. ommunication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 gt User s Manual 3 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 8 32 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 4 GOT Side Settings 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting ESs 8 5 1 Connecting to GREEN Series 35 ZINAR TE uoz E E E 1 YOKOGAWA temperature controller Communication settings For details of YOKOGAWA temperature controller Make the communication settings by operating the key refer to the following manual of the temperature controller gt Users Manual of the YOKOGAWA temperature EO controller 1 For the UT O UP O UM O US1000 except UT750 z a 2 RS232C RS485 converter UP750 ru mam P For details on communication settings of the em SENTIS 29 RS232C RS485 converter refer to the following p ea 9 ransmission spee ps fixe manual it Tbits 8bit 73 User s Manual of RS232C RS485 converter Data bit eee Parity bit Even odd none 44 E Model name Refer to sepu tee 5 GREEN 8 5 1 Address 1 11
438. on I F setting 85232 1 x Serial MELSEC VF 2 USB 9 Host PC VF3 RS422 485 0 None VF4 Bhemet 0 None RS232 Setting E Enable the 5V power supply Extend F 1 CH No Driver Ist 0 7 Detail Setting 2nd 0 7 None 3d 0 7 x Extend 2 Driver 19 0 7 None 23 Detail Setting 2nd 0 v None Detail Setting 3rd 0 7 Z Detail Setting Item Description Standard I F Setting Set channel No and drivers to the GOT standard interfaces GT16 GT14 GT12 Standard 1 Standard 2 Standard 3 Standard 4 GT15 GT1030 GT1020 Standard 1 Standard 2 GT11 6 105 1 GT104 T Standard 1 Standard 2 Standard 3 Set the No according to the intended purpose The number of channels differs depending on the GOT to be used 0 Not used 1 to 4 Used for connecting a controller of channel No 1 to 4 set in Setting connected equipment Channel setting 8 Used for barcode reader connection RFID connection PC remote operation serial fingerprint authentication device connection Printer serial or GOT extended computer 9 Used for connecting Host PC Used for gateway function MES interface function and Ethernet download Multi Used for Ethernet multiple connection VF
439. on device Model equipment 5 number E F GT GT fin 2 gt ENS gt Built into GOT OD 6741 5 Meo o 85292 connection eeu POGANI diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P apter User RS232 ti E connection 45m Builtinto GOT 22d diagram 2 E CA 1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens AG amp e 589 n 58 ie 65 2 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 3 14 2 Serial Connection 14 2 2 System configuration for connecting to SIMATIC 57 200 PLC Series SIMATIC S7 200 Connection cable Connection cable GOT icati ble model S Max distance Option device Model on Type Connection diagram number 6ES7 901 3 20 0 i f Beltre SOT 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XA0 RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P 6ES7 901 3BF20 0XA0 6ES7 901 3CB30 0XAO0 T 15m Built into GOT 974020 9588232 connection diagram 3 1 Product manufactured by Siemens AG For details of this product contact Siemens 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 2 Serial Connection Communication driver Com SIEMENS 57 200 Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 PLC 14 2 3 Connection Diagram The following diagram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC RS 232 cable
440. on diagram Option device Model equipment number R3422 58 RS422 1000m Built into GOT connection diagram 4 connection diagram 1 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m B400 GT15 RS2T4 9P Gi Up to 31 temperature 1222 RS 422 ests RS485 1000m GT15 RS4 9S controllers for 1 specificati User RS485 connection diagram 5 Gor ons connection diagram 4 Built into GOT i UU 8741 User 85485 1000 GT14 RS2T4 9P connection diagram 7 55089485 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT FA LTBGTRACBLOS 0 5m B400 534 88485 connection diagram 6 FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m RS 485 1 2 RS 495 1200m ee ee 2 apes ons 88485 connection diagram 7 GT15 RS4 TE 02685485 connection diagram 14 Built into GOT amp 59485 connection diagram 11 GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 3 GT11 the number of connectable temperature controllers differs according to the hardware version For the procedure to check the hardware version refer to the following manual GT11 Users Manual Model name of GT11 Hardware version Number of connectable temperature controllers C or later 31 GT1155 QTBD or earlier 10 GT1155 QSBD F or later 31
441. on resistor SW4 4 Turn the power of the module ON setting Deest eee 7 The FAIL RUN lamp lights in green and the set time 1 When the setting value is 98 or 99 the communication 8 becomes valid address is the same as for 97 1 Rotary switch setting SW1 SW2 EX 5 d 5 the power of the module OFF again and set the Set the unit address using the rotary switch ue amp DIP switches and rotary switch to the original position SS 5 Rotary switch oas Address setting switch 9 5 16 Connecting to SB1 i 19 SW1 Lower digit setting 5 Communication settings Set value x1 NE z Make the communication settings of SB1 using the 18 2 E OL switch key on the front surface 0 1 SW2 Upper digit setting u For the operation procedure refer to the SB1 manual nx Set value x10 5 5 Setting range Setting range Communication 0 RKC communication Unit address setting The communication address is the rotary protocol 2 1 MODBUS CH1 to CH4 switch setting value 1 Device address 6656 Unit address setting The communication address is the rotary Slave address CH5 to CH8 switch setting value 2 0 2400bps a C ie og q 1 4800bps 2 ommunication Spee 2 9600bps 3 19200bps Data bit configuration 175 0 to 5 6 0 to 250 Interval time ms 5 1 Adjust the settings
442. only when specifying the bit of word device File Set the file No No Information Displays the device type and setting range which are selected in Device Network Set the station number of the controller to be monitored Host Select this item for monitoring the host controller Select this for monitoring other controllers After selecting set the station number of the Other controller to be monitored NW No Set the network No Station No Set the station No 7 4 2 YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA Link register W W1 to W71024 Special register zy3 21102512 Bit device word Converting bit devices into word Except Timer TU Counter CU 1 Writing is not possible 2 Writing to con inuous devices is not possible 7 4 4 FA500 FA M3 Series Device No Device name Setting range representa tion Input relay X X00201 to X71664 Output relay Y Y00201 to Y71664 Internal relay 1 11 to 165536 Link relay L L1 to L71024 amp 1 4096 Special relay M M1 to M9984 Decimal amp Timer TU TU1 to TU3072 Counter CU CU1 to CU3072 Specified bit of the following Word device bit pars epi TS Counter CP CS Timer TP TP1 to TP3072 Timer TS 1 TS1 to TS3072 Counter CP CP1 to CP3072 Counter CS CS1 to CS3072 File register B B1 to B2
443. onnection GOT diagram 10 1 Product manufactured by RKC For details of the product contact RKC 2 Including the cable length of the option devices 5 8 3 to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 GT1550 5 E 4 Touse the dedicated cable conversion of the cable may be necessary Dp 2 5 Product manufactured MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact 5 ag MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED dor 6 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT When connecting to multiple temperature controllers 5 Ee Sa oo Connection cable 2 COM PORT1 Az 5 9 Oga COM PORT1 COM PORT2 5 R Connection cable 1 20 Zav Temperature controller Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT 020 umber ble model ble model Max Model Communication ca icu E 5 A connectable Connection diagram Connection diagram distance Option device Model equipment number number 059 85422 connection 2 2 m granit 1200m 1 Built into GOT oF E diagram 1 m 1200 2 GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m 2 S E s 888 W BF 02 0500 0 5m 4 GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 422 W BF 02 1000 1 Use RS422 connection GT15 RS4 9S 4 diagram 2 1200m W BF 02 3000 3m Built into GOT zo User RS422 connection 12001 GT14 RS2T4 9P7 Up to
444. onnection unit 1 19 1 3 6 RS 232 485 signal conversion 1 19 1 3 7 Installing a unit on another unit Checking the unit installation position 1 20 1 4 Connection Cables for Respective Connection 110000011 1 27 1 4 1 connector specifications 1 27 1 4 2 Coaxial cable connector connection eem 1 30 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 2 2 0 1 1111006 tentant nnn nnns 1 31 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion 1 34 1 5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected enm 1 35 1 6 Checking for Normal 1 40 EGA Check onthe seid Ue eoi Le de bee e de ee Logo 1 40 1 6 2 Confirming the communication state on the GOT side For Ethernet connection 1 43 1 6 3 Confirming the communication state to each station Station monitoring function 1 45 CONNECTIONS NON MITSUBISHI PRODUCTS 2 CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC 21 Connectable Model List leise nta a a 2 2 2 2 System GConfIg ratlOn halen Ret RE RIA 2 3 2 2
445. op bit 1bit fixed fae Transmission speed 9600bps fixed m Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even Odd None Stop bit 1bit fixed Station 2 110255 e i 2 Communication protocol MODBUS lt 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 9 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other E 5 units 5 eo z Ox 52 29 2 amp SEE 565 gt 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 13 5 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 5 5 3 Connecting to 9 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller 1 RS 485 communication settings Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Data bit 8bits fixed Parity bit Even Odd None Stop bit 1bit fixed Station 2 110255 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Avoid duplication of the station No with any of the other units 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader communication Item Set value Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps 5 5 4 Connecting to interface converter RC 77 ll Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Transmission speed 1 Set value 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps MANUAL AUTO AUTO DCE DTE switching DCE RS 422 485 switching RS
446. or contact e Before removing the USB memory from the GOT GT16 GT14 operate the utility screen for removal After the successful completion dialog box is displayed remove the memory by hand carefully Failure to do so may cause the USB memory to drop resulting in a damage or failure of the memory e Forclosing the USB environmental protection cover fix the cover by pushing the A mark on the latch firmly to comply with the protective structure e Remove the protective film of the GOT When the user continues using the GOT with the protective film the film may not be removed e Operate and store the GOT in environments without direct sunlight high temperature dust humidity and vibrations e When using the GOT GT16 GT15 GT11 GT10 in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions NCAUTION e Please make sure to ground FG terminal and LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying Class D Grounding Class 3 Grounding Method or higher which is used exclusively for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction e Be sure to tighten
447. or explanation purpose it differs from the actual page Number of connectable equipment 1 GOT for 1 PLC Mee PREPARATORY PROCEDURES 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 FOR MONITORING Setting the Communication Interface 1 3 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1 16 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 18 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 27 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment 1 35 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 40 a Cz ra TO OE 96 ra has CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER YOKOGAWA PLC HITACHI IES PLC 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING The following shows the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding reference sections Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No to be used and perform the communication setting L37 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface lt 3 Each chapter GOT Side Settings gt Writing the project data and OS Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option 577 1 2 1 Writing the project data and OS onto the GOT OS project data and communication settings onto the GOT
448. orks3 Abbreviation of SWLIDND GXW3 E and SWLIDND GXW3 EA type programmable controller engineering software GX Works2 Abbreviation of SWLIDNC GXW2 E and SWLIDNC GXW2 EA type programmable controller engineering software GX Simulator3 Abbreviation of GX Works3 with the simulation function GX Simulator2 Controller simulator Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function GX Simulator Abbreviation of SWLIDSC LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SWLID5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SWLIDNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SWLIDSC FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SW DND MTW2 E MT Developer Abbreviation of SWLIRNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller series MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SWLIDNC MRC2 E type Servo Configuration Software MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJWLT SETUPLE type Servo Configuration Software FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software FR SWLT SETUP WE NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator FX Configurator FP
449. otect function 1 The communication mode that can be selected differs according to the CPU 7 10 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA 7 2 Serial Connection Switch setting on the PC link module Set the switches accordingly Switch setting Set the switches before mounting the Ethernet Interface Module on the base unit F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N TERMINAT I 2 OFF SDA With right side cover removed SHIELD 1 Transmission speed setting switch Set the same transmission speed of the GOT For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 5 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Setting Transmission speed 4 4800bps 5 9600bps 6 19200bps are shown 2 Data format setting switch Set the data length parity stop bit and checksum consistent with the corresponding settings on the GOT side For the settings on the GOT side refer to the following 5 7 2 5 Communication detail settings Switch No Description Settings ON 8bits 1 Data bit LM OFF 7bits 2 ON done OFF Parity 3 ON even OFF odd ON 2bits 4 Stop bit Sp OFF 154 ON done 5 Check o OFF none 6 End character OFF none specification Protect function OFF disabled 8 OFF 3 Station No switch F3LC11 2N only 7 2 9
450. ounter 3 5 Element delimiter o ounter Completion C5 0 13 DN to C5 255 13 DN mune C10 0 13 DN toC255 255 13 DN ia Setting by GT Designer3 bit C eu Device 7 0 to N7 255 Integer N N10 0 to N255 255 Bey Sos 3 B3 0 to B3 255 Word Bit B B10 0 to B255 255 File type File No Element No Timer Set T4 0 1 PRE to T4 255 1 PRE ES value T 12 T10 0 1 PRE to T255 255 1 PRE 2 2 AB Control CompactLogix 2 m a When setting a bit address as a bit device AAGE amp 5 value 1 T10 0 2 ACC to T255 255 2 ACC 3 INT 3 64 b15 p Counter Set C5 0 1 PRE to C5 255 1 PRE Decimal File type L Bit No value C10 0 1 PRE to C255 255 1 PRE B File No Element No Counter 5 C5 0 2 ACC to 5 255 2 T C10 0 2 ACC to C255 255 2 ACC DLO value C ugy 5 6 Setting by GT Designer3 7 0 to N7 255 Integer N N10 0 to N255 255 pov Device 1 Writing to device is not allowed for 32 bit data INT 3 64 15 2 2 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device p designation mode 3 is not supported by GT10 5 Filetype File No Element No No S pu Ge b When setting an element address as a word zu device On INT 3 64 File type Element No Fi
451. owing manual gt GTO User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 7 2 6 PLC side setting YOKOGAWA PLC For details of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manuals gt YOKOGAWA PLC user s Manual Model name Refer to CPU port D Sub 9 pin KM10 0C conversion cable 7 2 7 SIO port adapter cable KM10 0S F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N 7 2 8 F3LC11 2N PC link module F3LC11 1F 7 2 9 F3LC12 1F LC01 0N 7 2 10 LC02 0N STARDOM 7 2 11 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 9 7 2 Serial Connection PREPARATORY CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC O z 22 YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 fat lt lt 5 gt 7 2 7 Connecting to CPU port D sub 9 pin conversion cable SIO port adapter cable 7 2 8 Connecting PC link module F3LC01 1N F3LC11 1N F3LC11 2N Setting of PLC CPU Make the PLC CPU settings displaying Configuration Communication Settings with the program development tool or the ladder programming tool Item Set value Set the communication mode of the CPU transmission speed and data format Set t
452. pe and setting range which are selected in Device Device settings of SIEMENS PLC S7 200 series 1 When setting bit devices except Timer and Counter Set the device using the byte address DEC and the bit address 0 to 7 Description Device y L Bit address 0 to 7 Device name Byte address DEC c SIEMENS OP Ethernet lt Bit gt CH1 SIEMENS OP Ethernet Device Information 000000 Kind BIT Range Device 000000 102397 28 45 0 tL Network Host lo Item Description Set the device name device number and bit number Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of word device Device settings of SIEMENS PLC 57 200 300 400 1200 series SIEMENS OP Ethernet 1 When setting a bit device as a bit device Set the device using the format of byte address DEC bit address 0 to 7 Device Iw Ei eow ozr Device number Bit address 0 to 7 Byte address DEC 2 When setting a data register Set the device using the format of data block DB data word DW Device name Device 100 10000 2 Data word DW numbe Data block DB numbe 3 Precautions when setting devices a Preparing to set a data register It is necessary to define the data block using a peripheral software and sequence program before
453. pecification range Setting item Set value ee p ea 6 i 7 amp 9 0 1 to 199 ao Stop bit 1bit ON ele 19 253 zo S Even OFF OFF x POINT SEE Parity bit odd SSE Specifying a station No between 200 and 215 m 5 None ma Example of specifying the station No 215 H 1 Set the station No to 200 T Ug ae E Input 215 to the internal device GD10 as Echo back Without OFF o 3 The station 215 is specified For details refer to 2 Indirect specification shown below Lu ER ag ne 2 Indirect specification E When setting the device indirectly specify the station Eg number of the inverter of which data is to be changed using 2 the 16 bit GOT internal data register 6010 to 6025 HS When specifying the station No from 200 to 215 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of o the temperature controller Oa Specification Compatible station device Setting range 5 200 6010 5 201 202 6012 203 6013 204 6014 go 205 GD15 lt 206 GD16 4 to 255 z 207 GD17 For the setting other than the above error 25 9 208 GD18 dedicated device is out of range will 209 GD19 210 GD20 211 GD 1 5 212 6022 213 GD23 ea 214 GD24 E E E 215 GD25 ZoE S98 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 17 5 5 Temperature Contro
454. peo RS485 connection diagram 8 1200m Built into GOT UT550 2 wire type UT551 FA LTBGTRACBLO5 0 5 5 aor 07503 23 485 9985485 connection diagram 2 4200m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1 5 UP350 4 wire type 5 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m UP351 UP550 ss FA LTBGTR4CBLO5 0 5m 9 ser i i gt diagram 7 1200m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m 5 zm wire type 0 330 ype FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2 5 0 331 T UM350 RS485 connection diagram 5 1200 GT15 RS4 TE 4 wire type UM351 18100 EN Up to 31 temperature ey RS485 connection diagram controllers 41 1200m GT15 RS4 TE ori GOT 2 wire type User RS485 connection diagram 21 1200m GT14 RS2T4 9P 6 4 wire type 13785485 connection diagram 10 1200m Built into GOT 2 wire type GT p750 T FA LTBGTRACBLO5 0 5m 5 A RS 485 RS485 connection diagram 9 1200m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1 5 UT750 2 wire type 5 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m RS485 connection diagram 13 1200m GT15 RS4 TE 2 wire type 1 Including the cable length of the option devices 2 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT155 3 Connect the connection cable to the standard RS 485 communication interface 4 the connection cable to the high performance RS 485 communication interface 5 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECT
455. perature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series UT35A Signal name CREEN Series GREEN Series UT UP UM us condition 55 UT75A UM33A i UP55A product product condition n A condition B Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Model Product Suffix code condition Function Open network Optional suffix code Remark UT55A A Product with the open network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type 1or2 Without LP Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor 55 Other than 3 Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With CH3 Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E3 terminal area option Detailed code model Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model With C4 Product wit
456. ply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 i wire type 2 wire type Standard code ia A model 3 E Product with the RS 485 communication lt Em T 5 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in E e With CH3 b terminal area option Detailed code gt E UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication _ 2 With 4 port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in 4 terminal area option Detailed code 2 9 On model Qs 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a GOT and a temperature controller which will be a terminal Es 5 3 Setthe 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 5 0 2 wire type 4 wire type 4 wire type 2Pair ox Terminating resistor OPEN 57 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line EG H 55 29 2 QO gt 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 24 Qa lt x ej gt nc e n 5 RS485 connection diagram 22
457. provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 5 Es 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 5 2 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 21 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 22 RS485 connection diagram 20 RS232C RS485 interface converter Terminating resistor 2200 1 4 2 Temperature controller Na Temperature controller i 34 RDA tt BDAC ri E RDA RDB E RDB 4 RDB ry SDA 1 it N SDA SDB 2 i i T SDB SG 5 HT SG GND 66 T 4 4 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller UTAdvanced Series UT35A Signal name iti 3 UT32A UP35A UM33A UT55A product condition A ic ed B UT75A UP55A product condition A SDB 301 407 501 1 SDA 302 408 502 2 RDB 304 410 504 4 RDA 305 411 505 5 SG 303 409 503 3 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Suffix code Model Product Optional suffix code Remark condition Func
458. r and bit number Device fae Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of Imi word device The uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is 615 EE Ranae Device 3 5 0000 511 information Displays De device type and setting range which are selected in Device Set the monitor target of the set device Set the CPU No of the controller Network ne Station No 0 5 Host Select this item for monitoring the host PLC 5 3 Network Select this for monitoring other PLCs After selecting set the station number of the Item Description Other PLC to be monitored B NW No Set the network No Set the device name device number and bit number Station No Set the station No Device The bit number can be set only when specifying the bit of 5 5 word device The uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is 615 E POINT 225 Information Displays the device type and setting range which are Oro selected in Device Device settings of FUJI FA PLC Set the monitor target of the set device 3 When setting a bit device Network Station Select this item when monitoring the PLC of Setthe device using the format of word number e No the specified station No DEC bit No 0 to F HEX 22 Ex Device E 2 2 5 T 5 L Bit No HEX oF Device name Word No DEC 4 When setting a word device For dire
459. r up down 5 ter function dat u 1 The uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is 615 i ale 22 22 Word device bit register function work o 2 E register extended function 5 o POINTI work register backup work E E 4 register backup long word Device settings of HITACHI PLC wofk register 1 When setting a bit device External input XW XW000 to XWFFO Set the device using the format of address word External output YW YW000 to YWFFO unit bit number 0 to zo Internal register RW RW000 to RWFFO On vd Extended internal regist 55 000 to MWFFO Hexadec Wg x 000 MW 2 vij g imal 2 Bit position 0 to F Extended internal register Oe Device name Address word units AW AWOOO to AWFFO 2 When setting a word device Keep relay KW KWO00 to KWFFO For external input XW external output YW S internal register RW extended internal register timer TW MW AW keep relay KW on delay timer TW es one shot timer UW up down counter CW we global link register GW event register EW 29 system register SW transfer register JW and receive register QW set as follows Device 5 m ede ez n ae Device name Address word units 5 lt a Bog a 565 gt 3 CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC 3 9 3 6 Device Range that Can Be Set
460. r the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 97 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT b FUJI PLC side When connecting a FUJI PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 4 2 7 PLC Side Setting 4 16 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection 4 2 6 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Manufacture Controller Type FUJI MICREX F QD CH 4 None nemer ouer Setting E Ethemet VF amp Routing Information Gateway Driver Communication S El Gateway Server Seng BB Gateway Client Property Mail anemia FTP Server File Transfer FTP 0 Redundant AQ Station No Switching Standard l F RS232 FUJI MICREX F Transmission Speed BPS Lok Apply 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer FUJI Controller Type Set either of the following FUJI MICREX F Series FUJI MICREX SX SPH I F Interface to be used Driver Set either of the following FUJI MICREX F Series FUJI MICREX SX SPH 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to t
461. ram 3 diagram 1 500 2 m GT16 GT15 31 5509 GT15 RS2T4 9P GT11 GT105 e E GT GT GT104 T 10 2 GT15 RS4 9S 250 QSZ RS422 preparing 2 10 PLCs for connection 500m 2 Built into GOT METER cor diagram 2 2 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd g 2 The total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 2 3 total length of the connection cable 1 connection cable 2 option device cable S 4 Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted GT1655 and GT1550 E E OS oz 12 CONNECTION TO LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC 12 5 12 2 System Configuration 12 2 3 Connecting to K300S When connecting to one PLC Communication driver Com LS Industrial Systems MASTER K Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT umber Series module Communit ieee Max Option device Model ation 9 distance equipment number Ge RS232 ti Built into GOT warn connection 15m diagram 2 K300S G4L CUEA RS 232 1 PLC for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P Gi 039785232 connection id pum 15m Built into GOT 871020 diagram 4 1 Product manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd For details of the product contact LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd When connecting
462. ration of the GOT connected to equipment is shown For the option devices refer to the following c 1 3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection S A representative example of the system configuration is described with an illustration Indicates the connection diagram number of cables to be prepared by the user Refer to the connection diagram section in each chapter Indicates the commercially available cable models that can be used GaRS422 connection diagram 2 Indicates the maximum distance between the PLC and GOT System Configuration Examples 1 1 2 Connection cable GOT Communi Model name RS connecter cation Cable model Option device Model conversion cable distance type am 653 Built into GOT Sr 5 GT01 C30R2 6P 3m 3m RS 232 GT15 RS2 9P GT01 RS4 M4 x GT10 C30R2 6P 3m 3m Built into GOT 16 GT15 RS2T4 9P GT01 C100R4 25P 10m GT01 C200R4 25P 20m GT01 C300R4 25P 30m Built into GOT 911050 FA CNV2405CBL 0 5m GTO01 RS4 M 4 30m Built into GOT 911020 When connecting the MELSEC Q and GT16 with 5 422 cable 1 Connect the RS 422 conversion cable FA CNV2402CBL to the MELSEC Q 2 Connect the option GT16 CO2R4 9S to GT 16 3 Connect MELSEQ Q and GT16 with the connection cable GT01 C30R4 25P Since the above page was created f
463. rity Even Data bit 8bit Parity Odd Stop bit 1bit fixed Module address 2 1 to 99 Internal data bus terminating resistor When combining the module turn ON the internal data bus terminating resistor at both ends of the module Data interval extension time 0 to 99ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting Switch position Setting item Set value 1 2 9 4 5 6 7 8 9600bps ON OFF C icati ommume 19200bps OFF ON on speed 38400bps ON ON API ON loFF Parity None dd bit Data bit 8bit ON ON configuration Parity Even Data bit 8bit Parity Odd ON ON ON Communicati MODBUS ON on protocol Internal data b s OFF OFF termination resistor ON ON setting Data interval extension to 99ms ON OFF ON time 3 Module address settings Set the unit address using the rotary switch address setting switch Rotary switch Address setting switch Coy 23 AY Lower digit setting Ss Set value x1 91 Upper digit setting Set value x10 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 0 3 8 Even 2 HINT ra 4 8 Odd 1 5
464. rminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM b For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 330 Q For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 YOKOGAWA temperature controller side When connecting a YOKOGAWA temperature controller to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected 5 8 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 8 30 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram 8 4 Side Settings 84 1 Setti icat FE 4 etting communication esz 9 age 8 4 2 Communication detail settings interface Communication 555 uo H settings ils Property issi 9600 Set the channel of the connected equipment Data Bit 8 bit on z Stop Bit 1 bit a Parity Even ul Sum Check None 2 5 Retry Times 0 CHT MESEC Timeout Time Sec 3 CH 2 None Manufacturer YOKOGAWA EU Controller Type YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 UT2000 UTAdvanced j Host Address 1 Network Duplex E ERT 12 Vr Standard VF RS232 Delay Timefms 5 8 id Information Driver
465. rnal monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING e Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the display section dims while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to rel
466. ro 1 SG 5 13 HT i SG RSA RTS 9 pt Y CSA CTS 1 4 4 RSB RTS 10 CSB CTS 12 2 z Terminating 2200 1 4W SDA2 TXD2 5 9 en SDB2 TXD2 6 9 RDA2 RXD2 7 e RDB2 RXD2 8 QE NC 14 Shell 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table Model of temperature controller 2 UTAdvanced Series GREEN OS GREEN UT35A UT55A product 5 Signal name Series iti ac 9 UT UP i UT32A UP35A UISA product condition B UT75A UM UM33A condition A UP55A UP55A product gt lt product condition condition B Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No SDB 23 21 301 407 501 1 SDA 24 22 302 408 502 2 RDB 25 23 304 410 504 4 RDA 26 24 305 411 505 5 5 SG 27 25 303 409 503 3 89 For the product condition of UTAdvanced series refer to the following table Zo 25 Suffix code 0r Model Produet Optional suffix code Remark condition Function Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type 3 UT55A Product with two RS 485 communication B 10r2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without E c the power supply for 24VDC sensor 2 E r Product without the additional contact E S e output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485
467. rocessing Otherwise data within the non Do volatile memory will corrupt and the temperature controller will be unavailable O5 GOT clock control Since the temperature controller does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled Disconnecting some of multiple connected equipment The GOT can disconnect some of multiple connected equipment by setting GOT internal device For example the faulty station where a communication timeout error occurs can be disconnected from connected equipment For details of GOT internal device setting refer to the following manual Lu ne sa ve 522 ae gt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 5 CONNECTION TO FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 19 5 7 Precautions 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 7 Precautions SNINO LINOIN 5 AHOl1VHVd3Hd CO Sal IHOVLIH OL NOILOANNOO CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC IHOVLIH OL NOILOANNOO o EN ZEE QJ AE 2 0 D 2 0 8 5 5 9 0 0 c oO O o O
468. rotocol Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps B Data bit bits ON MODBUS protocol Parity bit None Unit address 2 OtoF 3 Settings of data length parity bit and stop bit 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings a COM PORT1 COM PORT2 2 ahi the unit address without overlapping with that of other Swe Setting DIP switches Data bit configuration 2 Make the settings of transmission speed data length OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Stop 1bit parity bit and stop bit COM PORT3 5 3 7 5 Data bit configuration section OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Stop 1bit Unit address settings Set the unit address using the unit address setting switch Rear view of module mainframe with mother block removed 1 Transmission speed settings 3 Communication speed OFF ON 9600bps ON ON 19200bps 2 Settings of data length and parity bit 1 Data bit configuration OFF OFF Data 8 bit Non parity Setting range 0 to F 9 40 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 5 3 Connecting to Z TIO Z DIO Unit address settings 2 Set the unit address using the unit address setting Ww a Tr
469. rt No 5014 GOT Communication Port No Retry Times Startup Time Sec Timeout Time Sec Delay Timex 10ms Cancel Apply Item Description Use CH Select this item when setting the channel No 2 to No 4 Manufacturer Select the manufacturer of the equipment to be connected to the GOT Select the type of the equipment to be connected to the GOT For the settings refer to the following ve lt 2 Setting Controller Type Select the interface of the GOT to which the equipment is connected For the settings refer to the following i 3 Setting I F Select the communication driver to be written to the GOT For the settings refer to the following sii 1 Setting Driver Make settings for the transmission speed and data length of the communication driver Detail Setting gt Refer to each chapter of the equipment to be connected to the 1 Setting Driver The displayed items for a driver differ according to the settings Manufacturer Controller Type and I F When the driver to be set is not displayed confirm if Manufacturer Controller Type and I F are correct For the settings refer to the following 57 Setting the communication interface section in each chapter 1 4 1 PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 1 1 Setting the Communication Interface 2 Setting Controller Type
470. s One scan at startup IF 5 000001 true STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00008 STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00009 STORE Source 00000 Dest DW00010 STORE Lee CL Source 00000 Dest DW00011 Source 00000 Dest 0 00012 STORE Source 32767 Dest DW00013 STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00014 STORE Lee Source 00000 Dest 0 00024 STORE Source 00000 Dest 0 00025 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection Sets parameters in the first scan after startup Low speed scan DWGL 5 000003 High speed scan DWGH 5 000001 Sets the coil offset 1 Sets the input relay offset Sets the input register offset 1 1 Sets the holding register offset Write range LO Write range HI Write range 0 S Write range LO S Write range X MW Maximum address value of register Clears the system registers Clears the normal pass counter Clears the error counter Continued to next page 0010 0010 NL 1 0011 gt 0011 NL 1 0012 gt 0013 NL 1 0013 gt 0014 NL 1 0014 gt 0015 NL 2 0015 gt 0016 NL 1 0016 gt 0017 NL 1 0017 gt 0018 NL 2 0018 gt 0019 NL 2 0020 Abort 08000400 Complete 08000211 Dev Typ 00005 Error 08000212 00001 C
471. s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor setting switch b For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor selector switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following L gt 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 Connection Diagram 9 29 RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 3 3 RS 485 cable RS485 connection diagram 3 GOT side RKC temperature controller side terminal block Modular connector 2 ianram Connection diagram SDA1 TXD1 gt 2 TR B RS485 connection diagram 1 SDB1 TXD1 gt 1 TIR A temperature controller side NC 1 i 4 NC GOT side Modular connector 2 eRe ee SG 2 2 15 3 SG SDA1 TXD1 1 2 i 3 r5 SDB1 TXD1 2 1 TRO 2 1 1 N 4 1 RDA1 RXD1 4 NC SDA2 TXD2 5 RDB1 RXD1 4 4 5 SDB2 TXD2 7 SDA2 TXD2 5 L 3 SG RDA2 RXD2 9 SDB2 TXD2 6 SG RDA1 RXD1
472. safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at our discretion In some of three cases however Mitsubishi Electric Corporation may consider the possibility of an application provided that the customer notifies Mitsubishi Electric Corporation of the intention the application is clearly defined and any special quality is not required GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Server Windows Vista and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA VNC is a registered trademark of RealVNC Ltd in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SH NA 080870ENG V GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOTO
473. server Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT client Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3 Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit MODBUS RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication MODBUS TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network HOW READ THIS MANUAL Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual BUS CONNECTION Connectable model name Not connectable model name erl6 515 14 12 cerl 1 5710 5 1 Connectable Model Applicable model name GT 16 Shows GT16 PLC Connection cable Number of Shows GT15 Computer link 7 connectable Model name Cable model distance Option device Mode s module type Shows GT14 GTO9 C30R2 9P 3m Em or Built into GOT Shows GT12 A18J71UC24 R2 15m MELSEC Q A1SJ71C24 R2_ 2205232 connection 1 GOT for 1 computer e Amode A1SJ71UC24 PRF i diagram 1 GT15 RS2 9P link module 11 Shows GT11 ATSJT1C24 PRF 85232
474. set function cannot be used 5 When bit specification bit specification of word device is performed the uppermost bit is bO and the lowermost bit is b15 Higher Lower 1 ssec b14 b15 6 Device GL corresponds to device G of the PLC 3 10 3 3 6 Device Range that Be Set ONINOLINOW SII IHOVLIH IHOVLIH W3TIOHLNOO VMVMSVA Old VMV9O9OA 331103109 303 OL NOILOANNOO OL NOILOANNOO OL NOLLO3NNOO 3univsadWal OL NOILOANNOO OL NOILOANNOO AUNLVYAdWAL AMOLWYVdad OL NOLLO3NNOO OL NOLLO3NNOO A oj oj s x m E 1 2 1 AE oj OJ LL ZEN DESEE EE 5 E e EE oj OJ A qd t g z B E us LE LE O s o O mi o 0 LO 5 I0 5 v 2g y O o 88 0 z 1 6 uu ELE oc 2 9 9 O o LLI N e ct 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 1 The following table shows the connectable models Series Model name Clock Communication Connectable Model List 674 1 Serial GT 1045 or 020 Refer to Type RS 232 55 Redas 37424 RS 232 F70 x 574 22 RS 485 MICREX F 12
475. setting value 33 The GOT sid ti 1 to 99 2to100 S 77 Sice stanon X TIO Decimal Decimal number setting is the module address setting value 1 CB FB RB The GOT side station PF AG HA 10 99 110 99 number setting is the same MA RMC Decimal Decimal as the module address THV SA SB1 setting value The GOT side station B400 1 to 99 11099 number is the module Decimal Decimal address setting value 1 or 2 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 2 Indirect specification When setting the device indirectly specify the station number of the temperature controller of which data is to be changed using the 16 bit GOT internal data register GD10 to GD25 When specifying the station No from 100 to 115 on GT Designer3 the value of GD10 to GD25 compatible to the station No specification will be the station No of the temperature controller Specification Compatible station NO device 100 GD10 101 GD11 102 GD12 103 GD13 104 GD14 105 GD15 106 GD16 107 GD17 108 GD18 109 GD19 110 GD20 111 GD21 112 GD22 113 GD23 114 GD24 115 GD25 Setting range 1 to 99 For the setting other than the above error dedicated device is out of range will occur 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 Temperature Controller Side Setting 9 49 RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 6 Device Range that Set The device ranges of controller that c
476. signer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 51 9 7 Precautions 9 CONNECTION RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 7 Precautions 10 RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC gt lt nd 5 lt a CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER MURATEC CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY 10 1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the connectable models Series SLC500 Model name SLC500 20 SLC500 30 SLC500 40 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 Clock Communicati on Type RS 232 ET Serial GT4 n20 1030 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 RS 232 Refer to 37 10 2 1 MicroLogix1000 Digital CPU 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA RS 232 MicroLogix1000 Analog CPU 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A
477. sistor 120 Q is valid by connecting 1 with pin 4 and pin 5 with pin 6 of the YASKAWA PLC side RS422 connection diagram 7 YASKAWA PLC side GOT side RDA 2 RDB 7 SDA 1 SDB 6 RSA 3 RSB 8 4 CSB 9 SG 5 FG RX Receiving side termination GND TX RX Sending side termination TX RS422 connection diagram 8 GOT side YASKAWA PLC side RDA 2 je 7 e TX SDA 1 RX SDB 6 RX RSA 3 RSB 8 RX CSA 4 RXR CSB 9 TX SG 5 GND FG 1 Connect RXR with RX and with TX of 2171F01 and insert the terminating resistor RS422 connection diagram 9 GOT side terminal block YASKAWA PLC side SDA 3 RX SDB 4 RX RDA 1 TX RDB i 2 TX SG 14 GND RSA 6 RX Receiving side RSB 7 termination CSA 8 TX CSB 9 TX i 10 RX i Sending side z9 i termination 2 a i 12 m i 13 9 lt o gt 1 5 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 2 Serial Connection RX TXR VCC TX O RS422 connection diagram 10 GOT side terminal block YASKAWA PLC side SDA RX SDB RX RDA TX RDB TX SG SG RSA NC RSB RXR CSA TXR CSB RS422 connection diagram 11 GOT side term
478. ssing the function key F9 2 Download after confirming that the compile error does not occur Select Download in the project control dialog displayed when Online Project control is selected 3 When the download is completed select Cold and start STARDOM 7 2 12 Precautions Device range When performing monitoring with the GOT connected to a YOKOGAWA PLC and setting devices for objects use devices within the device range of the YOKOGAWA PLC When a device outside the range is set on an object an indefinite value is displayed on the object No error is displayed in the system alarm For details on the device range of YOKOGAWA PLCs refer to the following manual lt gt 7 4 Device Range that Can Set Connecting to STARDOM 1 Redundant system When STARDOM is configured with a redundant system the connection is not supported 2 System alarm The PLC error does not appear in the system alarm 3 GOT clock control Since the STARDOM does not have a clock function the settings of time adjusting or time broad cast by GOT clock control will be disabled 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 15 7 2 Serial Connection PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC O z 22 YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONT
479. ssion Speed BP5 9600 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Retry Times 0 Timeout Delay Time x10ms Ww Format Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission 1 Transmissio speed used for communication with the 38400bps n Speed connected equipment Default 9600bps 5 600bps 115200bps Set this item when change the data length used Data Bit for with the connected 7bits 8bits equipment Default 8bits Set this item when change the data length used Stop Bit for communicatioi with the connected 4bit 2bits equipment Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity N ng check and how it is performed during Parity M Even communication Odd Default No Set the number of retries to be performed when Retry a communication error occurs 0 to 5times Default Otime Set the time period for a communication to time out 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Timeout Time Set this item to adjust the transmission timing Delay Time of the communication request from the GOT 0 to 300ms Default Oms Select the communication format Default 1 Format 1 Accessible to H PCP J H PCP B 4 2 SRZ FB PF HA MA RMC SRX B400 series Format 2 Accessible to CB series RB AG THV SA SB1 series 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can
480. stance diagram number Type diagram number X TIO Up to 31 TIO Up to RS485 iss RS232 Built into GOT Total of X TIO X SRX connection 1200m CD485 V RS 232 connection 15m DI and X DO Up diagram 8 diagram 3 m to 31 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P i Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd When connecting directly to temperature control module Temperature controller Series SRX Number of connectable equipment X TIO Up to 31 Total of X DI and X DO Up to 31 for 1 GOT Connection cable Connection cable GOT S Cable model Communication Max TOS Connection diagram Nicene Option device Model number 22 RS485 connection 4200m Built into GOT diagram 5 FA LTBGTRACBLOS 0 5m 2 peas REISS connection FA LTBGTRACBL40 1m di 6 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m RS 485 Ga RS485 connection 1200m GT15 RS4 TE diagram 7 6 S RS485 connection 1200 Built into GOT diagram 14 User RS485 connection 4200m GT14 RS2TA 9p diagram 11 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 2 System Configuration 1 2 3 Including the cable length of the option devices Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product con
481. standard mode GT15 ABUS2 For PUGRAGPM motion controller CPU A series Bus connection 2ch unit standard mode Bus connection unit GT15 75QBUSL For QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series Bus connection 1ch unit slim model GT15 75QBUS2L QCPU Q mode controller CPU Q series Bus connection 2ch unit slim model GT15 75ABUSL For controller CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim model GT15 75ABUS2L For controler CPU A series Bus connection 1ch unit slim model GT15 RS2 9P RS 232 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin male Serial communication unit GT15 RS4 9S RS 422 485 serial communication unit D sub 9 pin female GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 485 serial communication unit terminal block GT15 RS2T4 9P RS 422 side connector 9 pin RS 422 conversion unit RS 232 RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 25P RS 422 side connector 25 pin MELSECNET H GT15 J71LP23 25 Optical loop unit Communication module GT15 J71BR13 Coaxial bus unit MELSECNET 10 GT15 75J71LP23 Z Optical loop unit ASGT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set Communication module GT15 75J71BR13 Z Coaxial bus unit ABGT QJ71BR13 GT15 75lF900 set ep HOWE controller GT15 J71GP23 SX Optical loop unit network communication unit GT15 J61BT13 Intelligent device station unit CC LINK Ver 2 compatible CC Link communication unit Intelligent device station unit A8GT 61BT13 GT15 751F900 set Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71
482. start stop synchronization nonsequence 3 5 format w RS 485 1 S gt amp a zea ost 559 uoc ZOE 6565 o gt oO 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 21 4 2 Serial Connection Setting of the station No Make the station No using RS 485 station No switches Station No 01099 ADDRESS c Connecting terminating resistors Turn ON OFF the terminating resistor using RS 485 terminating resistor ON OFF switch 59 d Setting of Transmission speed Stop bit Data bit Parity bit Initializing method Make the settings using the character configuration switches 8 7 coe 5 4 L3 2 1 ON Switch No Setting item Set value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transmission 9600bps ON OFF ON Speed 19200bps OFF ON ON 1bit ON Stop bit 2bits OFF 7bits ON Data bit 8bits OFF Even ON Odd OFF Parity bit Done ON None OFF Initializing method By switch ON 4 22 4 CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC 4 2 Serial Connection Connecting to FFK120A C10 1 Communication settings Make the communication settings using setting switches Item Set value start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 start stop synchronization nonsequence format RS 232C 1 1 and RS 485 1 N
483. t No module Default 5016 5012 5013 and 49153 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5times Startup Time Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication with the PLC CPU Default 3sec 3 to 255sec Timeout Time Set the time period for a communication to time out Default 3sec 3 to 90sec Delay Time Set the delay time for reducing the load of the network destination PLC Default Oms 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 0 to 10000 x 10ms 6 21 O ae z Oa os Ze 5 1 Click the Setting button and perform the setting in the GOT IP Address Setting screen GOT IP Address Setting This setting is shared by other items of Ethernet Driver GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 Ethernet Download Port No 5014 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Default Gateway 0 0 00 2 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 37 Ethernet setting 6 CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC 6 3 Ethernet Connection 2 GT15 GT12 Property Value GOT NET No E GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 0 18 IP Label Subnet Mask 255
484. t Set the time period for a communication a Driver YOKOGAWA GREEN UT 100 UT2000 to time out 3 to 30sec 5 UTAdvanced Default 3sec 2 S Specify the host address station No of lt 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer the GOT to which the temperature Controller Type I F and Driver are set Host Address controller is connected in the connected 1 to 99 Make the settings according to the usage network Default 1 Oo environment EG D Set this item to adjust the transmission 2 gt 8 4 2 Communication detail settings timing of the communication request from Delay Time the GOT 0 to 300ms Q Click the OK button when settings are completed Default 5ms 22 Select the communication format gt NT Default 1 2 Format 1 3 ible to GREEN UT100 UT2000 The settings of connecting equipment can be 2 2 a Format UTAdvanced Series 1 2 confirmed in I F Communication Setting Format 2 x gt For details refer to the following Accessible to GREEN UT2000 E 1 1 2 communication setting UTAdvanced Series Not accessible to UT100 Series 8 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 31 8 4 GOT Side Settings 1 Format When connecting to UT100 Series specify the format 1 When connecting to only GREEN UT2000 UTAdvanced Series specifying the format 2 is recommended 2 C
485. t connection except for the Ethernet multiple connection IP address Communication New GS231 bit0 a YOKOGAWA 198 168 0 1 UDP GS231 bit1 YOKOGAWA 198 168 0 20 UDP 2 GS231 bit2 YOKOGAWA 188 168 021 Delete GS231 bit3 YOKOGAWA 198 168 022 UDP Delete All Copy All Paste All Ethernet setting No Device b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 50 65231 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GS232 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 GS233 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 GS234 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 GS235 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 GS236 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 GS237 112 111 110 109 108 107 106 105 104 103 102 101 100 99 98 97 GS238 128 127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 b For the Ethernet multiple connection or the temperature controller connection The station number to which each device corresponds changes according to the connection non connection with Ethernet With Ethernet connection 1 to 128 With other than Ethernet connection 0 to 127 Example With Ethernet connection when PC No 100 CPU connecting to Ch3 is faulty GS327 b3 is set The following table shows the case with Ethernet connection Device Station No Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 b15 b14 b13 612 b11
486. t into GOT GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m F3SP66 or 10 05 RS 232 n 15m 4 E F3SP67 5529232 connection diagram 550 1 E UE GT15 RS2 9P 16 15 SHS oro 1 Product manufactured by YOKOGAWA Electric Corporation For details of the product contact Yokogawa Electric Corporation 2 port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable 3 SIO port adapter cable 4 Including the length of the CPU port D Sub 9 pin conversion cable or the SIO port adapter cable 5 lt 25 59 Ox 52 29 zv gt YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 7 2 Serial Connection When using the PC link module Connection cable PLC Connection cable GOT Number of Model PC link rE Cable model Max ree connectable name module Type Connection diagram number distance equipment F3SP05 3m 1 1 5 F3SP10 Built into GOT F3SP20 m F3SP30 Serial F3FP36 F3SP21 F3LC01 1N F3SP25 F3LC11 1N GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m F3SP35 11 1 or i5 F3SP28 12 1 5588232 connection diagram F3SP38 2 F3SP53 GT15 RS2 9P F3SP58 F3SP59 F3SP66 F3SP67 F3SP76 7S 1 GOT for 1 PC 12 1 5 71 45 link module F3SP05 T 5559422 connection diagram 1200 Built into GOT F3SP08 1 cm F3SP20 F3SP30 1200m GT16 C02R4 9S 0 2m F3FP36
487. t is far from the converter CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY CONTROLLER 4 For the terminal number for connecting to FB series or RB series refer to the table below Terminal No zo Signal o 2 0 CB100 CB400 FB100 FB400 FB90 RB100 RB400 25709 E F 2 500 900 Communication 1 Communication 2 Communication 1 Communication 2 RB500 RB900 9 2 2 SG 5 13 7 13 16 25 25 13 25 2 T R A 3 14 8 14 17 26 28 14 26 oo T R B 4 15 9 15 18 27 29 15 27 Terminal No Signal PF900 HA400 401 B400 ogu name PF901 HA900 901 900 901 RMC500 SA100 5 200 5 1 RS 485 E 9 500 Communication 1 Communication 2 specifications 2 SG 25 13 25 44 13 17 1 10 1 3 6 5 5 T R A 26 14 26 45 14 16 2 11 2 1 5 5 lt QSZ T R B 27 15 27 46 15 15 3 12 3 2 4 nc ul zi 2 58 25 65 oz 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 35 9 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 12 RKC temperature controller side GOT side Modular 2 1 SDA i TR 1 1 SDB TIR A 1 1 1 1 SG 1 1 RDB N C 1 1 i SG N C 1 1 SG 1 Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of 2 the RS 232 485 signal conversion
488. ta 3 Kbyte Untitled Project 05 4699 Kbyte Base Screen Total 4701 Kbyte In addition to the above v Communication Settings use OKbyte GOT RAM Communication Settings with GOT IP List Standard monitor 05 Communication driver Extended function 05 Y Option 05 Common Settings Write Drive Information B Data Area Kbyte Free Space Kbyte Write after deleting all contents in the project folder GOT Write Communication Configuration Info Reception Close 1 Select Communication Write to GOT from the menu The Communication configuration dialog box appears Set the communication setting between the GOT and the personal computer Click the OK button when settings are completed 3 The GOT Write tab appears on the Communicate with GOT dialog box Select the Project data OS radio button of the Write Data 4 Check mark a desired standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS and Communication Settings and click the GOT Write button Writing communication driver onto GT10 When writing a communication driver onto the GT10 in which a Boot OS Ver under F or a standard monitor OS Ver under 01 08 00 is written turn on the GOT in the OS transfer mode For details refer to the following manual gt GT10 User s Manual Operati
489. tact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 2 10 Connecting to SB1 Communication driver Grm RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS When connecting to multiple temperature controllers Olivia Connection cable 1 ee a Connection cable 1 GOT m i vax ee ommuni distance Model cation model Option device Model equipment name Connection diagram number Type 020585485 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT FA LTBGTRACBLOS 0 5m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m SB1 RS 485 1200m FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m Up to 31 temperature am Gi controllers for 1 GOT G88 RS485 connection diagram 7 GT15 RS4 TE Gs RS485 connection diagram 14 Built into GOT 25 85485 connection diagram 11 GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 2 Product manufactured by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED For details of the product contact MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ENGINEERING COMPANY LIMITED Connect it to the RS 232 interface built into GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 23 9 2 System Configuration Tm ra tr Fray a 0 3 zo 9 52 ac 57 ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL CONNECTION TO CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY SIEMENS PLC CONNECTION TO HIRATA CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER CO
490. tance ene Type omz 585 User i i Gs RS485 connection diagram 27 1200m Built into GOT lt m 2 wire type 9 S UT52A 10 gt FA LTBGTRACBLOS 0 5m 55 5 User i i M Up to 31 temperature controllers RS 485 Ga RS485 connection diagram 28 1200m FA LTBGTRACBL40 1m 9 p p UP55A 2 wire type 40 for 1 GOT FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m UM33A 7 2m User i H I 55509485 connection diagram 13 1200 GT15 RS4 TE zu 2 wire type On p 1 Including the cable length of the option devices T T E m zem 2 Connectit to the RS 232 interface built into GOT It cannot be mounted on GT1655 and GT155 lt For 3 to 8 only the products that meet the following conditions can be connected OT Suffix code Annotation Optional suffix code Remark Function Open network o 1or2 _ Without LP Produc with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor 60 3 zl 1 Product with the open network port of RS 485 5 E 7 7 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type c 5 za 2 Product with two RS 485 communication ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model Product without the additional contact output points DO Other than 3 1 and with the open network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model 4 Product with RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire 22 With CH3 type specified in the
491. te resulting in injury and fire Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop or apply strong impact to the unit Doing so may damage the unit Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery If the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human bod
492. tem Configuration for connecting to SLC500 10 4 10 2 2 System configuration for connecting to MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series 10 5 10 2 3 System Configuration for connecting to Control Compact FlexLogix Series 10 6 10 2 4 Gonnection Dlagratm tere 10 7 10 2 5 GOT Side Settings m cies Partes ng 10 9 10 26 Side Setting ie a i pee eh te 10 12 10 3 Ethernet Connection csser de n PEE PR E n pp eite 10 13 10 3 1 System configuration for connecting to ControlLogix or CompactLogix 10 13 10 3 2 GOT Side Settings teni E eser HD E UP 10 15 70 3 3 gt PEG Side setting other EI m 10 17 10 17 10 4 Device Range that Can Be 2 2 2 1 1 12 1 1 1 2 4 rnnt nnne nin 10 18 10 42 50 0 10 19 10 4 2 MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series 10 20 10 4 3 MicroLogix1000 1200 1400 1500 Series Device 22 10 20 10 4 4
493. tem Description Range t the network No of th GUTNETNA o Me 1 to 239 Default 1 12 Set the station No of the GOT 11064 GOT PLC No Default 1 Apply GOT Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to IP Address Default 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via Subnet router 0 0 0 0 to 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Mask If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set MENU Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the gateway where the GOT js channel to be used from the list menu Default enu 0 0 0 0 to Gateway connected Only for connection via 255 255 255 255 router 2 Set the following items Default 0 0 0 0 Manufacturer AB 1024 to 5010 Controller Type Control CompactLogix Ethernet Set the GOT port No for Ethernet 5014 to 65534 I F Interface to be used Download Port download Except for 5011 Driver EtherNet IP AB Gateway Default 5014 5012 501344918 49153 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer 1024 to 5010 Controller Type and Driver set GOT Set the GOT port No for the 5014 to 65534 yp RI Communication connection with the Ethernet module Except for 5011 Make the settings according to the usage Port No Default 5015 5012 5013 4
494. temperature controller For details of FUJI temperature controller refer to the following manual Communication settings User s Manual of the FUJI temperature Make the communication settings by operating the key controller of the temperature controller E 2 Interface converter P y For details on communication settings of the 1 RS 485 communication settings 29 interface converter refer to the following manual It Set val lt gt User s Manual of interface converter en SNR Transmission speed 9600bps 19200bps Data bit bits fixed Model name Refer to e ity bit Even Odd None PXR3 PXR4 PXRS ey rarity pit PXRQ id Stop bit 1bit fixed Temperature controller PXG4 PXG5 PXG9 552 Station No 1 to 255 2 Yu PXH9 5 5 3 Communication Read only permission or read and overwrite 77 5 5 4 permissions 3 permission Intert rt SI 30A 5 5 5 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings Menace GOD Vener KS 485 5 5 6 2 4 duplication of the station No with any of the other K3SC 10 5 5 7 3 Set as necessary 5 2 RS 232 communication settings PC loader a 5 5 1 Connecting to PXR3 4 5 9 communication On H Item Set value Communication settings Transmission speed 9600bps fixed Make the communication settings by operating the key Data bit Bbits fixed of the temperature controller Parity bit None fixed a Item Set value St
495. temperature controller side GOT side Modular 2 spa 1 SDB 6 TIR A 1 RDA 2 NC 1 7 NC SG 5 sG 1 RSA 3 sG CSA RSB CSB 1 Set the terminating resistor selector to 110 Q cs Connecting terminating resistors 2 For details of the pin assignment refer to the following manual 9 User s Manual of the RKC temperature controller Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 1200m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 57 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 RKC temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the RKC temperature controller side module For details refer to user s manual of the RKC temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor setting switch b For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor by operating the terminating resistor selector switch For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 57 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 37 9 3 Connection Diagram a lt
496. ter Communication driver SR Mini HG MODBUS Connection cable 2 Connection cable 1 Temperature P Connection cable 1 Converter Connection cable 2 GOT controller Number of Cable model Nix CEDE Cable model M connectable Series Connection diagram i Connection diagram Option device Model equipment distance name ation Type distance number number TM pto GseRS485 RS232 Built into GOT terperat re CB connection diagram 1200m CD485 V 1 RS 232 connection diagram 15m controllers Serial 8 3 for 1 GOT GT15 RS2 9P 1 Product manufactured by DATA LINK Co Ltd For details of the product contact DATA LINK Co Ltd When connecting directly Connection cable Temperature controller Connection cable GOT NES i umber of connectable ommunicati le model Max d Option device Model equipment Type Connection diagram number distance User ai RS493 connection 1200m Built into GOT diagram 5 FA LTBGTRACBLOS 0 5m ser H ga RS48S connenton 1200m FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m diagram 6 4 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m du RS 485 Up to 31 temperature sor Gen RS485 connection 1200m GT45 RS4 TE controllers for 1 GOT diagram 7 User wes RS485 connection 1200m Built into GOT
497. ter C 77 log input DB1 DBWO to analog output AQW AQWO to AQW30 DB1 DBW65534 Decimal 5 Bit memory MW MWO to MW30 Decimal DB2 DBWO to 5 special memory SMW SMWO to SMW192 DB2 DBW65534 Timer TO to T255 Data register DB Counter C 4 CO to C255 punter DB4094 DBWO to High speed counter 2 HCO to HC2 DB4094 DBW65534 sequence control relay DB4095 DBWO to SW SWO to SW30 DB4095 DBW65534 1 Only reading is possible 1 Data format to input into Timer Counter varies 2 Only reading 32 bit two word data designation is allowed according to a type of the PLC 3 Writing is possible only while the PLC is running 57 300 400 BCD code 4 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 57 200 BIN code 2 58 1200 does not support Timer T Counter C 3 Writing is possible only while the PLC is running 4 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 14 18 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set 1 5 i 95 2 828 er CONNECTION TO HIRATA amp CORPORATION HNC CONTROLLER 8 E 9 9 16 er15 14 icrl2 11 G 2 o 15 1 Connectable Model 15 2 15 2 System Configuration 15 2 850 15 3 Connection Diagram 15 2 15 4 GOT Side 5 15 2 M 15
498. the GOT and the PLC RS 232 cable 1 Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CD NC t RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR 56 DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 NC GT11 NC RS232 connection diagram 2 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CD NC 1 1 RD RXD 2 s SD SD TXD 3 L4 2 RD ER DTR 4 6 DR SG 5 5 SG DR DSR 4 ER RS RTS 7 7 RS CS CTS s cs Shell Shell 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 GT11 NC 2 Connect the shield to the housing of the connectors on both the GOT and YOKOGAWA product sides RS232 connection diagram 3 GOT side YOKOGAWA PLC side CD NC RD RXD SD TXD ER DTR SG DR DSR RS RTS CS CTS 1 GT16 CD GT15 CD GT14 NC GT12 NC GT11 NC 7 6 7 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC 7 2 Serial Connection 2 Precautions when preparing a cable a Cable length The length of the RS 232 cable must be 15m or less b GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 53 1 4 1 connector specifications c YOKOGAWA PLC side connector Use the connector compatible with the YOKOGAWA PLC side module For details refer to the YOKOGAWA PLC user s manual i
499. the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an injury e Before replacing a backlight allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste e When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to the User s Manual of the GOT to be used TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS NCAUTION e When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations For details on models subject to restrictions refer to the User s Manual for the GOT you are using Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of the User s Manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly
500. the PLC to be monitored by the value of GOT data register Network Station No 100 to 115 1 following shows the relation between station numbers of the PLC and the GOT data register pu GOT data register GD Setting range 100 GD10 0031 101 6011 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error 115 GD25 12 CONNECTION LS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC Device settings of LS IS PLC 1 When setting bit device except timer and counter Set the bit device using the decimal number three digits and the hexadecimal number Device 063 a Device number Device name HEX DEC 12 6 1 LS Industrial Systems Device Device name Setting range represent ation relay P P0000 to Auxili lay M 0000 to M191F uxiliary relay M Decimal Keep relay K0000 to KO31F Hexadeci 8 Link relay L 10000 10 LO63F mal amp Special relay F F0000 to F063F Timer contact T TO to T255 Decimal Counter contact C CO to C255 relay P P000 to P063 Auxiliary relay M 000 to M191 Keep relay K K000 to K031 8 Link relay L 1000 to 1063 gt Special relay F000 to F063 Decimal gt Timer current value TO to T255 Counter current value C CO to C255 Step controller S 50 to S99 Data register D DO to D9999 1 Only
501. thernet connection type OP communication This section describes the Ethernet setting for the communication driver SIEMENS OP Ethernet No Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the N W No 2 connected Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connected PLC No Ethernet module 1 to 254 Default blank 57 200 OP Type Set the PLC type to be connected S7 300 400 57 1200 Set the address of the connected PLC side IP Address Ethernet module i 2 Default blank Port No 102 fixed 102 fixed Connection Set the Connection No Rack No set on the PLC side 0107 Default 0 Set the Position Slot set 87 200 Module on the PLC side OP 0 to 6 Position Slot Default pn 7 300 400 57 200 0 0 to 31 57 300 400 OP 2 Communication TCP fixed TCP fixed 1 Connection No Rack and Module Position Slot No are unnecessary for S7 1200 OP 2 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 5 Communication detail settings 1 Communication interface setting by the Utility The comm
502. thernet download Default 5015 Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs Retry When receiving no response after 0 to 5times retries the communication times out Default 3times Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the Startup Time communication with the PLC 3 to 255sec CPU Default 3sec Set the time period for a communication to time out 3 to 90sec Default 3sec Set the delay time for reducing Delay Time the load of the network 0 to 10000 destination PLC 10 ms Default Oms 1 Each of GOT PLC No set in the communication detail setting and PLC No set in the Ethernet setting must be set to different station numbers 737 m Ethernet setting Ethernet setting Controller Setting Delete Date Al _ Poste Al Setto Host Item Description Set value Host The host is displayed The host is indicated with an asterisk Set the network No of the connected N W No Ethernet module 1 to 239 Default blank Set the station No of the connected PLC No Ethernet module 1 to 64 Default blank AB EtherNet T AB EtherNet IP fixed EthierNetiF fixed IP fixed Set the IP address of the connected PLC side IP IP address Ethernet module address Default blank Port No 44818 fixed 44818 fixed C
503. thin the range of 00 to 31 O 2 Setting item PLC side setting When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 add 0 before 7 the number and set it as 00 to 09 5 a n Port SNP 6 Set the same set value for the data length for the GOT and 5 Port Type Slave Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Flow Control NONE e 2 Parity EVEN ODD NONE E ul Eu Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Q 3 Long 25 Timeout a Turn Around Delay 0 SNP ID 00 to 31 Converter Power Consumption 9 0 1 Set to SNP ZO 2 Setto Slave 9 3 Set to Long 4 SettoO 5 Setwithin the range of 00 to 31 5 When specifying the station No from 0 to 9 0 before On the number and set it as 00 to 09 6 Setto 0 only when connecting to Port2 ocu 210 FOE lt 250 529 n ul ge 58 84 OS 2 11 CONNECTION TO GE PLC 11 15 11 5 PLC Side Setting 11 5 3 Connecting to 693 311 11 5 5 Station number setting Communication settings Make the communication settings using the engineering tool When making the settings set Configuration Mode on the Setting tab of the engineering tool to SNP only Setting item PLC side setting SNP Enable YES SNP Mode Slave Interface RS232 RS485 Data Rate 9600bps 19200bps Parity ODD NONE EVEN Stop Bits 1bit 2bits Flow Control
504. ting 10 CONNECTION TO ALLEN BRADLEY PLC 10 3 Ethernet Connection 2 GT45 GT12 Property GOT GOT PLC No GOT IP Address IP Label Subnet Mask Default Gateway Ethernet Download Port No GOT Communication Port No Rietry Times Startup Time Sec Timeout 5 Delay Time x10ms Value 1 1 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 5014 5015 3 3 3 0 Item Description Range GOT NET No Set the network No of the GOT 1 to 239 Default 1 GOT PLC Set the station No of the GOT 11064 Default 1 Set the address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to GOT IP Address Default 192 168 0 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub network Only for connection via router 0 0 0 0 to If the sub network is not used the 255 255 255 255 default value is set Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the Default default gateway where the GOT is 0 0 0 0 to Gateway connected Only for connection 255 255 255 255 via router Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Ethernet Set the GOT port No for Ethernet 5014 to 65534 Download download Except for 5011 Port No Default 5014 5012 5013 44818 and 49153 Set the GOT port No for the connection with the connected 1024 to 65534 Ped equipment Except for 5011 Communication Set the port No without using the 5012 5013 44818 Port No same No as the port No for the and 49153 E
505. tings a 5 ai Sue Make the communication settings using setting OZ 422 485 0 5 422 485 RS 485 switches 2 Terminating resistor TERMINATOR Item Set value selection NORE Transmission speed 9600bps Eur MANUAL AUTO AUTO 2 DCE DTE switching DCE i Terminating resistor So selection 1 Set as necessary Settings by switch E 2 UNEEYE od RS 232C RS 485 DT CONVERTER zo za S 30 DCE DTE switch RS 232C DTE mS DCE 5 ere 7 DIP SW B 42 gt DRIVER Communication TS setting switch 2 a E 8 1 Settings of transmission speed MANUAL AUTO and terminating resistor selection Lu oe pu sa ve aa ae Switch No of DIP SWB 1 2 3 4 5 Setting item Set value issi ransmission ggoobps ON ON OFF z9 speed On lt MANUAL AUTO AUTO ON o z z Terminating Enable ON z S Og resistor gt 22 Disable OFF selection 1 Set as necessary 2 Setting of DCE DTE switching CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA PLC Setting item Set value DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE SWA r2 p 6 5 lt 8 Sob 898 5 CONNECTION FUJI TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 5 15 5 5 Temperature
506. tings 227 zo transmission timing of the 0 to 30 Ox Delay Time communication request from the x 40 5 Click the OK button when settings are completed GOT 2 10ms Default 56 ZINAR E The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following Es gt 1 1 2 communication setting 58 uon a 66 0 6 CONNECTION YASKAWA 6 15 6 2 Serial Connection 2 YASKAWA MP Property 32bit Storage Transmission Speed BP5 19200 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity Even Startup Time Sec 3 Host Address 1 Delay Time x10ms 0 Item Description Range Set this item when change the transmission 24 Transmission speed used for communication with the 19200bps Speed connected equipment Default 19200bps 38400bps 57600bps Set this item when change the data length Data Bit used for communication with the connected Bbit fixed equipment Default 8bit Specify the stop bit length for Stop Bit communications 1bit fixed Default 1bit Specify whether or not to perform a parity Parity check and how it is performed during Even fixed communication Default Even Specify the time period from the GOT startup until GOT starts the communication Startup Time with m PLC CPU 3 to 30sec Default 3sec Specify the host address
507. tion Open network Product with the open network port of RS A 1 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type UT55A Product with two RS 485 communication B 1or2 Without LP ports 4 wire type 2 wire type and without the power supply for 24VDC sensor Product without the additional contact output points DO and with the open Other than 3 1 network port of RS 485 communication 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code A model Product with the RS 485 communication port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the terminal area option Detailed code UP55A model Product with two RS 485 communication 2 ports 4 wire type 2 wire type Standard code model B Product with the RS 485 communication _ With port 4 wire type 2 wire type specified in the E4 terminal area option Detailed code model 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 21 cor 4 Temperature se If Temperature controller Hl control
508. tion extension module Z COM n g E a terminating resistor Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 Z COM Connection cable 1 Connection cable 2 GOT E umber o Max Model Communic Terminating Sable mogel Celie mecel dist connectable sc Connection diagram Connection diagram Istance Option device Model t name ation Type resistor equipmen number number Gs RS422 Up to 16 Z COMs 1200m PIS for 1 GOT connection diagram gt Built into GOT 1 2 Up to 16 1200 Z CT Up to 16 W BF 02 M GT16 CO2R4 9S 0 2m Z DIO Up to 16 p Total of Z TIO Z 0500 0 5m 7 User GT15 RS2T4 9P CT and Z DIO U W BF 02 1000 1m distin an 4 connection diagram GT15 RS4 9S to 31 for Z COM RS 422 W BW 02 W BF 02 3000 3m 2 1200m or 2 GT Up to 10 Z COMs 5 RS422 Built into GOT for 1 GOT m QU zro up to 16 Serial Up to connection diagram 3 Z CT Up to 16 785422 7 00 Up to 16 connection diagram 1200 GT14 RS2T4 9P6 ie i 2 6 Z DIO Up to 31 for Z COM os Wa RS485 1200 connection diagram 5 Built into GOT _ 5485 FA LTBGTRACBLOBS 0 5m 5 1200 W BF 02 connection diagram FA LTBGTR4CBL10 1m Up to 16 Z COMs 0500 0 5m 3 FA LTBGTR4CBL20 2m for 1 GOT 02 1000 1 22 83485 1
509. tion numbers of the temperature controller and the GOT data register tati GOT data register GD Setting range 100 GD10 11099 101 GD11 If setting a value outside the range above a device 114 GD24 range error 115 GD25 occurs 2 When there is no setting for the CPU No in the communication settings on the temperature controller side set the CPU No on the GOT side to 1 default UT2000 UTAdvanced Device No Device name Setting range in representation 9 Internal relay 1 10001 to 17072 Decimal gt E 44 Specified bit of the Word device bit following word devices Data register D0001 to D9000 8 Decimal 5 File register 2 0001 to B1600 9g Bit device word Converting bit devices _ into word 1 Only 16 bit 1 word designation is allowed 2 This is available only for UP750 and UP550 8 37 8 6 Device Range that Can Be Set PREPARATORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING CONNECTION TO HITACHI IES PLC CONNECTION TO HITACHI PLC CONNECTION TO FUJI PLC CONNECTION TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER CONNECTION TO YASKAWA PLC CONNECTION TO 99 YOKOGAWA PLC a ES 5 a lt x e gt Iz rc rr Oss Sa OTO u Ow Z EA iO gt O 9 7 Precautions Station number settings of temperature controller In the system configuration the te
510. to DB255 DBW2046 0E4099 Dawe 1 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 14 4 4 SIEMENS OP Ethernet 1 Monitoring or writing is not possible in the continuous device designation mode 2 Thisis not supported by GT10 14 4 2 SIEMENS 57 200 Series Device Device name Setting range No Device EINE represen Device name Setting range Do tation represen variable memory VO to V102397 tation Input relay 1 10 to 1655357 Decimal variable memory V V0 1o V51197 _ a Output relay Q Q0 to 0655357 Octal Input relay 1 10 to 177 lay Q0 to 077 Decimal 3 Bit memory M 0 to M655357 Q Octal 5 Specified bit of the following 8 Bit memory MO to M317 word devices Except 5 special memory SM SMO to SM1947 Word device bit variable memory Input Decimal Timer T TO to T255 relay Output relay Bit Decimal memory Timer Counter Counter C to C255 variable memory VW VWO to VW10238 Decimal sequence control relay S S0 to S317 22 Input relay IW IWO to IW65534 Output relay QW QWO to QW65534 VW VWO to VW5118 variable memory VW Bit memory MW MWO to MW65534 Input relay IW IWO to IW6 33 Timer T 24 TO to T65535 Output relay QW QWO to QW6 AIWO to AIW30 g Coun
511. to be used Ad No of the adapter to which the GOT Driver Set either of the following en is connected in the connected 1 to 31 When connecting to SIEMENS S7 300 400 Address network SIEMENS S7 300 400 Default 1 When connecting to SIEMENS 57 200 Specify the host address station No d of the PLC that the GOT will monitor Host Address in the connected network 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Default 2 Controller Type I F and Driver are set 1 Setthe address without overlapping the address of other Make the settings according to the usage 2 GOT automatically sets the values of Transmission environment Speed Adapter Address and Host Address to the HMI CF 14 2 4 mCommunication detail settings Adapter Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 57 1 1 2 I F communication setting 14 6 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 2 Serial Connection 2 SIEMENS 57 200 14 2 5 PLC Side Setting 5 ra Property Value E d Transmission Speed BPS 13200 5 j Data Bit 8 bit POINT Stop Bit 1 bit 20 2 Parity Even SIEMENS PLC E ce Adapter Sater For details of SIEMENS PLCs refer to the following Host Address 2 manuals 3 SIEMENS PLC user s Manual an
512. troller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps 38400bps Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Item Setting range Communication speed 9600bps 19200bps Communication protocol MODBUS BN1 8bit None bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit BO2 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 8 1 8bit None bit BN2 8bit None 2bit BE1 8bit Even 1bit BE2 8bit Even 2bit BO1 8bit Odd 1bit 802 8bit Odd 2bit Data bit configuration Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Device address 4 Slave address Device address 2 4 Slave address 11099 Interval time 0 to 250 ms 1 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Selectthe device address1 without overlapping with that of other units 3 Set the maximum time from the sending of the last character stop bit from the GOT side until the switching of the GOT side to the receiving status until the temperature controller becomes ready to send Set as necessary 4 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 9 5 11 Connecting to RMC500 Communication settings Make the communication settings by operating the key of the temperature controller Interval time
513. troller Signal name PXR3 PXR4 PXR5 9 PXG4 PXG5 9 PXH9 Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No 15 7 1 7 1 14 14 8 2 8 2 16 Terminating resistor should be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal Set the 2 wire 4 wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor as follows 2 wire type 4 wire type 2 wire type 1Pair Terminating resistor 1100 1 4 4 Setting the RS 232 485 signal conversion adaptor Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line Precautions when preparing a cable 1 Cable length The length of the RS 485 cable must be 500m or less 2 GOT side connector For the GOT side connector refer to the following 737 1 4 1 connector specifications 3 FUJI temperature controller side connector Use the connector compatible with the FUJI temperature controller side For details refer to the user s manual of the FUJI temperature controller Connecting terminating resistors 1 GOT side When connecting a PLC to the GOT a terminating resistor must be connected to the GOT a For GT16 GT15 GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to 100 OHM b For GT14 GT11 Set the terminating resistor selector to 110 For the procedure to set the terminating resistor refer to the following 237 1 4 3 Terminating resistors of GOT 2 FUJI temperature contr
514. tting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment Controller Setting 8 Controller Setting QD CH 1 YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 Standard 1 85232 YOKOGAWA FASOD FA M3 STARDOM ile Transfer iy 0 Redundant A Station No Switching Delay Time si0ms 1 Apply 1 Select Common gt Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controller Type Set either of the followings FA500 FA M3 STARDOM FA M3 I F Interface to be used Driver YOKOGAWAFA500 FA M3 STARDOM 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 57 7T 2 5bmCommunication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 2327 1 12 I F communication setting Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment Property Value Transmission Speed BP5 Delay 1 9600 Data Bit 8 bit Stop Bit 1 bit Parity None Sum Check Do
515. ttings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 gt GTO User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 2 5 PLC Side Setting HITACHI IES PLC For details of the HITACHI IES PLC refer to the following manual gt HITACHI IES PLC user s Manual Directly connecting to the CPU Item Set value 4800bps 9600bps Transmission speed 19200bps 38400bps Station No 0 Data bit Tbit Stop bit Parity bit Even Control Method DTR control Communication format RS 232 Sum check Done Protocol transmission control procedure 1 1 Indicates only the transmission speeds that be set the GOT side 2 transmission speed setting must be consistent with that of the GOT side For the transmission speed setting on the GOT side refer to the following 3 2 4 2 Communication detail settings 3 setting range varies with the connected PLC Connecting to the intelligent serial port module 1 For transmission control procedure1 Item Set value Transmission speed 19200bps Station No 0 Data bit Stop bit Abit Parity bit Even Control Method None Communication format For RS 232 communication RS 232 MODE switch 2 For RS 422 communication RS 422 MODE switch 2 Sum check Done
516. ue 0 CFG file ZCOM_rkc cfg Communication 1 interval time 0 to 250ms Communication 2 interval time For the using method of RKC communication setting tool refer to the following gt RKC communication setting tool user s manual 9 5 5 Connecting to CB Series 1 Communication settings Item Setting range Device address 1 to 99 Me gt 2 9600bps Communication speed 3 19200bps 0 8 1 None Data bit configuration 6 8 1 Even 7 8 1 Odd Interval time 0 to 150 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 2 Adjust the settings with GOT settings 2 Communication setting mode Set the communication setting mode using the operation panel of the CB series main unit For details of the communication setting mode refer to the following L gt CB series Communication Instruction Manual 9 CONNECTION TO RKC TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 9 5 6 Connecting to FB Series 1 Communication settings Setting range Communication protocol 1 MODBUS Device address 1 to 99 Slave address 2 96 9600bps 19 2 19200bps 38 4 38400bps Communication speed Data bit configuration 2 Refer to the data bit configuration 0 to 250 Interval time 1 Items and setting range to communication 1 and communication 2 72 When the setting value is set to 0 a communication is not made 3 Adjust the settin
517. ue GOT NET No 1 GOT PLC No 1 GOT IP Address 192 168 3 18 IP Label Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Download Port No 5014 GOT Communication Port No 5017 Retry T imes 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay Time x10ms 0 Item Description Range Set the network No of the GOT GOT NET No 1 to 239 Default 1 Set the station No of the GOT GOT PLC No 2 1 to 64 Default 1 GOT Set the IP address of the GOT 0 0 0 0 to IP address Default 192 168 3 18 255 255 255 255 Set the subnet mask for the sub Subnet network When the subnetwork is not 0 0 0 6 to Mask teed only via router the operation 255 255 255 255 is executed with the default value Default 255 255 255 0 Set the router address of the default Default gateway where the GOT is 0 0 0 0 to Gateway connected Only for connection via 255 255 255 255 router Default 0 0 0 0 1024 to 5010 Ethernet Set the GOT port No for Ethernet 5014 to 65534 Download Port download Except for 5011 No Default 5014 5012 5013 and 49153 Set the GOT port No for the ete GOT i 5014 65534 connection with the Ethernet Communication Except for 5011 Port No module Default 5017 5012 5013 and 49153 Retry Set the number of retries to be performed when a communication timeout occurs When receiving no response after retries the communication times out Default 3times 0 to 5times
518. uld be provided for a temperature controller which will be a terminal 3 on the terminating switch on the RS232C RS485 converter at the end 4 Connect FG grounding to the appropriate part of a cable shield line 8 CONNECTION TO YOKOGAWA TEMPERATURE CONTROLLER 8 3 Connection Diagram RS485 connection diagram 13 GOT side jase nde de 1 Temperature controller controller amp a rd POS ES Se oco 108 aua e uas T RSB Edo pd i RSA 1 1 1 2 o RSA ese tt RDA1 3 E X 56 n SG r1 IHE RDB1 4 id ie T A d 592 1 1 SDA2 5 i i cos 1 E SDB2 6 11 i Terminating resistor 100Q 1 4W 2 1 1 RDA2 7 i i 1 1 2 E E i SG 9 1 11 80 RE Lr 2 FG 10 I 2 1 Pin No of temperature controller differs depending on the model Refer to the following table E Model of temperature controller Signal GREEN Series UT100 Series UT100 Series UTAdvanced Series UTAdvanced Series UT750 UP750 UT130 UT150 UP150 UT152 UT155 UT52A UM33A UT55A UP55A Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No Pin No o RSB 28 3 26 301 501 RSA 29 4 27 302 502 o 3 SG 30 5 28 303 503 9 22 2 Terminating resistor should be provided for
519. unication detail 5 11 5 5 Temperature Controller Side 5 13 5 541 Gonnecting to PXR39 4 5I9 ui iro p Ire ed epis 5 13 5 5 2 Connecting to PXG4 PXG5 or 5 13 919 3 Connecting to PAHI ic cidit deret rei eden 5 14 5 5 4 Connecting to interface converter 77 5 14 5 5 5 Connecting to interface converter 5 30 5 15 5 5 6 Connecting to interface converter 5 485 5 16 5 5 7 Connecting to interface converter 35 10 5 16 5 5 8 Station a a itr 5 17 5 6 Device Range that Can 4 022 0 1 114 41 0 5 18 FUJIPXR PXQG PXH 2 ineo dn af e erred ate iad tial 5 19 5 67 Precautioris bo bte oT pe IE Pia eee tete a MR RAS 5 19 CONNECTION YASKAWA PLC 6 7 lt Connectable Modell EISt 5 5 dote 6 2 6 27 EE 6 3 6 2 1 System configuration for connecting to 61120 or 130 6 3 6 2 2 System configuration for connecting to GL60S GL60H or GL70H 6 4 6 2 3 System configuration for connecting to MP 920 93
520. unication interface setting can be changed on the Utility s Communication setting after writing Communication Settings of project data For details on the Utility refer to the following manual 2 gt User s Manual 2 Precedence in communication settings When settings are made by GT Designer3 or the Utility the latest setting is effective 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 13 14 3 Ethernet Connection 9 59 Qt i uz zu oe pen On 14 3 4 side setting 2 Ethernet connection type OP communication a S7 200 Set the following parameters POINT Item Setting details Module Position Value in Position of the Ethernet module SIEMENS PLC Address PLC side IP address For details of SIEMENS PLCs refer to the following M odule Address Subnet manuals PLC side subnet mask gt SIEMENS PLC user s Manual Number of Set 1 as the number of connected GOT configure for this Parameter settings module Set the following parameters with the SIEMENS This is a Server software packa connection Servers respond to connection Mark the check box 1 Ethernet connection type FETCH WRITE from remote a Settings of IP address and subnet mask SENS Local rti Cee Select Accept all connection requests Setting details Server IP Address side IP address Re
521. using a data register Setting more than one data block cannot be done for the data register b Object that cannot be set Timer current value T Only one device can be set for the write target of this device Therefore multiple devices such as using the recipe function etc cannot be used c Notation method of the data registers with the bit specification The notation of the data registers with the bit specification differs between the GOT and the PLC The following shows the correspondence table Device name Displays the device type and setting range which are Inf selected Device Set the monitor target of the set device Host Select this item to monitor the controller specified Network as the host station in the GOT utility setup Select this item to monitor a controller other than Oth er the one specified as the host station Notation in GOT Notation in PLC DB1 DBWO bO DB1 DBX1 0 DB1 DBWO b1 DB1 DBX1 1 DB1 DBWO b7 DB1 DBX1 7 DB1 DBWO b8 DB1 DBX0 0 DB1 DBWO b15 DB1 DBX0 7 DB1 DBW2 b0 DB1 DBX3 0 DB1 DBW2 b7 DB1 DBX3 7 DB1 DBW2 b8 DB1 DBX2 0 DB1 DBW2 b15 DB1 DBX2 7 14 CONNECTION TO SIEMENS PLC 14 17 14 4 Device Range that Can Be Set RKC TEMPERATURE CONNECTION TO CONTROLLER ALLEN BRADLEY CONNECTION TO PLC CONNECTION TO GE PLC CONNECTION TOLS INDUSTRIAL SYSTEMS PLC CONNECTION TO SICK SAFETY
522. uting Information amp Gateway Communication S El Gateway Server BE Gateway Client Mail FTP Server Fig File Transfer FTP iy 0 Redundant Station No Switching Standard F Ethemet Mult EthemetlY DKOGANWA Gateway Property GOT NET No GOT PLC No GOT IP Address IP Label Subnet Mask 2552552550 Default Gateway 0000 Ethemet Download No 5014 GOT Communication Port 5017 Retry Times 3 Startup Time Sec 3 Timeout Time Sec 3 Delay 1 0 192 168 318 Lok 1 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the menu 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the channel to be used from the list menu 3 Set the following items Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controller Type STARDOM FA M3 I F Interface to be used Driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA Gateway 4 The detailed setting is displayed after Manufacturer Controller Type I F and Driver are set Make the settings according to the usage environment 5 7 3 2 m Communication detail settings Click the OK button when settings are completed The settings of connecting equipment can be confirmed in I F Communication Setting For details refer to the following 727 1 12 communication setting Communication detail settings Make the settings according to the usage environment 1 GT16 GT14 Property Val
523. with software for programming YOKOGAWA PLC apparatus When a device outside the range is set on an object an mm Saree indefinite value is displayed the object amp No error is displayed in the system alarm zi 0 0 IF address 255 255 255 255 connected Ethernet module For details on the device range of YOROGAWA PLCs E 8 Host link service 0 Select the protocol to be used referto the following manual 5 5 2 _ 42 inthe port A of the host link gt 7 4 Device Range that Can Set pE Port No 12289 1 00 service via Ethernet OT Hes IE CORDE When setting IP address Select the command data type a omen O ASCII format to be used the port A of the Do not use I ap a at the end of an IP address ata type hostilink ssrvice via Eihemet Numbers of 0 and 255 are used by the 12289 system 2 9 Host link service B 1 _ Select the protocol to be used The GOT may not monitor the controller correctly with protocol the port B of the host link the above numbers 2 5 Port No 1112291 senice via Consult with the administrator of the network before OF 422 Select the command data type setting an IP address to the GOT and controller 2 O ASCII format be used in the port B of the data host link service via Ethernet E When connecting to multiple GOTs Port No 12291
524. work system Connect to the Ethernet module hub transceiver or other system equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system Use cables connectors and hubs that meet the IEEE802 3 10BASE T 100BASE TX standards 3 A length between a hub and a node The maximum distance differs depending on the Ethernet device to be used The following shows the number of the connectable nodes when a repeater hub is used 10BASE T 4 nodes for a cascade connection 500m 100BASE TX Max 2 nodes for a cascade connection 205m When switching hubs are used the cascade connection between the switching hubs has no logical limit for the number of cascades For the limit contact the switching hub manufacturer 4 When connecting GT16 of the function version A to an equipment that meets the 10BASE T 2 5 standard use the switching hub and operate a 10Mbps 100Mbps mixed environment For how to check the function version refer to the following GT16 User s Manual b GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connection are only GT1455 QTBDE GT1450 QMBDE and GT1450 QLBDE 7 16 7 CONNECTION YOKOGAWA PLC 7 3 Ethernet Connection 7 3 2 GOT Side Settings Setting communication interface Communication settings Set the channel of the connected equipment CH 1 YOKOGAWA STAI CH2 None CH3 None CH 4 None Manufacturer YOKOGAWA Controller Type YOKOGAWA STARDOM FA M3 E Ethemet Ro
525. woz When using the RS232C RS485 converter xO Communication driver Lir UIT YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 9 UT2000 UTAdvanced 5 n Connection cable 2 za Connection cable 1 2 Temperature RS232C RS485 gt P Connection cable 1 T Connection cable 2 GOT 9 controller converter F umber Cable model connectable eo Connection Max Model Cable model Max Option ipment Model name nication 5 equipmen diagram distance name Connection diagram number distance device number M UT320 UT321 E f Built into UT350 2785485 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m GOT or UT351 connection 6744 1200 ML2 RS 232 15 UT420 diagram 1 0597 85232 connection UT450 4 wire type diagram 1 Ze Be UT520 GT15 RS2 9P 5 3 UT550 UTS51 017502 Built into Cm m UP350 GOT z 6111 UP351 Uss RS485 GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m Up to 31 Ex Yeparing ti or temperature em connection 42 1200 ML2 RS 232 15m diagram 6 55588232 connection controllers for 1 9 Meee 2 wire type diagram 1 GOT 5 UM331 GT15 RS2 9P OFO UM350 UM351 US1000 Built int Ue T GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m APUPUTHO GB ga UP7503 0485 ii G91 diit i connection 1200m ML2 RS 232 15 2 077503 diagram 12 55588232 connection 2 2 wire type diagram 1 o gt GT15 RS2 9P 51 Product manufactured by
526. y etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Replace battery with GT15 BAT GT16 GT15 or GT11 50BAT GT14 GT12 GT11 GT10 by Mitsubishi electric Co only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire TOUCH PANEL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION e For the analog resistive film type touch panels normally the adjustment is not required However the difference between a touched position and the object position may occur as the period of use elapses When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs execute the touch panel calibration When any difference between a touched position and the object position occurs other object may be activated This may cause an unexpected operation due to incorrect output or malfunction BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS e to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT and the PLC CPU in the case of a bus topology and remove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an electric shock Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or control panel to drop resulting in an injury CAUTION e Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using
527. y fiver LS Industrial Systems MASTER K e E sacs see Item Description Range z NI C M Set this ttem when change the 9600bps o Fa Be fige ET 168 Transmission transmission Speed used for 19200bps 0 Redundant communication with the connected 38400bps zd A Station No Switching Parity Speed a 20 Retiy Times equipment 57600bps Default 38400bps 115200bps Delay Time ms Set this item when change the data Data Bit length used for communication with 7bits 8bits the connected equipment JL ees Default 8bits T Specify the stop bit length for im Stop Bit communications 1bit 2bits E Default 1bit m 2 Specify whether not to perform in M None gt parity check and how it is performed Zo Parity during communication Odd 1 Select Common Controller Setting from the Default None Set the number of retries to be menu S performed when a communication Retry Eira GEER 0 to Stimes 2 The Controller Setting window is displayed Select the Default 3times Sr channel to be used from the list menu Set the time period for a 5 m 5 Timeout Time communication to time out 3 to 30sec s 2 3 Set the following items Default 3sec 505 5 Specify the host address station No Manufacturer LS Industrial System dus 2 Sys ems of the PLC to which the GOT is Controller Type
528. ype Connector model Manufacturer 8 162 14 pin female HDR EC14LFDT1 SLE Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd GT14 GT12 GT1155 QTBD C or later 9 pin D sub female 9 E GT1155 QSBD M2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd E e F or later fixed type 6E GT1150 QLBD YP GT105 Q C or later GT104 Q A or later E GT1030 B or later 9 terminal block MC1 5 9 G 3 5BK PHOENIX CONTACT Inc GT1020 E or later a 9 pin D sub female E GT15 RS4 9S 2 6 millimeter screw 17LE 13090 27 D3AC DDK Ltd fixed type GT15 RS4 TE SL SMT3 5 10 90F BOX Weidmuller interconnections inc 1 For the checking procedure of the hardware version refer to the User s Manual 42 When connecting to the RS 422 485 interface use HDR E14MAG1 as a cable connector To use 14 1 dedicated pressure welding tool is required For details on the connector and pressure welding tool contact Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co Ltd Q 9 3 terminal block MC1 5 9 ST 3 5 or corresponding product of the cable side is packed together with the GT1030 and zm GT1020 3 2 Connector pin arrangement GT15 GT14 GT12 GT11 GT1 5 GT16 E i 0507 671030 671020 5 GT104 gt main part connector GOT main part connector See from the back of a 5 pu see from the front see from the front GOT main part EE NE 258248890 wrur 14 pin female

GOT1000 Series Connection Manual (Non

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents